US20130250929A1 - Uplink Sounding Transmission with Carrier Aggregation - Google Patents

Uplink Sounding Transmission with Carrier Aggregation Download PDF

Info

Publication number
US20130250929A1
US20130250929A1 US13/899,618 US201313899618A US2013250929A1 US 20130250929 A1 US20130250929 A1 US 20130250929A1 US 201313899618 A US201313899618 A US 201313899618A US 2013250929 A1 US2013250929 A1 US 2013250929A1
Authority
US
United States
Prior art keywords
wireless device
secondary cell
random access
cell group
scell
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Granted
Application number
US13/899,618
Other versions
US8531966B1 (en
Inventor
Esmael Hejazi Dinan
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Comcast Cable Communications LLC
Original Assignee
Individual
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Individual filed Critical Individual
Priority to US13/899,618 priority Critical patent/US8531966B1/en
Priority to US13/947,052 priority patent/US8553558B1/en
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of US8531966B1 publication Critical patent/US8531966B1/en
Publication of US20130250929A1 publication Critical patent/US20130250929A1/en
Assigned to COMCAST CABLE COMMUNICATIONS, LLC reassignment COMCAST CABLE COMMUNICATIONS, LLC ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: OFINNO TECHNOLOGIES, LLC
Assigned to OFINNO TECHNOLOGIES, LLC reassignment OFINNO TECHNOLOGIES, LLC ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: DINAN, ESMAEL
Active legal-status Critical Current
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/50Allocation or scheduling criteria for wireless resources
    • H04W72/52Allocation or scheduling criteria for wireless resources based on load
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W56/00Synchronisation arrangements
    • H04W56/004Synchronisation arrangements compensating for timing error of reception due to propagation delay
    • H04W56/0045Synchronisation arrangements compensating for timing error of reception due to propagation delay compensating for timing error by altering transmission time
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W56/00Synchronisation arrangements
    • H04W56/0005Synchronisation arrangements synchronizing of arrival of multiple uplinks
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W56/00Synchronisation arrangements
    • H04W56/001Synchronization between nodes
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/20Control channels or signalling for resource management
    • H04W72/23Control channels or signalling for resource management in the downlink direction of a wireless link, i.e. towards a terminal
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W74/00Wireless channel access
    • H04W74/002Transmission of channel access control information
    • H04W74/006Transmission of channel access control information in the downlink, i.e. towards the terminal

Definitions

  • FIG. 1 is a diagram depicting example sets of OFDM subcarriers as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present invention
  • FIG. 2 is a diagram depicting an example transmission time and reception time for two carriers in a carrier group as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present invention
  • FIG. 3 is a diagram depicting OFDM radio resources as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 4 is a block diagram of a base station and a wireless device as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present invention
  • FIG. 5 is a block diagram depicting a system for transmitting data traffic over an OFDM radio system as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present invention
  • FIG. 6 is a diagram depicting uplink transmission timing of one or more cells in a first timing advance group (TAG) and a second TAG as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present invention
  • FIG. 7 is an example message flow in a random access process in a secondary TAG as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 8 shows example TAG configurations as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 9 is an example physical random access channel (PRACH) configuration in a primary TAG (pTAG) and a secondary TAG (sTAG) as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present invention
  • FIG. 10 is an example flow diagram illustrating timing reference change as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 11 is an example flow diagram illustrating an unsuccessful random access process as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 12 is an example flow diagram illustrating an unsuccessful random access process as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 13 is an example flow diagram illustrating an unsuccessful random access process as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 14 is an example flow diagram illustrating mechanisms in a wireless device when a time alignment timer expires as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present invention
  • FIG. 15 is an example flow diagram illustrating a base station process for configuring multiple cell groups as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 16 is an example flow diagram illustrating a process for sounding transmission as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present invention.
  • Example embodiments of the present invention enable operation of multiple timing advance groups.
  • Embodiments of the technology disclosed herein may be employed in the technical field of multicarrier communication systems. More particularly, the embodiments of the technology disclosed herein may relate to operation of multiple timing advance groups.
  • Example embodiments of the invention may be implemented using various physical layer modulation and transmission mechanisms.
  • Example transmission mechanisms may include, but are not limited to: CDMA (code division multiple access), OFDM (orthogonal frequency division multiplexing), TDMA (time division multiple access), Wavelet technologies, and/or the like.
  • Hybrid transmission mechanisms such as TDMA/CDMA, and OFDM/CDMA may also be employed.
  • Various modulation schemes may be applied for signal transmission in the physical layer. Examples of modulation schemes include, but are not limited to: phase, amplitude, code, a combination of these, and/or the like.
  • An example radio transmission method may implement QAM (quadrature amplitude modulation) using BPSK (binary phase shift keying), QPSK (quadrature phase shift keying), 16-QAM, 64-QAM, 256-QAM, and/or the like.
  • Physical radio transmission may be enhanced by dynamically or semi-dynamically changing the modulation and coding scheme depending on transmission requirements and radio conditions.
  • FIG. 1 is a diagram depicting example sets of OFDM subcarriers as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present invention.
  • arrow(s) in the diagram may depict a subcarrier in a multicarrier OFDM system.
  • the OFDM system may use technology such as OFDM technology, SC-OFDM (single carrier-OFDM) technology, or the like.
  • arrow 101 shows a subcarrier transmitting information symbols.
  • FIG. 1 is for illustration purposes, and a typical multicarrier OFDM system may include more subcarriers in a carrier.
  • the number of subcarriers in a carrier may be in the range of 10 to 10,000 subcarriers.
  • FIG. 1 shows two guard bands 106 and 107 in a transmission band.
  • guard band 106 is between subcarriers 103 and subcarriers 104 .
  • the example set of subcarriers A 102 includes subcarriers 103 and subcarriers 104 .
  • FIG. 1 also illustrates an example set of subcarriers B 105 . As illustrated, there is no guard band between any two subcarriers in the example set of subcarriers B 105 .
  • Carriers in a multicarrier OFDM communication system may be contiguous carriers, non-contiguous carriers, or a combination of both contiguous and non-contiguous carriers.
  • FIG. 2 is a diagram depicting an example transmission time and reception time for two carriers as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present invention.
  • a multicarrier OFDM communication system may include one or more carriers, for example, ranging from 1 to 10 carriers.
  • Carrier A 204 and carrier B 205 may have the same or different timing structures. Although FIG. 2 shows two synchronized carriers, carrier A 204 and carrier B 205 may or may not be synchronized with each other.
  • Different radio frame structures may be supported for FDD (frequency division duplex) and TDD (time division duplex) duplex mechanisms.
  • FIG. 2 shows an example FDD frame timing. Downlink and uplink transmissions may be organized into radio frames 201 . In this example, radio frame duration is 10 msec.
  • each 10 ms radio frame 201 may be divided into ten equally sized sub-frames 202 .
  • Other subframe durations such as including 0.5 msec, 1 msec, 2 msec, and 5 msec may also be supported.
  • Sub-frame(s) may consist of two or more slots 206 .
  • 10 subframes may be available for downlink transmission and 10 subframes may be available for uplink transmissions in each 10 ms interval. Uplink and downlink transmissions may be separated in the frequency domain.
  • Slot(s) may include a plurality of OFDM symbols 203 . The number of OFDM symbols 203 in a slot 206 may depend on the cyclic prefix length and subcarrier spacing.
  • FIG. 3 is a diagram depicting OFDM radio resources as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the resource grid structure in time 304 and frequency 305 is illustrated in FIG. 3 .
  • the quantity of downlink subcarriers or resource blocks (RB) (in this example 6 to 100 RBs) may depend, at least in part, on the downlink transmission bandwidth 306 configured in the cell.
  • the smallest radio resource unit may be called a resource element (e.g. 301 ).
  • Resource elements may be grouped into resource blocks (e.g. 302 ).
  • Resource blocks may be grouped into larger radio resources called Resource Block Groups (RBG) (e.g. 303 ).
  • RBG Resource Block Groups
  • the transmitted signal in slot 206 may be described by one or several resource grids of a plurality of subcarriers and a plurality of OFDM symbols.
  • Resource blocks may be used to describe the mapping of certain physical channels to resource elements.
  • Other pre-defined groupings of physical resource elements may be implemented in the system depending on the radio technology. For example, 24 subcarriers may be grouped as a radio block for a duration of 5 msec.
  • a resource block may correspond to one slot in the time domain and 180 kHz in the frequency domain (for 15 KHz subcarrier bandwidth and 12 subcarriers).
  • a radio resource framework using OFDM technology may be employed.
  • Alternative embodiments may be implemented employing other radio technologies.
  • Example transmission mechanisms include, but are not limited to: CDMA, OFDM, TDMA, Wavelet technologies, and/or the like.
  • Hybrid transmission mechanisms such as TDMA/CDMA, and OFDM/CDMA may also be employed.
  • FIG. 4 is an example block diagram of a base station 401 and a wireless device 406 , as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present invention.
  • a communication network 400 may include at least one base station 401 and at least one wireless device 406 .
  • the base station 401 may include at least one communication interface 402 , at least one processor 403 , and at least one set of program code instructions 405 stored in non-transitory memory 404 and executable by the at least one processor 403 .
  • the wireless device 406 may include at least one communication interface 407 , at least one processor 408 , and at least one set of program code instructions 410 stored in non-transitory memory 409 and executable by the at least one processor 408 .
  • Communication interface 402 in base station 401 may be configured to engage in communication with communication interface 407 in wireless device 406 via a communication path that includes at least one wireless link 411 .
  • Wireless link 411 may be a bi-directional link.
  • Communication interface 407 in wireless device 406 may also be configured to engage in a communication with communication interface 402 in base station 401 .
  • Base station 401 and wireless device 406 may be configured to send and receive data over wireless link 411 using multiple frequency carriers.
  • transceiver(s) may be employed.
  • a transceiver is a device that includes both a transmitter and receiver. Transceivers may be employed in devices such as wireless devices, base stations, relay nodes, and/or the like.
  • Example embodiments for radio technology implemented in communication interface 402 , 407 and wireless link 411 are illustrated are FIG. 1 , FIG. 2 , and FIG. 3 . and associated text.
  • FIG. 5 is a block diagram depicting a system 500 for transmitting data traffic generated by a wireless device 502 to a server 508 over a multicarrier OFDM radio according to one aspect of the illustrative embodiments.
  • the system 500 may include a Wireless Cellular Network/Internet Network 507 , which may function to provide connectivity between one or more wireless devices 502 (e.g., a cell phone, PDA (personal digital assistant), other wirelessly-equipped device, and/or the like), one or more servers 508 (e.g. multimedia server, application servers, email servers, or database servers) and/or the like.
  • wireless devices 502 e.g., a cell phone, PDA (personal digital assistant), other wirelessly-equipped device, and/or the like
  • servers 508 e.g. multimedia server, application servers, email servers, or database servers
  • the access network may include a plurality of base stations 503 . . . 504 .
  • Base station 503 . . . 504 of the access network may function to transmit and receive RF (radio frequency) radiation 505 . . . 506 at one or more carrier frequencies, and the RF radiation may provide one or more air interfaces over which the wireless device 502 may communicate with the base stations 503 . . . 504 .
  • the user 501 may use the wireless device (or UE: user equipment) to receive data traffic, such as one or more multimedia files, data files, pictures, video files, or voice mails, etc.
  • the wireless device 502 may include applications such as web email, email applications, upload and ftp applications, MMS (multimedia messaging system) applications, or file sharing applications.
  • the wireless device 502 may automatically send traffic to a server 508 without direct involvement of a user. For example, consider a wireless camera with automatic upload feature, or a video camera uploading videos to the remote server 508 , or a personal computer equipped with an application transmitting traffic to a remote server.
  • One or more base stations 503 . . . 504 may define a corresponding wireless coverage area.
  • the RF radiation 505 . . . 506 of the base stations 503 . . . 504 may carry communications between the Wireless Cellular Network/Internet Network 507 and access device 502 according to any of a variety of protocols.
  • RF radiation 505 . . . 506 may carry communications according to WiMAX (Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access e.g., IEEE 802.16), LTE (long term evolution), microwave, satellite, MMDS (Multichannel Multipoint Distribution Service), Wi-Fi (e.g., IEEE 802.11), Bluetooth, infrared, and other protocols now known or later developed.
  • WiMAX Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access
  • LTE long term evolution
  • microwave satellite
  • MMDS Multichannel Multipoint Distribution Service
  • Wi-Fi e.g., IEEE 802.11
  • Bluetooth infrared
  • the communication between the wireless device 502 and the server 508 may be enabled by any networking and transport technology for example TCP/IP (transport control protocol/Internet protocol), RTP (real time protocol), RTCP (real time control protocol), HTTP (Hypertext Transfer Protocol) or any other networking protocol.
  • TCP/IP transport control protocol/Internet protocol
  • RTP real time protocol
  • RTCP real time control protocol
  • HTTP Hypertext Transfer Protocol
  • an LTE network may include many base stations, providing a user plane (PDCP: packet data convergence protocol/RLC: radio link control/MAC: media access control/PHY: physical) and control plane (RRC: radio resource control) protocol terminations towards the wireless device.
  • the base station(s) may be interconnected with other base station(s) by means of an X2 interface.
  • the base stations may also be connected by means of an S1 interface to an EPC (Evolved Packet Core).
  • EPC Evolved Packet Core
  • the base stations may be interconnected to the MME (Mobility Management Entity) by means of the S1-MME interface and to the Serving Gateway (S-GW) by means of the S1-U interface.
  • MME Mobility Management Entity
  • S-GW Serving Gateway
  • the S1 interface may support a many-to-many relation between MMEs/Serving Gateways and base stations.
  • a base station may include many sectors for example: 1, 2, 3, 4, or 6 sectors.
  • a base station may include many cells, for example, ranging from 1 to 50 cells or more.
  • a cell may be categorized, for example, as a primary cell or secondary cell.
  • a wireless device may have one RRC connection with the network.
  • one serving cell may provide the NAS (non-access stratum) mobility information (e.g. TAI-tracking area identifier), and at RRC connection re-establishment/handover, one serving cell may provide the security input.
  • NAS non-access stratum
  • TAI-tracking area identifier e.g. TAI-tracking area identifier
  • This cell may be referred to as the Primary Cell (PCell).
  • the carrier corresponding to the PCell may be the Downlink Primary Component Carrier (DL PCC), while in the uplink, it may be the Uplink Primary Component Carrier (UL PCC).
  • DL PCC Downlink Primary Component Carrier
  • U PCC Uplink Primary Component Carrier
  • SCells Secondary Cells
  • the carrier corresponding to an SCell may be a Downlink Secondary Component Carrier (DL SCC), while in the uplink, it may be an Uplink Secondary Component Carrier (UL SCC).
  • An SCell may or may not have an uplink carrier.
  • a cell comprising a downlink carrier and optionally an uplink carrier, is assigned a physical cell ID and a cell index.
  • a carrier (downlink or uplink) belongs to only one cell, the cell ID or Cell index may also identify the downlink carrier or uplink carrier of the cell (depending on the context it is used).
  • cell ID may be equally referred to a carrier ID, and cell index may be referred to carrier index.
  • the physical cell ID or cell index may be assigned to a cell.
  • Cell ID may be determined using the synchronization signal transmitted on a downlink carrier.
  • Cell index may be determined using RRC messages.
  • first physical cell ID for a first downlink carrier
  • first physical cell ID is for a cell comprising the first downlink carrier.
  • carrier activation when the specification indicates that a first carrier is activated, it equally means that the cell comprising the first carrier is activated.
  • Embodiments may be configured to operate as needed.
  • the disclosed mechanism may be performed when certain criteria are met, for example, in wireless device, base station, radio environment, network, a combination of the above, and/or the like.
  • Example criteria may be based, at least in part, on for example, traffic load, initial system set up, packet sizes, traffic characteristics, a combination of the above, and/or the like.
  • the example embodiments may be applied. Therefore, it may be possible to implement example embodiments that selectively implement disclosed protocols.
  • Example embodiments of the invention may enable operation of multiple timing advance groups.
  • Other example embodiments may comprise a non-transitory tangible computer readable media comprising instructions executable by one or more processors to cause operation of multiple timing advance groups.
  • Yet other example embodiments may comprise an article of manufacture that comprises a non-transitory tangible computer readable machine-accessible medium having instructions encoded thereon for enabling programmable hardware to cause a device (e.g. wireless communicator, UE, base station, etc.) to enable operation of multiple timing advance groups.
  • the device may include processors, memory, interfaces, and/or the like.
  • Other example embodiments may comprise communication networks comprising devices such as base stations, wireless devices (or user equipment: UE), servers, switches, antennas, and/or the like.
  • serving cells having an uplink to which the same time alignment (TA) applies may be grouped in a TA group (TAG).
  • Serving cells in one TAG may use the same timing reference.
  • a user equipment (UE) may use one downlink carrier as the timing reference at a given time.
  • the UE may use a downlink carrier in a TAG as the timing reference for that TAG.
  • a UE may synchronize uplink subframe and frame transmission timing of the uplink carriers belonging to the same TAG.
  • serving cells having an uplink to which the same TA applies may correspond to the serving cells hosted by the same receiver.
  • a TA group may comprise at least one serving cell with a configured uplink.
  • a UE supporting multiple TAs may support two or more TA groups.
  • One TA group may contain the PCell and may be called a primary TAG (pTAG).
  • pTAG primary TAG
  • sTAG secondary TAG
  • Carriers within the same TA group may use the same TA value and the same timing reference.
  • timing advance group, time alignment group, and cell group have the same meaning. Further, time alignment command and timing advance command have the same meaning.
  • FIG. 6 is a diagram depicting uplink transmission timing of one or more cells in a first timing advance group (TAG1) and a second TAG (TAG2) as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present invention.
  • TAG1 may include one or more cells
  • TAG2 may also include one or more cells.
  • TAG timing difference in FIG. 6 may be the difference in UE uplink transmission timing for uplink carriers in TAG1 and TAG2. The timing difference may range between, for example, sub micro-seconds to about 3o micro-seconds.
  • FIG. 8 shows example TAG configurations as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present invention.
  • pTAG include PCell, and sTAG includes SCell1.
  • pTAG includes PCell and SCell1, and sTAG includes SCell2 and SCell3.
  • pTAG includes PCell and SCell1, and sTAG1 includes SCell2 and SCell3, and sTAG2 includes SCell4.
  • up to four TAGs may be supported and other example TAG configurations may also be provided.
  • example mechanisms are described for a pTAG and an sTAG. The operation with one example sTAG is described, and the same operation may be applicable to other sTAGs. The example mechanisms may be applied to configurations with multiple sTAGs.
  • TA maintenance, pathloss reference handling and the timing reference for pTAG may follow LTE release 10 principles.
  • the UE may need to measure downlink pathloss to calculate the uplink transmit power.
  • the pathloss reference may be used for uplink power control and/or transmission of random access preamble(s).
  • a UE may measure downlink pathloss using the signals received on the pathloss reference cell.
  • the pathloss reference downlink cell and the corresponding uplink cell may be configured to be in the same frequency band due to the required accuracy of pathloss estimation.
  • the choice of pathloss reference for cells may be selected from and be limited to the following two options: a) the downlink SCell linked to an uplink SCell using the system information block 2 (SIB2), and b) the downlink pCell.
  • the pathloss reference for SCells in pTAG may be configurable using RRC message(s) as a part of SCell initial configuration and/or reconfiguration.
  • PhysicalConfigDedicatedSCell information element (IE) of an SCell configuration may include the pathloss reference SCell (downlink carrier) for an SCell in pTAG.
  • the downlink SCell linked to an uplink SCell using the system information block 2 (SIB2) may be referred to as the SIB2 linked downlink of the SCell.
  • SIB2 system information block 2
  • Different TAGs may operate in different bands.
  • the signals in different TAGs may travel through different repeaters, or the signal of one SCell in an sTAG may travel through a repeater while the signal of another TAG may not go through the repeater.
  • Having flexibility in SCell pathloss reference configuration for SCells belonging to an sTAG may result in pathloss estimation errors due to mobility of wireless device.
  • the wireless device may autonomously change a timing reference SCell in an sTAG, but changing pathloss reference autonomously may result in confusion in the serving eNB, specially that different cells may have different transmit power.
  • the pathloss reference may be only configurable to the downlink SCell linked to an uplink SCell using the system information block 2 (SIB2) of the SCell. No other downlink carrier may be configured as the pathloss reference for an SCell in an sTAG. This configuration may introduce accuracy in pathloss estimation.
  • SIB2 system information block 2
  • a UE may successfully complete a random access procedure from the reception of a random access response (RAR) message within the random access (RA) response window using a random access radio network temporary identifier (RA-RNTI).
  • the UE may decode scheduling information for uplink transmission in the PDCCH common search space (CSS) with RA-RNTI.
  • RAR for a PCell and/or SCell may contain at least one of the following: a Random Access Preamble Identifier (RAPID), a UL grant, a Temporary C-RNTI, a Backoff Indicator (BI), and/or the like.
  • RAPID may be used to confirm the association between RAR and the transmitted preamble.
  • the UL grant may be employed for uplink transmission on the cell that the preamble was transmitted.
  • Temporary C-RNTI may be used for contention resolution in case of contention based random access (CBRA).
  • a backoff Indicator (BI) may be used in case of collisions and/or high load on PRACH.
  • eNB may initiate an RA procedure.
  • a UE may use one of any activated SCells from this sTAG as a timing reference cell.
  • the timing reference for SCells in an sTAG may be the SIB2 linked downlink of the SCell on which the preamble for the latest RA procedure was sent.
  • the UE may flush all HARQ buffers of all serving cells, the UE may clear any configured downlink assignment/uplink grants, and the RRC in the UE may release PUCCH/SRS for all configured serving cells.
  • the pTAG TAT is not running, an sTAG TAT may not be running.
  • a) SRS transmissions may be stopped on the corresponding SCells, b) SRS RRC configuration may be released, c) CSI reporting configuration for the corresponding SCells may be maintained, and/or d) the MAC in the UE may flush the uplink HARQ buffers of the corresponding SCells.
  • the UE may not stop TAT of the sTAG.
  • TAT of the TA group may not be running.
  • RA procedures in parallel may not be supported for a UE. If a new RA procedure is requested (either by UE or network) while another RA procedure is already ongoing, it may be up to the UE implementation whether to continue with the ongoing procedure or start with the new procedure.
  • the eNB may initiate the RA procedure via a PDCCH order for an activated SCell. This PDCCH order may be sent on the scheduling cell of this SCell.
  • the scheduling cell When cross carrier scheduling is configured for a cell, the scheduling cell may be different than the cell that is employed for preamble transmission, and the PDCCH order may include the SCell index. At least a non-contention based RA procedure may be supported for SCell(s) assigned to sTAG(s). Upon new UL data arrival, the UE may not trigger an RA procedure on an SCell. PDCCH order for preamble transmission may be sent on a different serving cell than the SCell in which the preamble is sent. TA grouping may be performed without requiring any additional UE assisted information.
  • FIG. 7 is an example message flow in a random access process in a secondary TAG as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present invention.
  • eNB transmits an activation command 600 to activate an SCell.
  • a preamble 602 (Msg1) may be sent by a UE in response to the PDCCH order 601 on an SCell belonging to an sTAG.
  • preamble transmission for SCells may be controlled by the network using PDCCH format 1A.
  • Msg2 message 603 RAR: random access response
  • RAR random access response
  • uplink packets 604 may be transmitted on the SCell, in which the preamble was transmitted.
  • initial timing alignment may be achieved through a random access procedure. This may involve the UE transmitting a random access preamble and the eNB responding to an initial TA command NTA (amount of time alignment) within the random access response window.
  • the eNB may estimate the uplink timing from the random access preamble transmitted by the UE.
  • the TA command may be derived by the eNB based on the estimation of the difference between the desired UL timing and the actual UL timing.
  • the UE may determine the initial uplink transmission timing relative to the corresponding downlink of the sTAG on which the preamble is transmitted.
  • PDCCH order may be used to trigger RACH for an activated SCell.
  • eNB may need to firstly activate the corresponding SCell and then trigger a RA on it.
  • activation of an SCell may need at least 8 ms, which may be an extra delay for UE to acquire the valid TA value on an SCell compared to the procedure on an already activated SCell.
  • 8 ms may be required for SCell activation, and at least 6 ms may be required for preamble transmission, and at least 4 ms may be required to receive the random access response.
  • At least 18 ms may be required for a UE to get a valid TA.
  • the possible delay caused by retransmission or other configured parameters may need to be considered (e.g. the possible retransmission of an activation/deactivation command, and/or the time gap between when a RA is triggered and when a preamble is transmitted (equal or larger than 6 ms)).
  • the RAR may be transmitted within the RAR window (for example, 2 ms, 10 ms, 50 ms), and possible retransmission of the preamble may be considered.
  • the delay for such a case may be more than 20 ms or even 30 ms if retransmissions are considered.
  • a base station may communicate with a mix of wireless devices.
  • Wireless devices may support multiple technologies, or multiple releases of the same technology, have some specific capability depending on the wireless device category and/or capability.
  • a base station may comprise multiple sectors.
  • this disclosure refers to a base station communicating with a plurality of wireless devices, this disclosure may refer to a subset of the total wireless devices in the coverage area.
  • This disclosure may refer to, for example, a plurality of wireless devices of a given LTE release with a given capability and in a given sector of the base station.
  • the plurality of wireless devices in this disclosure may refer to a selected plurality of wireless devices, and/or a subset of total wireless devices in the coverage area, which perform according to the disclosed methods, and/or the like.
  • a time alignment command MAC control element may be a unicast MAC command transmitted to a wireless device.
  • a wireless device may receive its own time alignment commands.
  • the base station or wireless device may group cells into a plurality of cell groups.
  • the term “cell group” may refer to a timing advance group (TAG) or a timing alignment group or a time alignment group.
  • a cell group may include at least one cell.
  • a MAC TA command may correspond to a TAG.
  • a group may explicitly or implicitly be identified by a TAG index. Cells in the same band may belong to the same cell group.
  • a first cell's frame timing may be tied to a second cell's frame timing in a TAG. When a time alignment command is received for the second cell, the frame timing of both first cell and second cell may be adjusted.
  • Base station(s) may provide TAG configuration information to the wireless device(s) by RRC configuration message(s).
  • the number of time alignment commands transmitted by the base station to a wireless device in a given period may depend, at least in part, on many parameters including at least one of: a) the speed that the wireless device moves in the coverage area, b) the direction that the wireless device moves in the coverage area, c) the coverage radius, and/or d) the number of active wireless devices in the coverage area.
  • a base station may transmit at least two types of time alignment commands.
  • a first type command may be transmitted to a first category of wireless devices.
  • the first category may include devices compatible with at least release 8, 9, or 10 of the LTE standard.
  • a second type command may be transmitted to a second category of devices.
  • the second category may include devices with multi-time alignment group (MTG) capability and compatible with release 11 or beyond of the LTE standard.
  • the time alignment may be transmitted to wireless devices that are in connected mode and are applicable to active cells.
  • a UE may transmit a Scheduling Request (SR) and/or a buffer status report (BSR) due to uplink data arrival in the UE.
  • a UE may transmit a scheduling request on PUCCH when the UE has data for uplink transmission and UE do not have uplink grants for transmission of a buffer status report.
  • the UE may receive uplink grant in response to a SR.
  • a base station scheduler may also provide an uplink grant to a UE for some other reasons, for example, based on a previous BSR.
  • the UE may transmit a MAC BSR in the uplink resources identified in an uplink grant to inform the base station about the size of the uplink transmission buffer(s).
  • a UE BSR may be transmitted in an uplink resource identified in a received uplink grant.
  • BSR indicates the amount of data in one or more logical channel buffers.
  • Base station may determine the radio resources required for the UE in the uplink employing the received BSR and other parameters, e.g. link quality, interference, UE category, and/or the like. If the base station determines that radio resources of a first SCell which is uplink unsynchronized is required (the SCell may be in-active or may not be even configured yet), the base station may trigger an sTAG sync process to uplink synchronize the sTAG and the first SCell associated with the sTAG.
  • the SCell should be in configured (e.g. using RRC messages) and be in active state (e.g. using MAC activate commands).
  • An SCell is considered out-of-sync if it belongs to or will belong to (after RRC configuration) to an out-of-sync sTAG.
  • the sTAG sync process may also selectively be started by the base station if a GBR bit rate bearer with required uplink resources has been established.
  • the Base station may determine the radio resources required for the UE in the uplink employing the received bit rate, QoS and priority requirements of the GBR bearer and other parameters, e.g. link quality, interference, UE category, and/or the like. If the base station determines that radio resources of a first SCell which is uplink unsynchronized is required (the SCell may be in-active or may not be even configured yet), the base station may trigger an sTAG sync process to uplink synchronize the sTAG and the first SCell associated with the sTAG.
  • the SCell should be in configured (e.g. using RRC messages) and be in active state (e.g. using MAC activate commands) before uplink transmission starts.
  • eNB may select to synchronize the sTAG and then activate/configure the SCell. eNB may select to first configure/activate SCell and then to uplink synchronize it. For example, if an SCell is added and assigned to a synchronized sTAG, it will be synchronize upon its (re)configuration/addition. In another example, the SCell may be configured, then the sTAG may be synchronized using another SCell in the sTAG, and then the SCell may be activated. In another example, the SCell may be configured/activated, and then sTAG synchronization may start. Different embodiments with different orders in tasks may be implemented. Random access process for an SCell can only be initiated on configured and active SCells assigned to an sTAG.
  • the base station may trigger random access preamble transmission on an SCell of the sTAG that the SCell belongs, or on the first SCell in which its uplink resources are required.
  • the first SCell belongs to an sTAG which is uplink out-of-sync.
  • the eNB may, selectively and depending on a plurality of criteria, transmit a PDCCH order to the UE and may cause the UE to start a RA procedure on an SCell in the sTAG (in case of carrier aggregation).
  • a PDCCH order may be triggered by the BSR reception due to the UL data arrival in the UE or by the establishment of GBR bearer with uplink resource requirements.
  • Preamble transmission may be triggered in the case of UL data arrival, meaning that preamble transmission may be triggered by the BSR reception in the eNB and/or establishment of a non GBR bearer with uplink data.
  • the UE may not trigger an RA procedure on an SCell.
  • the eNB may, selectively, trigger the RA procedure based on the BSR reception due to UL data arrival in the UE. eNB may consider many parameters in triggering an RA on an SCell.
  • parameters may include current eNB load, UE buffer size(s) in BSR report(s), UE category, UE capability, QoS requirements, GBR bearer requirements and/or the like.
  • UE may determine that radio resources of the out-of-sync SCell may be required for uplink data transmission.
  • base station may transmit a MAC timing advance command with a TAG index of the out-of-sync sTAG.
  • the UE may use an stored value of N_TA for the out of sync sTAG and apply the timing advance value in the MAC timing advance command to the stored N_TA of the sTAG.
  • a UE may store or maintains N_TA (current timing advance value of an sTAG) upon expiry of associated time Alignment Timer of the sTAG.
  • the UE may apply the received timing advance command MAC control element and starts associated time Alignment Timer. This process may practically put the sTAG in an in-sync state.
  • the base station may transmit one or more MAC timing advance commands upon receiving uplink packets from the UE on the sTAG to align UE uplink transmissions in the sTAG. It is up to eNB to select the first or second embodiment for synchronizing the uplink of first SCell. For example, the eNB may operate in the second embodiment, if the SCell has not been in-sync for a long time, or the sTAG has not been in-Sync since it has been configured. In another example, the eNB may operate in the first embodiment if the sTAG has recently entered an out-of-sync state. In another example, the eNB may operate in the second embodiment if the eNB-UE distance is relatively short, for example in the range of tens or hundreds of meters.
  • the mapping of a serving cell to a TAG may be configured by the serving eNB with RRC signaling.
  • the mechanism for TAG configuration and reconfiguration may be based on RRC signalling.
  • the mapping between an SCell and a TA group may be reconfigured with RRC signaling.
  • the mapping between an SCell and a TAG may not be reconfigured with RRC while the SCell is configured. For example if there is a need to move an SCell from an sTAG to a pTAG, at least one RRC message, for example, at least one RRC reconfiguration message, may be send to the UE to reconfigure TAG configurations.
  • the PCell may not change its TA group and may always be a member of the pTAG.
  • the related TAG configuration may be configured for the SCell.
  • eNB may modify the TAG configuration of an SCell by removing (releasing) the SCell and adding a new SCell (with the same physical cell ID and frequency) with an updated TAG ID.
  • the new SCell with the updated TAG ID may be initially inactive subsequent to joining the updated TAG ID.
  • eNB may activate the updated new SCell and then start scheduling packets on the activated SCell.
  • An eNB may perform initial configuration based on initial configuration parameters received from a network node (for example a management platform), an initial eNB configuration, a UE location, a UE type, UE CSI feedback, UE uplink transmissions (for example, data, SRS, and/or the like), a combination of the above, and/or the like.
  • initial configuration may be based on UE channel state measurements. For example, depending on the signal strength received from a UE on various SCells downlink carrier or by determination of UE being in a repeater coverage area, or a combination of both, an eNB may determine the initial configuration of sTAGs and membership of SCells to sTAGs.
  • the TA value of a serving cell may change, for example due to UE's mobility from a macro-cell to a repeater or an RRH (remote radio head) coverage area.
  • the signal delay for that SCell may become different from the original value and different from other serving cells in the same TAG.
  • eNB may relocate this TA-changed serving cell to another existing TAG.
  • the eNB may create a new TAG for the SCell based on the updated TA value.
  • the TA value may be derived, for example, through eNB measurement(s) of signal reception timing, a RA mechanism, or other standard or proprietary processes.
  • An eNB may realize that the TA value of a serving cell is no longer consistent with its current TAG.
  • the eNB may need to move the reference SCell belonging to an sTAG to another TAG.
  • the sTAG would require a new reference SCell.
  • the UE may select an active SCell in the sTAG as the reference timing SCell.
  • eNB may consider UE's capability in configuring multiple TAGs for a UE.
  • UE may be configured with a configuration that is compatible with UE capability.
  • Multiple TAG capability may be an optional feature and per band combination
  • Multiple TAG capability may be introduced.
  • UE may transmit its multiple TAG capability to eNB via an RRC message and eNB may consider UE capability in configuring TAG configuration(s).
  • RRC connection reconfiguration procedure may be to modify an RRC connection, (e.g. to establish, modify and/or release RBs, to perform handover, to setup, modify, and/or release measurements, to add, modify, and/or release SCells).
  • NAS dedicated information may be transferred from E-UTRAN to the UE. If the received RRC Connection Reconfiguration message includes the sCellToReleaseList, the UE may perform an SCell release. If the received RRC Connection Reconfiguration message includes the sCellToAddModList, the UE may perform SCell additions or modification.
  • the UE may process the content of the message.
  • the UE may, for an sCellIndex value included in the sCellToAddModList that is not part of the current UE configuration (SCell addition), add the SCell corresponding to the celldentification in accordance with the received radioResourceConfigCommonSCell (SCell common configuration parameters) and radioResourceConfigDedicatedSCell (SCell dedicated configuration parameters).
  • the UE may configure lower layers to consider the SCell to be in a deactivated state.
  • the UE may, for a sCellIndex value included in the sCellToAddModList that is part of the current UE configuration (SCell modification), modify the SCell configuration in accordance with the received radioResourceConfigDedicatedSCell.
  • common parameters may comprise downlink common parameters and uplink common parameters.
  • downlink common parameters include: downlink bandwidth, antennaInfoCommon, mbsfn-SubframeConfigList, phich-Config, pdsch-ConfigCommon, and tdd-Config.
  • uplink common parameters include: ul-CarrierFreq, ul-Bandwidth, p-Max, uplinkPowerControlCommonSCell, soundingRS-UL-ConfigCommon, ul-CyclicPrefixLength, prach-ConfigSCell (TDD), and pusch-ConfigCommon.
  • Dedicated parameters may comprise downlink dedicated parameters and uplink dedicated parameters.
  • Examples of downlink dedicated parameters include AntennaInfoDedicated, CrossCarrierSchedulingConfig, csi-RS-Config, pdsch-ConfigDedicated.
  • Examples of uplink dedicated parameters include antennaInfoUL, pusch-ConfigDedicatedSCell, uplinkPowerControlDedicatedSCell, cqi-ReportConfigSCell, soundingRS-UL-ConfigDedicated, soundingRS-UL-ConfigDedicated, soundingRS-UL-ConfigDedicatedAperiodic, and pathlossReferenceLinking.
  • the names of these variables and example definition(s) and format for these variables may be found in releases of LTE RRC standard documentation.
  • SCell TAG configuration(s) may be included in sCellToAddModList or one of the IEs in sCellToAddModList.
  • a TAG ID may be included in the TAG configuration of a cell.
  • the TA group may be configured when an SCell is added. Thus the configuration of a TA group may be seen as part of the SCell addition/modification.
  • a dedicated parameter in SCell dedicated parameters may include the TAG ID of the SCell if the SCell belongs to an sTAG. If a dedicated TAG id parameter is not included in dedicated radio resource configuration of an SCell, it may be assumed that the SCell is assigned to the pTAG.
  • SCellToAddModList transmitted to a UE may comprise one or more of: an sCell Index, a physical Cell Id, a downlink Carrier Frequency, a radioResourceConfigCommonSCell, and a radioResourceConfigDedicatedSCell.
  • radioResourceConfigDedicatedSCell IE in sCellToAddModList transmitted to a UE may comprise the TAG ID that the SCell belongs to.
  • a TA group configuration may be UE-specific (a dedicated configuration parameter).
  • the identity or index of a TA group which an SCell belongs to may be assigned to a SCell employing an dedicated parameter in radioResourceConfigDedicatedSCell.
  • TAG ID When an SCell is released, the TAG assignment of the SCell may also be released.
  • eNB may not be needed to include TAG ID in sCellToReleaseList.
  • Each Cell may be assigned a TAG ID (implicitly or explicitly). If an SCell is not assigned a TAG ID, the SCell may be considered belonging to the pTAG by default. Implicit assignment of SCells to pTAG may reduce the signaling overhead. It is expected that in many operating scenarios, sTAGs are not configured, and therefore transmission of pTAG index for the configured SCells is avoided. This may increase spectral efficiency and would reduce signaling overhead.
  • a TAG ID may be UE specific, and each UE may have its own TAG configuration.
  • a given SCell may be a part of the pTAG in one UE and a part of an sTAG in another UE.
  • the SCell configuration may include TAG Index.
  • Assignment of an SCell to an sTAG may be UE specific, and may be different for different UEs connected to the same eNB. For example, a UE in the coverage of a repeater connected to the eNB may have a different sTAG configuration than a UE which is directly connected to the same eNB.
  • MAC-Config-Dedicated parameter in an RRC connection reconfiguration message may include a dedicated TAT parameter for each of the time alignment groups configured in the UE.
  • a TAT may be included in MAC Dedicated parameters. If TAT for an sTAG is received in MAC-Dedicated parameters, the UE may consider the dedicated parameter. For an SCell in an sTAG, the UE may not consider time alignment timer in the SIB parameter received from an eNB, instead the UE may consider the time alignment configuration parameter in the MAC-Dedicated parameters.
  • Different UEs may be required to be configured with different TAT values in an optimized network operation.
  • UE TAT value may be optimized depending on eNB-UE distance, UE speed, UE category, and/or the like. Therefore, it is not recommended to use a common variable for time alignment timer of secondary cell groups.
  • the TA maintenance for PCell may follow Rel-10 principles. If an SCell applying the TA of PCell is added, the Rel-10 procedures may be reused. In one example embodiment, there is no need to explicitly assign a TAG ID for cells in the pTAG. SCells configured with the pTAG may be grouped implicitly and a TAG ID for pTAG may not be needed or a TAG ID may be assigned implicitly by default (for example, TAGID: 0). TAG identity may be regarded as zero if the TAG identity field is absent in SCell dedicated parameters upon SCell addition. If an SCell is not configured with a TAG ID, it may apply that the SCell belongs to the pTAG.
  • TAG related configuration may include TAG ID, TAG-specific TAT, and/or the serving cells associated with it.
  • MAC dedicated parameters IE may include a TAG configuration information element comprising a sequence of one or more TAG ID and TAT for configured TAGs.
  • the TAG configuration information element may also comprise the list of SCells belonging to the TAG. The association between SCells with TAG IDs may be included in SCell configuration IE parameters, or may be included in TAG configuration information element.
  • the parameters related to SCell random access channel may be common to all UEs.
  • PRACH configuration RACH resources, configuration parameters, RAR window
  • RACH resource parameters may include prach-configuration index, and/or prach-frequency offset.
  • SCell RACH common configuration parameters may also include power: power ramping parameter(s) for preamble transmission; and max number of preamble transmission parameter. It is more efficient to use common parameters for RACH configuration, since different UEs will share the same random access channel. Using dedicated parameters for SCell RACH configuration is not preferred since it will increase the size of the radio resources required for random access process, and may reduce spectral efficiency.
  • TAT of an sTAG may not be running when the last SCell of the group is removed from the TA group.
  • the eNB may remove sTAG when removing the last SCell from the sTAG.
  • the TAT for sTAG may be stopped and the NTA value may be discarded.
  • sTAG TAT configuration may be released when no SCell is configured in the sTAG.
  • TAT is also released/de-configured (e.g. this may be achieved by de-configuring the timer).
  • the TAT may be de-configured by the eNB, which may implicitly stop the TAT of this group at the same time. If an sTAG is empty, the same RRC message may remove the sTAG and TAT and a removed sTAG may be released/de-configured. In another example embodiment, TAT may be stopped but a TAT entity may be maintained.
  • eNB may transmit at least one RRC message to configure PCell, SCell(s) and RACH, and TAG configuration parameters.
  • MAC-MainConfig may include a timeAlignmentTimerDedicated IE to indicate time alignment timer value for the pTAG.
  • MAC-MainConfig may further include an IE including a sequence of at least one (sTAG ID, and TAT value) to configure time alignment timer values for sTAGs.
  • a first RRC message may configure TAT value for pTAG
  • a second RRC message may configure TAT value for sTAG1
  • a third RRC message may configure TAT value for sTAG2.
  • the IE including a sequence of at least one (sTAG ID, and TAT) value may also be used to update the TAT value of an existing sTAG to an updated TAT value.
  • the at least one RRC message may also include sCellToAddModList including at least one SCell configuration parameters.
  • the radioResourceConfigDedicatedSCell (dedicated radio configuration IEs) in sCellToAddModList may include an SCell MAC configuration comprising TAG ID for the corresponding SCell added or modified.
  • the radioResourceConfigDedicatedSCell may also include pathloss reference configuration for an SCell. If TAG ID is not included in SCell configuration, the SCell is assigned to the pTAG.
  • a TAG ID may not be included in radioResourceConfigDedicatedSCell for SCells assigned to pTAG.
  • the radioResourceConfigCommonSCell (common radio configuration IEs) in sCellToAddModList may include RACH resource configuration parameters, preamble transmission power control parameters, and other preamble transmission parameter(s).
  • At the least one RRC message configures PCell, SCell, RACH resources, and/or SRS transmissions and may assign each SCell to an sTAG (implicitly or explicitly). PCell is always assigned to the pTAG.
  • the pathloss reference IE (pathlossReferenceLinking) in radioResourceConfigDedicatedSCell may indicate whether the UE shall apply as pathloss reference either: the downlink of the PCell, or of the SIB2 downlink of the SCell that corresponds with the configured uplink.
  • part of a secondary TAG eNB may only configure the pathloss reference to SIB2 downlink of the SCell that corresponds with the configured uplink. If a serving cell belongs to a TAG containing the primary cell then, for the uplink of the primary cell, the primary cell is used as the reference serving cell for determining reference Signal Power.
  • the serving cell configured by the RRC parameter pathloss Reference Linking IE is used as the reference serving cell for determining reference signal power. If a serving cell belongs to an sTAG then the serving cell is used as the reference serving cell for determining reference signal power.
  • a base station may transmit at least one control message to a wireless device in a plurality of wireless devices.
  • the at least one control message is for example, RRC connection reconfiguration message, RRC connection establishment message, RRC connection re-establishment message, and/or other control messages configuring or reconfiguring radio interface, and/or the like.
  • the at least one control message may be configured to cause, in the wireless device, configuration of at least:
  • Each cell may comprise a downlink carrier and zero or one uplink carrier.
  • the configuration may assign a cell group index to a cell in the plurality of cells.
  • the cell group index may identify one of a plurality of cell groups.
  • a cell group in the plurality of cell groups may comprise a subset of the plurality of cells.
  • the subset may comprise a reference cell with a reference downlink carrier and a reference uplink carrier. Uplink transmissions by the wireless device in the cell group may employ a synchronization signal transmitted on the reference downlink carrier as timing reference.
  • a plurality of MAC dedicated parameters comprising a sequence of at least one element.
  • An element in the sequence may comprises a time alignment timer value and a secondary time alignment group index.
  • pTAG time alignment timer value may be included as a dedicated IE in MAC main configuration parameter (a dedicated IE).
  • Each time alignment timer value being selected, by the base station, from a finite set of predetermined values.
  • the time alignment timer value in the sequence may be associated with a cell group index that is specified in the same element.
  • the element may also comprise the list of cell indexes associated with the time alignment group index.
  • the base station may transmit a plurality of timing advance commands.
  • Each timing advance command may comprise: a time adjustment value, and a cell group index.
  • a time alignment timer may start or may restart when the wireless device receives a timing advance command to adjust uplink transmission timing on a cell group identified by the cell group index.
  • the cell group may be considered out-of-sync, by the wireless device, when the associated time alignment timer expires or is not running.
  • the cell group may be considered in-sync when the associated time alignment timer is running.
  • the timing advance command may causes substantial alignment of reception timing of uplink signals in frames and subframes of all activated uplink carriers in the cell group at the base station.
  • the time alignment timer value may be configured as one of a finite set of predetermined values. For example, the finite set of predetermined values may be eight. Each time alignment timer value may be encoded employing three bits.
  • TAG TAT may be a dedicated time alignment timer value and is transmitted by the base station to the wireless device.
  • TAG TAT may be configured to cause configuration of time alignment timer value for each time alignment group.
  • the IE TAG TAT may be used to control how long the UE is considered uplink time aligned. It corresponds to the timer for time alignment for each cell group. Its value may be in number of sub-frames.
  • value sf500 corresponds to 500 sub-frames
  • sf750 corresponds to 750 sub-frames and so on.
  • An uplink time alignment is common for all serving cells belonging to the same cell group.
  • Time alignment timer for pTAG may be indicated in a separate IE and may not be included in the sequence.
  • TimeAlignmentTimerDedicated IE may be sf500, and then TAG TAT may be ⁇ 1, sf500; 2, sf2560; 3, sf500 ⁇ .
  • time alignment timer for the pTAG is configured separately and is not included in the sequence.
  • TAG0 (pTAG) time alignment timer value is 500 subframes (500 m-sec)
  • TAG1 (sTAG) time alignment timer value is 500 subframes
  • TAG2 time alignment timer value is 2560 subframes
  • TAG3 time alignment timer value is 500 subframes. This is for example purposes only.
  • a TAG may take one of 8 predefined values.
  • the enumerated values could take other values.
  • the size of the sequence is 3 in the first example and 4 in the second example. In another example embodiment, the size could be 2, 3, equal to the size of configured TAGs in the wireless device, and/or the like.
  • FIG. 9 is an example physical random access channel (PRACH) configuration in a primary TAG (pTAG) and a secondary TAG (sTAG) as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present invention.
  • PRACH resources are configured for the PCell in pTAG and SCell2 and SCell3 in sTAG.
  • SCell1 and SCell4 are not configured with PRACH resources.
  • no SCell in pTAG is configured with PRACH resources.
  • PRACH resources for an SCell in pTAG may be configured, but eNB is not configured to trigger a preamble transmission on PRACH resources of an SCell in pTAG. Basically, PRACH resources in SCells in pTAG cannot be used for preamble transmissions by a UE.
  • a UE may select one active SCell DL in a secondary TAG as the DL timing reference cell for the secondary TAG. This may reduce signalling overhead or complexity of implementation and/or increase efficiency.
  • an sTAG may have one timing reference cell at a given time.
  • the active SCell with the highest signal quality may be selected as the timing reference SCell by the UE.
  • DL timing reference cell for an sTAG may be the SCell DL SIB2-finked with the SCell UL where RACH was performed.
  • the SIB2 linked DL of the cell which the preamble is sent may be used as DL timing reference.
  • UE may autonomously select a downlink carrier in an active cell in the sTAG as the reference SCell.
  • the UE may apply the TA value to current UL timing of the corresponding TAG.
  • One timing reference SCell may be employed in an sTAG, the timing alignment value in RAR (random access response) or TAC (time alignment command) may be applied to all active SCell(s) in the same sTAG.
  • the UE may select the most suitable SCell for timing reference depending on different circumstances. For example, the SCell which has a better signal quality may be selected as timing reference cell, since better signal quality may provide a more reliable performance and thus reduce the need of re-configuring the timing reference cell.
  • Channel quality of an SCell in an sTAG may be considered for initial SCell timing reference and for reselecting timing reference cell. UE may change the timing reference when it is necessary.
  • the SCell served as the timing reference cell in sTAG may be deactivated in some cases.
  • eNB may keep a state of an SCell as active or inactive.
  • the UE may switch off some parts of the receiver and/or transmitter corresponding to the SCell. This act may reduce battery power consumption in the UE.
  • the reference SCell in an sTAG may be released by the serving eNB.
  • the timing reference cell may be changed to another active SCell in the sTAG for maintaining UL timing alignment for SCells in the same sTAG. Change of timing reference cell in an sTAG may be supported.
  • the reference cell may also be changed for other reasons such as coverage quality, PRACH failure, Reference SCell release, subscriber mobility, a combination of the above, and/or the like. These scenarios may apply to cases where time alignment is running. If the time alignment is not running and the sTAG is not time aligned, then there is no uplink synchronization and UE may not use any reference SCell for uplink synchronization.
  • the UE may autonomously change the timing reference SCell to another active SCell in the sTAG without informing the serving base station. The UE may not inform the base station about a change in the reference SCell, this process avoids additional signaling from a UE to the eNB and may increase radio resource efficiency. This process optimizes reference cell selection by the UE so that the UE can select a suitable SCell as the reference, without adding complexity in the network and without introducing additional signaling overhead.
  • UE may autonomously select another reference SCell when the reference SCell becomes deactivated. Since the timing reference is used to derive the UL transmission timing at the UE, there is a need for the UE to select a downlink SCell as the timing reference.
  • the UE may autonomously reselect another activated SCell in the sTAG as the reference when needed.
  • Timing reference for uplink transmission on SCell may be reselected to the DL timing of any activated SCell of the same sTAG when needed.
  • Any activated SCell in the sTAG may be chosen by the UE autonomously as the timing reference for this sTAG. For example, initially downlink SCell in which RA is transmitted may be used as a timing reference and then the UE may use another SCell as the timing reference, when the reference SCell needs to be changed.
  • FIG. 10 is an example flow diagram illustrating timing reference change as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present invention.
  • a wireless device may receive control message(s) from a base station.
  • the control message(s) may cause in the wireless device configuration of a plurality of cells.
  • the plurality of cells may comprise a primary cell and a plurality of secondary cells.
  • the control message(s) may also cause in the wireless device configuration of a deactivation timer for each secondary cell in plurality of secondary cells.
  • the deactivation timer may correspond to a secondary cell restarting in response to a packet transmission on the secondary cell.
  • An RRC message may comprise MAC main configuration parameter comprising a deactivation timer value.
  • the activation timer value may be applicable to deactivation timers of each of the secondary cells.
  • the corresponding secondary cell may be deactivated in the wireless device in response to the deactivation timer expiring.
  • the deactivation timer may correspond to secondary cell restarts in response to receiving an activation command for the secondary cell.
  • the control message(s) may also cause in the wireless device assignment of each of the plurality of secondary cells to a cell group in a plurality of cell groups.
  • the plurality of cell groups may comprise a primary cell group and a secondary cell group.
  • the primary cell group may comprise a first subset of the plurality of cells.
  • the first subset may comprise the primary cell.
  • Uplink transmissions by the wireless device in the primary cell group may employ a first synchronization signal transmitted on the primary cell as a primary timing reference.
  • the secondary cell group may comprise a second subset of the plurality of secondary cells.
  • the second subset may comprise a reference secondary cell.
  • control message(s) may comprise a plurality of media access control dedicated parameters comprising a deactivation timer value.
  • the deactivation timer value may be employed for each of the deactivation timers for the plurality of secondary cells.
  • first uplink signals in the secondary cell group may be transmitted by the wireless device at 1002 .
  • the transmission may employ a synchronization signal on the reference secondary cell as a secondary timing reference.
  • the reference secondary cell may be an activated cell in the secondary cell group.
  • the wireless device may autonomously select a new activated secondary cell in the secondary cell group as the secondary timing reference if the reference secondary cell is deactivated in the wireless device; and at least one secondary cell in the secondary cell group is active in the wireless device.
  • the autonomous selection may be performed by the wireless device without the wireless device informing the base station.
  • second uplink signals may be transmitted in the secondary cell group by the wireless device at 1009 .
  • the transmission may employ a second synchronization signal on the new activated secondary cell as the secondary timing reference.
  • the wireless device may receive a control command configured to cause transmission of a random access preamble on random access resources of the reference secondary cell in the secondary cell group.
  • the wireless device may receive a random access response on a primary cell in the primary cell group.
  • the random access response may comprise a timing advance command for the secondary cell group.
  • the base station may receive the random access preamble on the random access resources. Transmission timing of the random access preamble may be determined, at least in part, employing the synchronization signal transmitted on the reference secondary cell.
  • the control message(s) may cause configuration of the random access resources.
  • the base station may transmit at least one timing advance command to the wireless device.
  • the timing advance command may comprise: a time adjustment value; and an index identifying the secondary cell group.
  • the timing advance command(s) may be configured to cause substantial alignment of reception timing of the uplink signals in frames and subframes of the secondary cell group at the base station.
  • the wireless device may be assigned a plurality of media access control dedicated parameters by the configuration.
  • the plurality of media access control dedicated parameters may comprise a plurality of time alignment timer values. Each of the plurality of time alignment timer values may be associated with a unique cell group in the wireless device.
  • the control message(s) may cause in said wireless device assignment of each of the plurality of secondary cells to a cell group in a plurality of cell groups.
  • the plurality of cell groups may comprise a secondary cell group comprising a subset of the plurality of secondary cells.
  • the control message(s) may comprises at least one cell add-modify information element.
  • Each of the cell add-modify information element(s) may comprise a first plurality of dedicated parameters in the plurality of dedicated parameters.
  • the first plurality of dedicated parameters may comprise a first cell index for a first secondary cell in the secondary cell(s).
  • control message(s) may be configured to further cause in the wireless device configuration of a time alignment timer for each of the plurality of cell groups.
  • the time alignment timer may start or restart in response to the wireless device receiving a timing advance command to adjust uplink transmission timing of a commanded cell group in the plurality of cell groups.
  • the wireless device may transmit first uplink signals in the secondary cell group at 1002 employing a synchronization signal on a reference secondary cell in the secondary cell group as a timing reference.
  • the reference secondary cell may be an activated cell in the secondary cell group.
  • the wireless device may autonomously select a new activated secondary cell in the secondary cell group as the timing reference at 1007 if the reference secondary cell is deactivated in the wireless device; and at least one secondary cell in the secondary cell group is active in the wireless device.
  • the selection may be performed autonomously by the wireless device without the wireless device informing the base station.
  • the wireless device may not monitor the reference secondary cell when the reference secondary cell is deactivated.
  • the wireless device may transmit second uplink signals in the secondary cell group employing a third synchronization signal on the new activated secondary cell as the timing reference.
  • the wireless device may transmit second uplink signals in the secondary cell group employing a third synchronization signal on the new activated secondary cell as the timing reference
  • an activation command may be received causing activation of the new secondary cell in the wireless device.
  • the base station may comprise communication interface(s), processor(s), and memory.
  • the memory may store instructions.
  • the processor(s) may execute the instructions to cause actions described herein.
  • a wireless device may receive control message(s) from a base station.
  • the control message(s) may cause in the wireless device configuration of a plurality of cells.
  • the plurality of cells may comprise a primary cell and a plurality of secondary cells.
  • the control message(s) may also cause in the wireless device assignment of each of the plurality of secondary cells to a cell group in a plurality of cell groups.
  • the plurality of cell groups may comprise a primary cell group and a secondary cell group.
  • the primary cell group may comprise a first subset of the plurality of cells.
  • the first subset may comprise the primary cell.
  • Uplink transmissions by the wireless device in the primary cell group may employ a first synchronization signal transmitted on the primary cell as a primary timing reference.
  • the secondary cell group may comprise a second subset of the plurality of secondary cells.
  • the second subset may comprise a reference secondary cell.
  • control message(s) may comprises a plurality of media access control dedicated parameters comprising a deactivation timer value.
  • the deactivation timer value may be employed for each of the deactivation timers for the plurality of secondary cells.
  • the control message(s) may cause configuration of the random access resources.
  • the control message(s) may be configured to modify a radio bearer.
  • first uplink signals in the secondary cell group may be transmitted by the wireless device at 1002 .
  • the transmission may employ a synchronization signal on the reference secondary cell as a secondary timing reference.
  • the reference secondary cell may be an activated cell in the secondary cell group.
  • the wireless device may autonomously select (without the wireless device informing the base station) a new activated secondary cell in the secondary cell group as the secondary timing reference.
  • the new activated secondary cell may be different from the reference secondary cell.
  • second uplink signals may be transmitted in the secondary cell group by the wireless device employing a third synchronization signal on the new activated secondary cell as the secondary timing reference.
  • a deactivation timer corresponding to the secondary cell may restart in response to receiving an activation command for the secondary cell.
  • a wireless device may receive control message(s) from a base station.
  • the control message(s) may cause in the wireless device configuration of: a plurality of cells comprising a primary cell and a plurality of secondary cells; and a cell group index for a secondary cell in the plurality of cells.
  • the cell group index may identify one of a plurality of cell groups.
  • the plurality of cell groups may comprise a secondary cell group.
  • the secondary cell group may comprise a subset of the plurality of secondary cells.
  • First uplink signals may be transmitted in the secondary cell group by the wireless device employing a first synchronization signal on a reference secondary cell in the secondary cell group as a timing reference.
  • the reference secondary cell may be an activated cell in the secondary cell group.
  • the wireless device may autonomously select (without the wireless device informing the base station) a new activated secondary cell in the secondary cell group as the timing reference.
  • the new activated secondary cell may be different from the reference secondary cell.
  • Second uplink signals may be transmitting in the secondary cell group by the wireless device employing a second synchronization signal on the new activated secondary cell as the timing reference.
  • the network may activate and deactivate the configured SCells associated with a wireless device (UE).
  • the PCell is always activated when UE is in RRC-Connected mode.
  • the network may activate and deactivate the SCell(s) by sending the Activation/Deactivation MAC control element.
  • a UE and eNB may maintain an SCellDeactivationTimer timer per configured SCell and may deactivate the associated SCell upon its expiry.
  • sCellDeactivationTimer may be configured by RRC. The same initial timer value may apply to instances of the sCellDeactivationTimer for SCells.
  • the configured SCells may be initially deactivated upon addition and/or after a handover. With the current sCellDeactivationTimer, SCell may be deactivated during the PRACH process. Transmission of uplink preamble on a deactivated SCell may increase battery power consumption and UE complexity. If preamble is transmitted on a deactivated SCell, UE may need to turn on processing related to uplink transmission of the SCell. UE may not transmit data on a deactivated SCell and transmission of preamble may require special processing in the UE and may complicate UE implementation.
  • the ongoing random access process on the SCell may be aborted.
  • the UE may stop all uplink transmissions (for the SCell) including uplink preamble.
  • UE may not transmit any uplink preamble when the SCell is deactivated.
  • eNB may avoid or reduce the probability of such a scenario, by keeping the corresponding SCell activated during random access process. For example, eNB can explicitly activate the SCell before the random access process starts. An eNB may initiate a random access process when there is enough time for performing the entire random access process.
  • the UE may start the random access process on an activated SCell. But if the SCell deactivation timer (of the SCell that is used for preamble transmission) expires during the random access process, the UE may deactivate the SCell and may abort the random access process and may not transmit a preamble in the uplink. This process may prevent a situation in which the UE may send uplink signals on a deactivated SCell. If an SCell in a UE is deactivated after a preamble transmission on the SCell and before receiving a random access response corresponding to the preamble transmission, the UE may abort the random access process.
  • a random access process on an SCell is initiated in a UE when the UE received a PDCCH order to transmit a preamble on the SCell.
  • the random access process is considered successfully completed when the UE successfully decodes a corresponding RAR. If the SCell is deactivated after the random access process is initiated and before the random access process is completed, then the UE may abort the random access process.
  • sCellDeactivationTimer may be maintained in a way to reduce SCell deactivation during the RA process.
  • the UE may for a TTI and for a configured SCell, if the UE receives an Activation/Deactivation MAC control element in this TTI activating the SCell, the UE may in the TTI according to a predefined timing activate the SCell and start or restart the sCellDeactivationTimer associated with the SCell.
  • Activating an SCell may imply applying normal SCell operation including: SRS transmissions on the SCell (if the SCell is in sync), CQI/PMI/RI/PTI reporting for the SCell, PDCCH monitoring on the SCell, PDCCH monitoring for the SCell. If the UE receives an Activation/Deactivation MAC control element in this TTI deactivating the SCell, or if the sCellDeactivationTimer associated with the activated SCell expires in this TTI, in the TTI according to a predefined timing: deactivate the SCell, stop the sCellDeactivationTimer associated with the SCell, flush all HARQ buffers associated with the SCell.
  • the UE may restart the sCellDeactivationTimer associated with the SCell. If the SCell is deactivated, the UE may: not transmit SRS on the SCell, not report CQI/PMI/RI/PTI for the SCell, not transmit on UL-SCH on the SCell, not monitor the PDCCH on the SCell, not monitor the PDCCH for the SCell, and/or not to transmit uplink preamble on the SCell.
  • an SCell deactivation timer of the SCell may be restarted when the UE receives a PDCCH order to transmit uplink preamble on the SCell.
  • the SCell deactivation timer of the Cell carrying PDCCH order may also be restarted in cross carrier scheduling configuration.
  • an SCell deactivation timer of the SCell may be restarted when the UE transmits a random access preamble on the uplink the SCell.
  • FIG. 11 is an example flow diagram illustrating an unsuccessful random access process as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present invention.
  • a wireless device may receive control message(s) from base station at 1100 .
  • the control message(s) may cause in the wireless device configuration of a plurality of cells comprising a primary cell and at least one secondary cell.
  • the control message(s) may cause in the wireless device configuration of a deactivation timer for each secondary cell in the secondary cell(s).
  • the deactivation timer may correspond to a secondary cell restarting in response to a packet transmission on the secondary cell.
  • the corresponding secondary cell may be deactivated in the wireless device in response to the deactivation timer expiring.
  • the deactivation timer associated with the secondary cell may be restarted by the wireless device if a random access response with an uplink grant for transmission on the secondary cell is received by the wireless device from the base station. In an example embodiment, the deactivation timer associated with the secondary cell may be restarted in response to the wireless device receiving the control command. The deactivation timer associated with a cell carrying the control command may be restarted if the cell is one of secondary cell(s). In an example implementation, the deactivation timer may be restarted in the wireless device when the wireless device transmits an uplink preamble.
  • the control message(s) may cause in the wireless device assignment of each of the secondary cell(s) to a cell group in a plurality of cell groups.
  • the plurality of cell groups may comprise a primary cell group and a secondary cell group.
  • the primary cell group may comprise a first subset of the plurality of cells.
  • the first subset may comprise the primary cell.
  • Uplink transmissions by the wireless device in the primary cell group may employ a first synchronization signal transmitted on the primary cell as a primary timing reference.
  • the secondary cell group may comprise a second subset of the secondary cell(s).
  • control message(s) may cause in the wireless device configuration of a time alignment timer for the secondary cell group.
  • the time alignment timer may start or restart in response to the wireless device receiving a timing advance command to adjust uplink transmission timing on the secondary cell group.
  • the wireless device may receive a control command (also called PDDCH order) initiating a random access process for a secondary cell in the secondary cell group in the wireless device at 1102 .
  • the control command may comprise a mask index and the random access preamble identifier.
  • the wireless device may transmit a random access preamble on random access resources of the secondary cell in response to receiving the control command at 1107 .
  • the wireless device may abort the random access process on the secondary cell if the secondary cell is deactivated before the wireless device receives a random access response for the random access preamble transmission.
  • a downlink control channel of the primary cell for the random access response may be monitored after the random access preamble is transmitted.
  • the random access response may comprise an identifier of the random access preamble.
  • the random access response may be transmitted on the primary cell.
  • the random access response may comprise a timing advance command for the secondary cell group.
  • the wireless device may comprise communication interface(s), processor(s), and memory.
  • the memory may store instructions.
  • the processor(s) may execute the instructions to cause actions described herein.
  • the wireless device may receive at least control message(s) from a base station at 1100 .
  • the control message(s) may cause in the wireless device configuration of a plurality of cells comprising a primary cell and at least one secondary cell.
  • the control message(s) may cause in the wireless device configuration of a deactivation timer for each secondary cell in the at least one secondary cell, the deactivation timer may correspond to a secondary cell restarting in response to a packet transmission on the secondary cell.
  • the corresponding secondary cell may be deactivated in the wireless device in response to the deactivation timer expiring.
  • the control message(s) may cause in the wireless device assignment of each of the secondary cell(s) to a cell group in a plurality of cell groups.
  • the plurality of cell groups may comprise a secondary cell group.
  • the secondary cell group may comprise a second subset of the secondary cell(s).
  • the control message(s) may cause in the wireless device configuration of a time alignment timer for the secondary cell group.
  • the time alignment timer may start or restart in response to the wireless device receiving a timing advance command to adjust uplink transmission timing on the secondary cell group.
  • the wireless device may receive a control command initiating a random access process for a secondary cell in the secondary cell group in the wireless device at 1102 .
  • the control command may comprise a mask index and the random access preamble identifier.
  • the wireless device may transmit a random access preamble on random access resources of the secondary cell in response to receiving the control command at 1107 .
  • the wireless device may monitor a downlink control channel of the primary cell for the random access response after transmitting the random access preamble.
  • the wireless device may receive a random access response on the primary cell.
  • the random access response may comprise a timing advance command for the secondary cell group.
  • the random access response may comprise an identifier of the random access preamble.
  • the wireless device may abort the random access process on the secondary cell if the secondary cell is deactivated before the wireless device receives, on the primary cell, a random access response for the random access preamble transmission.
  • FIG. 12 is an example flow diagram illustrating an unsuccessful random access process as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present invention.
  • a base station may transmit control message(s) to a wireless device at 1200 .
  • the control message(s) may be configured to cause in the wireless device configuration of a plurality of cells comprising a primary cell and at least one secondary cell.
  • control message(s) may be configured to cause in the wireless device configuration of a deactivation timer for each secondary cell in secondary cell(s).
  • the deactivation timer may correspond to a secondary cell restarting in response to a packet transmission on the secondary cell.
  • the corresponding secondary cell may be deactivated in the wireless device in response to the deactivation timer expiring.
  • control message(s) may be configured to cause in the wireless device assignment of each of the secondary cell(s) to a cell group in a plurality of cell groups.
  • the plurality of cell groups may comprise a secondary cell group.
  • the secondary cell group may comprise a second subset of the secondary cell(s).
  • control message(s) may comprise a plurality of common parameters for the secondary cell.
  • the plurality of common parameters may comprise a plurality of random access resource parameters identifying the random access resources and a plurality of power control parameters.
  • Control message(s) may comprise a plurality of random access resource parameters.
  • the plurality of random access resource parameters may comprise: an index; a frequency offset; and a plurality of sequence parameters.
  • Control message(s) may comprise a plurality of media access control dedicated parameters comprising a plurality of time alignment timer values. Each time alignment timer value may be associated with a unique cell group in the wireless device.
  • the base station may transmit a control command initiating a random access process for a secondary cell in the secondary cell group at 1202 .
  • the control command may be configured to cause the wireless device to transmit a random access preamble on random access resources of the secondary cell.
  • the base station may abort the random access process on the secondary cell if the secondary cell is deactivated before the base station receives the random access preamble on the random access resources.
  • the base station may receive the random access preamble from the wireless device.
  • the base station may transmit a random access response comprising an uplink grant to the wireless device.
  • the base station may abort the random access process if the secondary cell is deactivated before the base station receives an uplink packet from the wireless device in response to the uplink grant.
  • MAC and RRC layers perform certain functions.
  • MAC layer in the UE may indicate Random Access problem to upper layers.
  • UE may or may not continue RACH procedure, i.e. transmit the preamble.
  • RRC is informed of RACH failure from MAC, if neither T300,T301,T304 nor T311 is running, the RRC layer may trigger reestablishment if AS (access stratum) security has been activated. Otherwise the UE may directly move to RRC_IDLE.
  • the RACH procedure may be stopped and other processes, for example, connection reestablishment, may start.
  • the RACH procedure may be stopped by further RRC procedures.
  • MAC may indicate a random access problem to upper layers and RRC may declare radio link failure and initiate RRC connection re-establishment procedure.
  • RRC connection re-establishment procedure may be to re-establish the RRC connection, which involves the resumption of SRB1 operation, the re-activation of security and/or the configuration of the PCell.
  • the UE may initiate the procedure when AS security has been activated.
  • the UE may initiate the procedure upon detecting radio link failure.
  • a UE in RRC_CONNECTED, for which security has been activated, may initiate the procedure in order to continue the RRC connection.
  • the connection re-establishment may succeed if the concerned cell is prepared i.e. has a valid UE context.
  • E-UTRAN accepts the re-establishment, SRB1 (signalling radio bearer one) operation resumes while the operation of other radio bearers remains suspended. If AS security has not been activated, the UE may not initiate the procedure but instead may directly move to RRC_IDLE. E-UTRAN may apply RRC connection re-establishment procedure to reconfigure SRB1 and to resume data transfer for this RB (radio bearer) and/or to re-activate AS security without changing algorithms.
  • timer T300 starts by transmission of RRCConnectionRequest and stops by reception of RRCConnectionSetup or RRCConnectionReject message, cell re-selection and upon abortion of connection establishment by upper layers. If timer T300 expires, UE may reset MAC, release the MAC configuration and re-establish RLC for all RBs that are established. UE may also inform upper layers about the failure to establish the RRC connection, upon which the procedure may end.
  • Timer T301 starts by transmission of RRCConnectionReestabilshmentRequest and stops by reception of RRCConnectionReestablishment or RRCConnectionReestablishmentReject message as well as when the selected cell becomes unsuitable. After expiry UE may go to Go to RRC_IDLE.
  • Timer T304 starts by reception of RRCConnectionReconfiguration message including the MobilityControl Info or reception of MobilityFromEUTRACommand message including CellChangeOrder and stops by criterion for successful completion of handover to EUTRA or cell change order is met (the criterion is specified in the target RAT in case of inter-RAT).
  • UE may initiate the RRC connection re-establishment procedure; In case of handover to E-UTRA, UE may perform the actions applicable for the source RAT.
  • Timer T311 starts by initiating the RRC connection re-establishment procedure and stops by selection of a suitable E-UTRA cell or a cell using another RAT. After expiry UE may enter RRC_IDLE.
  • UE may not perform radio link monitoring (RLM) on SCells.
  • eNB may prevent any UL transmission (PUSCH, SRS and ordered RA) on an SCell by a UE if the UE SCell is in insufficient radio conditions.
  • RLM on SCells may not be required.
  • RACH on an SCell in an sTAG may be triggered when sTAG is out-of-sync.
  • RACH on an SCell in an sTAG may also be triggered when sTAG is in-sync.
  • the RACH on an SCell may be used to synchronize sTAG for UL data transmission. In this case, normally PCell is in sync and there may be no need to trigger reestablishment for SCell RACH failure.
  • the eNB may configure other suitable SCells if available and RRC connection reestablishment may not be needed.
  • the eNB may deactivate or release the SCell in order to stop preamble transmission or the eNB may release UL of that SCell or remove the SRS and may stop scheduling on UL resources of that SCell.
  • RACH triggered on SCell may be unrelated to initial setup, HO, or reestablishment procedure. No further RRC procedure may be used to stop it.
  • UE may autonomously stop SCell RACH process if SCell RACH process fails.
  • the UE may stop preamble transmission.
  • the UE may stop preamble transmission on SCell and may not report Random Access problem to upper layers when the number of RA preamble transmissions on SCell reaches preambleTransMax.
  • UE may let eNB detect SCell RA failure.
  • eNB may detect RA failure by its own timer. eNB may set the timer value according to configured RA parameters (e.g. the maximum number of preamble transmissions, etc).
  • eNB may start a timer when triggering RA on SCell using a PDCCH order, and upon the timer expiry eNB may consider a RA failure.
  • SCell RA fails, eNB may detect the failure without UE reporting it to the eNB. eNB may then take a proper action, such as restarting RACH process on the same SCell or a different SCell in the same sTAG, or de-configuring the sCell with failed RACH process. This process may reduce the number of radio link failures in the system, since there will be no radio link failure in response to random access process failure in sTAGs.
  • automatic detection of random access failure in sTAG by the base station may reduce signaling overhead, since the UE does not need to inform the base station about random access failure in an sTAG.
  • random access process failure in the pTAG may initiate radio link failure, but random access process failure in an sTAG does not initiate radio link failure.
  • overhead in signaling is reduced by introducing automatic eNB detection of the random access failure in an sTAG without UE informing the eNB. This process may increase radio network efficiency and reduce signaling overhead.
  • UE MAC may not indicate RACH failure to RRC.
  • the UE may keep RRC connection active (UE stays in RRC-connected mode), but stop random access transmission for the initiated random access process (UE considers the process unsuccessful).
  • UE does not leave RRC-connected mode in response to an unsuccessful random access process for an SCell.
  • RRC may not trigger radio link failure (RLF).
  • UE may not report this condition to eNB.
  • PREAMBLE_TRANSMISSION_COUNTER in the UE is equal to preambleTransMax+1, and the Random Access Preamble is transmitted on the PCell, the UE may indicate a Random Access problem to upper layers (for example RRC layer).
  • UE may consider the Random Access procedure unsuccessfully completed. At completion of the Random Access procedure, the UE may discard explicitly signalled ra-PreambleIndex and ra-PRACH-MaskIndex. At completion of the Random Access procedure, the UE may stop transmission of the signaled random access preamble in the uplink. UE may stop transmission of random access preamble on an SCell at least until another PDCCH order for transmission of random access preamble on the SCell is received from the eNB.
  • eNB may initiate sTAG random access when the sTAG is out-of-sync, when the UE sTAG is in out-of synch state and SCell RA fails, uplink timing is still out-of-sync, and the sTAG may stay in out-of-sync state.
  • SRS transmissions may be stopped on the corresponding SCells in the sTAG, the type-0 SRS configuration may be released, the type-1 SRS configuration may be maintained, CSI reporting configuration for the corresponding SCells may be maintained, and/or MAC may flush the uplink HARQ buffers of the corresponding SCells.
  • eNB may initiate sTAG RA procedure when the sTAG is in-sync. eNB may trigger SCell RA on in-sync SCell, for example when it detects that the uplink timing is deteriorating or time-alignment timer is expiring, and sTAG needs initial uplink synchronization. In an example embodiment, if SCell RA fails, eNB and UE may not change the SCell sync state and TAT for the sTAT may continue running until it is expired. eNB may take a proper action upon detection of RACH failure on sTAG. For example, if there is another SCell in this TAG, the eNB may trigger RACH in another SCell for sync purpose.
  • the SCells in sTAG may still be in sync.
  • eNB may start RACH on another cell, which may be completed successfully.
  • UE may not change sTAG status from in-sync to out-of-sync on its own if RACH-process on an in-sync sTAG fails.
  • sTAG status may change from in-sync to out-of-sync, when TAT of the sTAG is expired or is not running.
  • MAC may indicate a random access problem to higher layers when random access on PCell fails, and MAC may not indicate a random access problem when random access on SCell fails.
  • No special UE upper layer behavior for SCell UL random access problem may be defined and network-based detection and control may be assumed sufficient.
  • Random access failure on SCell may be mainly handled by L1/L2.
  • the eNB may detect random access problem, and there may be less RRC impact compared with PCell RACH failure.
  • PCell Random Access problem may be used by RRC layer to trigger reestablishment procedure.
  • UE may not trigger reestablishment for RACH failure on SCell and the eNB may handle RACH failure on SCell itself.
  • UE may not report SCell RACH failure to RRC layer inside UE.
  • FIG. 13 is an example flow diagram illustrating an unsuccessful random access process as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present invention.
  • a wireless device may repeatedly transmit a first random access preamble on a primary cell at block 1300 .
  • the transmissions may continue until a condition is met.
  • Example conditions include: until a first random access response corresponding to the first random access preamble is received from a base station; or a first predetermined number of transmissions is reached.
  • the first random access preamble may be transmitted one time if a first random access response is received after the first transmission of the first random access preamble.
  • a random access problem may be indicated to a radio resource control layer in the wireless device; and the radio resource control layer may determine a radio link failure.
  • the wireless device may receive at least one control message from the base station.
  • the control message(s) may cause in the wireless device: configuration of a plurality of cells.
  • the plurality of cells may comprise a primary cell and at least one secondary cell.
  • the control message(s) may cause in the wireless device assignment of each of the secondary cell(s) to a cell group in a plurality of cell groups.
  • the plurality of cell groups may comprise a secondary cell group.
  • the secondary cell group may comprise a subset of secondary cell(s).
  • the wireless device may receive a control command causing the wireless device to transmit a second random access preamble on a first secondary cell in the secondary cell group.
  • the first secondary cell may be an activated secondary cell.
  • the wireless device may repeatedly transmit the second random access preamble until: a second random access response corresponding to the second random access preamble is received; or a second predetermined number of transmissions is reached.
  • the wireless device may stop transmission of the second random access preamble; and keep a connection with the base station active.
  • the first random access response may comprise a first random access preamble identifier corresponding to the first random access preamble.
  • the second random access response may comprise a second random access preamble identifier corresponding to the second random access preamble.
  • the wireless device may enter a no uplink transmission status for the secondary cell group until at least another control command is received from the base station if the second predetermined number of retransmissions is reached.
  • the wireless device may enter an out-of-sync status if the wireless device was in-sync before the wireless device receives the control command. If the second predetermined number of transmissions is reached, the wireless device may stay in the out-of-sync status if the wireless device was in the out-of-sync status before the wireless device receives the control command. The wireless device may stay in an in-sync status if a corresponding time alignment timer of the secondary cell group is running when the second predetermined number of transmissions is reached.
  • a connection re-establishment process may be triggered by the wireless device if the first predetermined number of transmissions is reached without receiving the first random access response.
  • a wireless device may repeatedly transmit a first random access preamble on a primary cell at block 1300 until: a first random access response corresponding to the first random access preamble is received from the base station; or a first predetermined number of transmissions is reached.
  • a first random access response corresponding to the first random access preamble is received from the base station; or a first predetermined number of transmissions is reached.
  • a random access problem to a radio resource control layer in the wireless device may be indicated and the radio resource control layer may determine a radio link failure if the first predetermined number of transmissions is reached without receiving the first random access response:
  • the wireless device may receive a control command causing the wireless device to transmit a second random access preamble on a first secondary cell.
  • the control command may comprise a mask index and the random access preamble identifier.
  • the wireless device may repeatedly transmit the second random access preamble until: a second random access response corresponding to the second random access preamble is received; or a second predetermined number of transmissions is reached.
  • the wireless device may stop transmission of the second random access preamble and keep a connection with the base station active if the second predetermined number of transmissions is reached without receiving the second random access response.
  • a connection re-establishment process may be triggered by the wireless device if the first predetermined number of transmissions is reached without receiving the first random access response.
  • the primary cell may be assigned to a primary cell group and the first secondary cell may be assigned to a secondary cell group.
  • the uplink signals transmitted by the wireless device in the primary cell group may employ a first synchronization signal transmitted on the primary cell as a first timing reference.
  • the uplink signals transmitted by the wireless device in the secondary cell group may employ a second synchronization signal transmitted on an activated secondary cell in the secondary cell group as a second timing reference.
  • the wireless device may stop uplink transmissions in the secondary cell group if the second predetermined number of transmissions is reached without receiving the second random access response.
  • the wireless device may stop uplink transmissions in the first secondary cell if the second predetermined number of transmissions is reached without receiving the second random access response.
  • the wireless device may receive control message(s) from the base station.
  • the control message may comprise the first predetermined number and the second predetermined number.
  • the wireless device may comprise communication interface(s), processor(s), and memory.
  • the memory may store instructions.
  • the processor(s) may execute the instructions to cause actions described herein.
  • the wireless device may repeatedly transmit a first random access preamble on a primary cell until: a first random access response corresponding to the first random access preamble is received from the base station; or a first predetermined number of transmissions is reached. If the first predetermined number of transmissions is reached without receiving the first random access response: a random access problem may be indicated to a radio resource control layer in the wireless device; and the radio resource control layer may determine a radio link failure.
  • the wireless device may receive a control command causing the wireless device to transmit a second random access preamble on a first secondary cell.
  • the wireless device may repeatedly transmit the second random access preamble until: a second random access response corresponding to the second random access preamble is received; or a second predetermined number of transmissions is reached. If the second predetermined number of transmissions is reached without receiving the second random access response: transmission of the second random access preamble may be stopped and a connection with the base station may be kept active.
  • the control command may comprise a mask index and the random access preamble identifier.
  • the primary cell may be assigned to a primary cell group.
  • the first secondary cell may be assigned to a secondary cell group.
  • the first random access response may comprise a first random access preamble identifier corresponding to the first random access preamble.
  • the second random access response may comprise a second random access preamble identifier corresponding to the second random access preamble.
  • the UE may flush all HARQ buffers of all serving cells, may clear any configured downlink assignment/uplink grants, and/or RRC may release PUCCH/SRS for all configured serving cells as in Rel-10.
  • the UE may not perform any uplink transmission except the random access preamble transmission when TAT for pTAG is not running.
  • UE and/or eNB may not indicate the generated positive or negative acknowledgement to the physical layer. If primary TAG timeAlignmentTimer is running, UE and/or eNB may indicate the generated positive or negative acknowledgement for a TB to the physical layer. The UE may follow LTE Rel-10 behaviour for DL HARQ feedback handling when the PCell-TAT is stopped or expired.
  • SRS transmissions may be stopped on the corresponding SCells.
  • the type-0 SRS configuration may be released, but the type-1 SRS configuration may be maintained.
  • CSI reporting configuration for the corresponding SCells may be maintained.
  • MAC may flush the uplink HARQ buffers of the corresponding SCells.
  • MAC may stop transmission of HARQ feedback in the downlink to the UE. Whether the SCell-TAT is running or not may not impact the HARQ feedback transmission in the uplink.
  • Uplink HARQ feedback may be transmitted on PUCCH on PCell, and downlink HARQ feedback may be transmitted on the same or different serving cell as uplink transmission depending on cross carrier scheduling. This process may improve network performance.
  • the UE may still receive downlink data on the SCells, transmit CSI for the downlink of uplink out-of-sync SCells, and transmit ACK/NACK for downlink data received on SCells belonging to an out-of-sync sTAG.
  • This process may not de-configure, deactivate, and/or stop all activities on SCells of out-of-sync sTAG, and therefore may improve overall radio link efficiency.
  • FIG. 14 is an example flow diagram illustrating mechanisms in a wireless device when a time alignment timer expires as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present invention.
  • a wireless device may receive control message(s) from a base station at block 1400 .
  • the control message(s) may cause in the wireless device configuration of a plurality of cells comprising a primary cell and at least one secondary cell.
  • the control message(s) may cause in the wireless device assignment of each of the secondary cell(s) to a cell group in a plurality of cell groups.
  • the plurality of cell groups may comprise a primary cell group and a secondary cell group.
  • the primary cell group may comprise a first subset of the plurality of cells.
  • the first subset may comprise the primary cell.
  • the secondary cell group may comprise a second subset of the secondary cell(s).
  • the control message(s) may cause in the wireless device configuration of a time alignment timer for each of the plurality of cell groups.
  • the time alignment timer may start or restart in response to the wireless device receiving a timing advance command to adjust the uplink transmission timing of a commanded cell group in the plurality of cell groups.
  • the commanded cell group may be considered out-of-sync in response to the time alignment timer being expired or not running.
  • the commanded cell group may be considered in-sync in response to the time alignment timer running.
  • the control message(s) may comprise a media access control dedicated information element.
  • the media access control dedicated information element may comprise a sequence of first information element(s).
  • Each of the first information element(s) may comprise: a first cell group index of a first secondary cell group; and a first time alignment timer for the first secondary cell group.
  • a series of actions may occur as illustrated in example block 1402 .
  • the uplink transmission of HARQ feedback may be stopped; re-transmissions of uplink transport blocks in response to downlink HARQ feedback may be stopped; uplink transmissions comprising transport block transmissions and channel state information transmissions may be stopped; and uplink transmission of at least one random access preamble may be allowed if the cell is the primary cell.
  • the random access preamble(s) may be transmitted on the primary cell.
  • a series of actions may occur as illustrated in example block 1404 for each activated cell in the secondary cell group when the secondary cell group becomes out-of-sync and the primary cell group is in-sync.
  • re-transmission of uplink transport blocks in response to downlink negative HARQ feedback may be stopped; transmissions of new transport blocks in an uplink of the activated cell may be stopped; transmission of HARQ feedback for transport blocks received on a downlink of the activated cell may continue; and transmission of channel state information for the downlink of the activated cell on an uplink carrier not belonging to the secondary cell group may be continued.
  • Uplink transmission of at least one second random access preamble may be allowed on the secondary cell group when the secondary cell group becomes out-of-sync and the primary cell group is in-sync.
  • the continuing transmission of HARQ feedback may employ: a physical uplink control channel on the primary cell; or uplink control information feedback in a transport block transmitted on a shared data channel of an uplink carrier not belonging to the secondary cell group.
  • the continuing transmission of channel state information employs: a physical uplink control channel on the primary cell; or uplink control information feedback in a transport block transmitted on a shared data channel of an uplink carrier not belonging to the secondary cell group.
  • a radio resource control may be notified to release a sounding reference signal when the primary cell group becomes out-of-sync.
  • a radio resource control may be notified to release a sounding reference signal when the secondary cell group becomes out-of-sync and the primary cell group is in-sync.
  • the wireless device may be assigned, by the configuration, a plurality of media access control dedicated parameters.
  • the media access control dedicated parameters may comprise a plurality of time alignment timer values. Each of the plurality of time alignment timer values may be associated with a time alignment timer of a cell group.
  • the wireless device may be assigned, by the configuration, a plurality of media access control dedicated parameters comprising a plurality of time alignment timer values, each of the plurality of time alignment timer values may be associated with a unique cell group in the wireless device.
  • a wireless device may receive control message(s) from a base station at block 1400 .
  • the control message(s) may cause in the wireless device configuration of a plurality of cells comprising a primary cell and at least one secondary cell.
  • the control message(s) may cause in the wireless device assignment of each of the secondary cell(s) to a cell group in a plurality of cell groups.
  • the plurality of cell groups may comprise a primary cell group and a secondary cell group.
  • the primary cell group may comprise a first subset of the plurality of cells.
  • the first subset may comprise the primary cell.
  • the secondary cell group may comprise a second subset of the secondary cell(s).
  • the control message(s) may cause in the wireless device configuration of a time alignment timer for each of the plurality of cell groups.
  • the time alignment timer may start or restart in response to the wireless device receiving a timing advance command to adjust uplink transmission timing of a commanded cell group in the plurality of cell groups.
  • the wireless device may receive timing advance command(s) from the base station.
  • the timing advance command may comprise: a time adjustment value; and an index identifying the secondary cell group.
  • the timing advance command(s) may be configured to cause substantial alignment of reception timing of the uplink signals in frames and subframes of the secondary cell group at the base station.
  • the time alignment timer of the secondary cell group may be restarted in response to receiving a timing advance command in the at least one timing advance command.
  • uplink transmission of HARQ feedback may be stopped; re-transmissions of uplink transport blocks in response to downlink HARQ feedback may be stopped; uplink transmissions comprising transport block transmissions and channel state information transmissions may be stopped; and uplink transmission of at least one random access preamble may be allowed if the cell is the primary cell.
  • the primary cell group may comprise a first subset of the plurality of cells.
  • the first subset may comprise the primary cell.
  • Uplink transmissions by the wireless device in the primary cell group may employ a first synchronization signal transmitted on the primary cell.
  • the second cell group may comprise a second subset of the plurality of cells.
  • the second subset may comprise a reference secondary cell. Uplink transmissions in the secondary cell group may employ a second synchronization signal on the reference secondary cell as a secondary timing reference.
  • re-transmission of uplink transport blocks in response to downlink negative HARQ feedback may be stopped; transmissions of new transport blocks in an uplink of the activated cell may be stopped; transmission of HARQ feedback for transport blocks received on a downlink of the activated cell may be continued; and transmission of channel state information for the downlink of the activated cell on an uplink carrier not belonging to the secondary cell group may be continued.
  • the wireless device may comprise communication interface(s), processor(s), and memory.
  • the memory may store instructions.
  • the processor(s) may execute the instructions to cause actions described herein.
  • the wireless device may receive at least one control message from a base station at 1400 .
  • the control message(s) may cause in the wireless device configuration of a plurality of cells.
  • the plurality of cells may comprise a primary cell secondary cell(s).
  • the control message(s) may cause in the wireless device assignment of each of the secondary cell(s) to a cell group in a plurality of cell groups.
  • the plurality of cell groups may comprise a primary cell group and a secondary cell group.
  • the primary cell group may comprise a first subset of the plurality of cells.
  • the first subset may comprise the primary cell.
  • the secondary cell group may comprise a second subset of the secondary cell(s).
  • the control message(s) may cause in the wireless device configuration of a time alignment timer for each of the plurality of cell groups.
  • the time alignment timer may start or restart in response to the wireless device receiving a timing advance command to adjust uplink transmission timing of a commanded cell group in the plurality of cell groups.
  • the control message(s) may comprise a media access control dedicated information element.
  • the media access control dedicated information element may comprise a sequence of first information element(s).
  • Each of the first information element(s) may comprise: a first cell group index of a first secondary cell group; and a first time alignment timer for the first secondary cell group.
  • uplink transmission of HARQ feedback may be stopped; re-transmissions of uplink transport blocks in response to downlink HARQ feedback may be stopped; uplink transmissions comprising transport block transmissions and channel state information transmissions may be stopped; and uplink transmission of random access preamble(s) may be allowed if the cell is the primary cell.
  • the random access preamble(s) may be transmitted on the primary cell.
  • re-transmission of uplink transport blocks in response to downlink negative HARQ feedback may be stopped; transmissions of new transport blocks in an uplink of the activated cell may be stopped; transmission of HARQ feedback for transport blocks received on a downlink of the activated cell may be continued; and transmission of channel state information for the downlink of the activated cell on an uplink carrier not belonging to the secondary cell group may be continued.
  • the wireless device may be assigned, by the configuration, a plurality of media access control dedicated parameters.
  • the media access control dedicated parameters may comprise a plurality of time alignment timer values. Each of the time alignment timer values may be associated with a time alignment timer of a cell group.
  • the wireless device may be assigned, by the configuration, a plurality of media access control dedicated parameters.
  • the media access control dedicated parameters may comprise a plurality of time alignment timer values. Each of the time alignment timer values may be associated with a unique cell group in the wireless device.
  • the wireless device may transmit a second random access preamble on a secondary cell of the secondary cell group in response to receiving a control command from the base station when: the second time alignment timer of the secondary cell group is expired; and the first time alignment timer is running.
  • Frames and subframe transmission timing for all downlink carriers in the primary cell group and the secondary cell group of a base station may be substantially time aligned with each other.
  • Frames and subframe for all downlink carriers in the primary cell group and the secondary cell group are transmitted and their timing are controlled by the same base station, and therefore achieving an accurate time alignment by the base station would be feasible by the base station.
  • the accuracy would be better than a fraction of a subframe, for example 10 micro-sec or better.
  • timing alignment error between downlink carriers belonging to different bands may be within 1.3 micro-seconds. In another example, for carriers in the same band the synchronization may be more accurate and may be below 1 micro-second.
  • frames and subframe transmission timing for all downlink carriers in the primary cell group and the secondary cell group of the base station may be substantially time aligned with frames and subframe transmission timing of all downlink carriers in the plurality of base stations.
  • This may be an optional synchronization requirement to enhance network performance and some network may not use this requirement.
  • Such a time alignment requires, for example, coordination and signalling among the plurality of base stations.
  • it requires that the plurality of base stations use the same synchronization source such as GPS signalling, some other sort of centralized algorithm, and/or some packet based synchronization system to achieve synchronization.
  • Time alignment process between frames and subframes of the plurality of base stations thus may involve many external factors, and therefore the accuracy of time alignment may not be precise, but it may be substantially within certain pre-defined accuracy limits.
  • Time alignment between carriers of the same base stations may be a simpler task compared with time alignment between carriers of multiple base stations.
  • the accuracy of the former task may be higher than the accuracy of the later task. Therefore, the term substantially aligned here may imply that the carriers are substantially time aligned within a certain time alignment accuracy range.
  • the error may be below half a subframe, a small fraction of a subframe, or for example 10 micro-seconds, or less.
  • Frames and subframe transmission timing for all uplink carriers in the primary cell group of the wireless device may be substantially time aligned with each other.
  • Frames and subframe transmission timing for all uplink carriers in the secondary cell group of the wireless device may be substantially time aligned with each other.
  • Frames and subframe transmission timing for uplink carriers in the primary cell group of the wireless device may not necessarily be time aligned with frames and subframe transmission timing for uplink carriers in the secondary cell group of the wireless device.
  • Uplink transmission timing in different cell groups in the wireless device may be adjusted according to a different set of MAC time alignment commands, and may employ a different Cell timing reference. Substantial time alignment here may be considered in the context. In a wireless device, uplink signal transmission may not time aligned if they are not precisely time aligned.
  • a wireless device may use a different downlink synchronization signals and/or time alignment commands to align uplink transmission in different carrier groups. Because the same device is generating the signal. The substantial alignment here may imply that the wireless device makes every effort to align transmission timing and may use the same timing reference. However, uplink transmission timing of uplink carriers in the primary cell group and the secondary cell group may not be exactly time aligned. Different cell groups use different downlink synchronization signals as the reference timing, and time alignment commands for the uplink are different for the primary cell group and secondary cell group uplink transmission. In an example, in a wireless signal uplink transmission even a few micro-second mis-alignment between uplink transmissions in two different carrier groups may be considered as not being substantially time aligned. Uplink transmission timing between cells in different cell groups, for example may differ up to 30 micro-seconds depending on cell radius, repeater locations, and/or the like.
  • the plurality of time alignment commands may substantially align frame and subframe reception timing of signals transmitted by the plurality of wireless devices to the base station in the primary cell group.
  • the plurality of time alignment commands may substantially align frame and subframe reception timing of signals transmitted by the plurality of wireless devices to the base station in the secondary cell group.
  • the base station may employ time alignment commands in order to substantially time align uplink signals received from the same carrier group in different wireless devices, even though signal propagation/processing time may be different for different carrier groups.
  • Each device may have a different signal propagation/processing delay, because of its distance to the base station, or its receiver structure, and/or the like.
  • the substantial time alignment criteria is determined by a base station performance criteria, and in normal condition the base station may transmit the time alignment commands with the goal of achieving a substantial time alignment in the uplink.
  • the base station may transmit a time alignment command to adjust the wireless device transmission timing.
  • the reference eNB reception time may not be exactly the same for different carrier groups.
  • the TA commands may have a resolution in the range of 1.6 micro-seconds.
  • the plurality of time alignment commands may substantially align frame and subframe reception timing of signals transmitted by the plurality of wireless devices to the base station in the primary cell group and the secondary cell group.
  • time alignment commands are transmitted in order to maintain the same reception timing at the base station among all carriers of the cell, including all carriers in the primary cell group and secondary cell group.
  • This process may require a more complex time alignment procedure in the base station, but may provide advantages because frames and subframes of all uplink transmissions by all wireless devices on all uplink carriers are substantially the same in the base station.
  • the substantial time alignment implies that the base station may transmit time alignment commands to achieve such a time alignment in the received signal of all uplink carriers from all wireless devices in the coverage area of for example a base station sector.
  • the base station may employ time alignment commands in order to substantially time align uplink signals received from different carrier groups in the same wireless device as well as signals received from a plurality of wireless devices, even though signal propagation/processing time may be different for different carrier groups and from different wireless devices.
  • the base station may transmit a time alignment command to adjust the wireless device transmission timing.
  • the reference eNB reception time may be the same for different wireless devices and for different carrier groups.
  • the TA commands may have a resolution in the range of 1.6 micro-seconds.
  • FIG. 15 is an example flow diagram illustrating a base station process for configuring multiple cell groups as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present invention.
  • a base station in a plurality of base stations may transmit control message(s) to a wireless device at block 1500 .
  • the plurality of base stations may be compatible with LTE release 11 or above and support multiple timing advance groups.
  • the control message(s) may be configured to cause in the wireless device configuration of a plurality of cells.
  • the plurality of cells may comprise a primary cell and at least one secondary cell.
  • the control message(s) may be configured to cause in the wireless device to assign of each of the secondary cell(s) to a cell group in a plurality of cell groups.
  • the plurality of cell groups may comprise a primary cell group and a secondary cell group.
  • the primary cell group may comprise a first subset of the plurality of cells.
  • the first subset may comprise the primary cell.
  • Uplink transmissions by the wireless device in the primary cell group may employ a first synchronization signal transmitted on the primary cell as a primary timing reference.
  • the secondary cell group may comprise a second subset of the secondary cell(s).
  • the second subset may comprise a reference secondary cell.
  • Uplink transmissions in the secondary cell group may employ a second synchronization signal on the reference secondary cell as a secondary timing reference.
  • control message(s) may be configured to modify a radio bearer.
  • Control message(s) may be configured to cause in the wireless device configuration of uplink random access resources on the reference secondary cell.
  • a plurality of timing advance commands may be transmitted by the base station to the wireless device at block 1502 .
  • Each of the plurality of timing advance commands may comprise a time adjustment value and an index identifying a cell group.
  • frames and subframes transmission timing for downlink carriers in the primary cell group and downlink carriers in the secondary cell group may be substantially time aligned with each other.
  • Frames and subframes transmission timing for downlink carriers in the primary cell group and downlink carriers in the secondary cell group of the base station may be substantially time aligned with frames and subframes transmission timing of downlink carriers of other base stations in the plurality of base stations.
  • Frames and subframes transmission timing for uplink carriers in the primary cell group of the wireless device may be substantially time aligned with each other.
  • Frames and subframes transmission timing for uplink carriers in the secondary cell group of the wireless device may be substantially time aligned with each other.
  • Frames and subframes transmission timing for uplink carriers in the primary cell group and in the secondary cell group of the wireless device may employ: different synchronization signals as a timing reference; and different timing advance commands.
  • the plurality of timing advance commands may be configured to cause the wireless device to adjust timing of uplink signal transmissions in uplink carriers of the primary cell group and the secondary cell group such that the base station receives the uplink signal transmissions in substantial alignment with frames and subframes of the base station.
  • Transmission time may be divided into frames. Each frame may be divided into a plurality of subframes.
  • frames and subframe reception timing for uplink carriers in the primary cell group and uplink carriers in the secondary cell group of the base station may be substantially time aligned with frames and subframe reception timing of uplink carriers of other base stations in the plurality of base stations.
  • Frames and subframes transmission timing for uplink carriers in the primary cell group and in the secondary cell group of the wireless device may not necessarily time aligned.
  • the wireless device may be assigned, by the configuration, a plurality of media access control dedicated parameters.
  • the media access control dedicated parameters may comprise a plurality of time alignment timer values. Each of the plurality of time alignment timer values may be associated with a unique cell group in the wireless device.
  • the base station may transmit a control command configured to cause transmission of a random access preamble on random access resources of the reference secondary cell in the secondary cell group.
  • the base station may transmit a random access response on a primary cell in the primary cell group.
  • the random access response may comprise a timing advance command for the secondary cell group.
  • the secondary cell group may comprise the reference secondary cell.
  • the control command may comprise a mask index and the random access preamble identifier.
  • the random access response may comprise an identifier of the random access preamble.
  • a base station in a plurality of base stations may transmit first control message(s) to a wireless device at block 1500 .
  • the plurality of base stations may be compatible with LTE release 11 or above.
  • the first control message(s) may be configured to cause in the wireless device configuration of a plurality of cells.
  • the plurality of cells may comprise a primary cell and at least one secondary cell.
  • the first control message(s) may be configured to cause in the wireless device assignment of each of the secondary cell(s) to a cell group in a plurality of cell groups.
  • the plurality of cell groups may comprise a primary cell group and a secondary cell group.
  • the primary cell group may comprise a first subset of the plurality of cells.
  • the first subset may comprise the primary cell.
  • the secondary cell group may comprise a second subset of the secondary cell(s).
  • the base station may transmit a plurality of timing advance commands to the wireless device at block 1502 .
  • Each of the plurality of timing advance commands may comprise a time adjustment value and an index identifying a cell group.
  • frames and subframes transmission timing for downlink carriers in the primary cell group and downlink carriers in the secondary cell group may be substantially time aligned with each other.
  • Frames and subframes transmission timing for downlink carriers in the primary cell group and downlink carriers in the secondary cell group of the base station may be substantially time aligned with frames and subframes transmission timing of downlink carriers of other base stations in the plurality of base stations.
  • Frames and subframes transmission timing for uplink carriers in the primary cell group of the wireless device may be substantially time aligned with each other.
  • Frames and subframes transmission timing for uplink carriers in the secondary cell group of the wireless device may be substantially time aligned with each other.
  • Frames and subframes transmission timing for uplink carriers in the primary cell group and in the secondary cell group of the wireless device may employ different synchronization signals as a timing reference and different timing advance commands.
  • the plurality of timing advance commands may be configured to cause the wireless device to adjust timing of uplink signal transmissions in uplink carriers of the primary cell group and the secondary cell group such that the base station receives the uplink signal transmissions in substantial alignment with frames and subframes of the base station.
  • the base station may transmit a control command configured to cause transmission of a random access preamble on random access resources of the reference secondary cell in the secondary cell group.
  • the base station may transmit a random access response on a primary cell in the primary cell group.
  • the random access response may comprise a timing advance command for the secondary cell group.
  • the secondary cell group may comprise the reference secondary cell.
  • the control command may comprise a mask index and the random access preamble identifier.
  • the random access response may comprise an identifier of the random access preamble.
  • the base station may comprise communication interface(s), processor(s), and memory.
  • the memory may store instructions.
  • the processor(s) may execute the instructions to cause actions described herein.
  • FIG. 7 is an example message flow in a random access process in a TAG as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present invention.
  • a preamble 602 may be sent by a UE in response to the PDCCH order 601 on an SCell belonging to an sTAG. Preamble transmission for SCells may be controlled by the network using PDCCH format 1A.
  • Msg2 message 603 in response to the preamble transmission on SCell may be addressed to RA-CRNTI in PCell common search space (CSS).
  • Uplink packets 604 may be transmitted on a the SCell, in which the preamble was transmitted.
  • the SCell index in the uplink grant may not be transmitted in the uplink grant in RAR and the uplink grant contained in the RAR may be applicable to the cell where the preamble was sent.
  • RAPID may be included in Msg2 to address possible preamble misdetection by the eNB.
  • UE may compare the RAPID in Msg2 with the transmitted preamble ID to verify the validity of the Msg2 and to verify possible preamble misdetection by eNB.
  • a UE may transmit SRS signal after the SCell is active and in-sync. If the sTAG and the activated SCell are in-sync then UE may start transmission of one or more SRS signals after the SCell is being activated. In an example embodiment, if an SCell is configured with transmission of SRS signals and is associated with an sTAG that is out-of-sync. eNB may activate the SCell and eNB may initiate RA process on an SCell in the sTAG. UE may not transmit any SRS signals on the SCell before successful completion of random access process.
  • the UE may start transmission of one or more SRS signals on uplink of the SCells (in the sTAG) with configured SRS transmission.
  • UE may not transmit any SRS signal in the uplink of an active SCell belonging to an out-of-sync sTAG.
  • SRS is configured for an SCell belonging to an out-of-sync sTAG
  • a UE may not send SRS until UE receives and applies a RAR including a TA value, and an UL grant, because otherwise SRS may be sent with incorrect transmission power and/or timing.
  • UE may apply TA value to the sTAG.
  • UE may apply the power control command in the uplink grant before starting transmission of one or more SRS signals.
  • Uplink grant may include power control information.
  • the UE may receive TA value, uplink resources and a power control command (TPC) to adjust the uplink transmission timing and power before the UE starts to send SRS (if configured for the SCell). Transmission of one or more SRS signal may start after the SCell is activated and in-sync. This process may not be required for SCells of the pTAG, because pTAG may be in-sync when an SCell is activated.
  • TPC power control command
  • one or more SRS signals transmission may be dropped in a subframe if UE has insufficient power to transmit SRS signal with other uplink data or control packets in the subframe.
  • SRS signal may also be dropped if it collides with other uplink transmissions.
  • a UE may not simultaneously transmit uplink data and SRS in a subframe of an SCell. Transmission of one or more SRS signal may start after the SCell is activated and in-sync. Then for each subframe that SRS is configured to be transmitted, UE may examine power and other parallel transmission constraints and may drop or transmit an SRS signal in a subframe of an SCell if all other conditions are met.
  • the UE may transmit one or more SRS signals after the SCell is activated and is in-sync.
  • the UE may also drop one or more SRS signals depending on other predefined conditions after the SCell is activated and is in-sync. But prior to applying TAT to an activated and out-of-sync SCell no SRS signal may be transmitted on the SCell. This process may increase the transmission time and/or power of the transmitted SRS signals. Otherwise, SRS signal transmission may overlap with other symbols, and deteriorate radio link performance.
  • FIG. 16 is an example flow diagram illustrating a process for sounding transmission as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present invention.
  • a wireless device may receive at least one control message from a base station at block 1600 .
  • the control message(s) may cause in the wireless device configuration of a plurality of cells.
  • the plurality of cells may comprise a primary cell and at least one secondary cell.
  • the control message(s) may cause in the wireless device an assignment of each of the secondary cell(s) to a cell group in a plurality of cell groups.
  • the plurality of cell groups may comprise a primary cell group and a secondary cell group.
  • the primary cell group may comprise a first subset of the plurality of cells.
  • the first subset may comprise the primary cell.
  • Uplink transmissions by the wireless device in the primary cell group may employ a first synchronization signal transmitted on the primary cell as a primary timing reference.
  • the secondary cell group may comprise a second subset of the secondary cell(s).
  • Control message(s) may cause in the wireless device configuration of transmissions of sounding reference signals on a secondary cell in the secondary cell group. Control message(s) may cause configuration
  • the wireless device may receive an activation command to activate the secondary cell in the wireless device at block 1602 .
  • the wireless device may receive a control command configured to cause transmission of a random access preamble on random access resources of one of the secondary cell(s) in the second subset.
  • the wireless device may receive a random access response.
  • the random access response may comprise a timing advance command for the secondary cell group.
  • the random access response may comprise a preamble identifier.
  • the preamble identifier may identify the random access preamble.
  • the wireless device may transmit one or more of the sounding reference signals on the secondary cell after applying the timing advance command to the secondary cell group.
  • the wireless device may be configured to not transmit any of the sounding reference signals on the secondary cell during the period: between receiving the activation command and applying the timing advance command; or when the secondary cell is inactive; or when a time alignment timer for said secondary cell group is not running. Applying the timing advance command may cause substantial alignment of reception timing of uplink signals in frames and subframes of the secondary cell group at the base station.
  • the wireless device may be configured to transmit at least one of the sounding reference signals if: the secondary cell is activated; the timing advance command is applied by the wireless device to the secondary cell group; and a time alignment timer for the secondary cell group is running. Even when these conditions are met, the sounding reference signals may be dropped due to insufficient wireless device transmit power or due to coinciding with other transmissions in the same cell group.
  • the sounding reference signal(s) may be type zero sounding reference signals.
  • the sounding reference signal(s) may be configured to be transmitted during a period.
  • the sounding reference signal(s) may be transmitted on the last symbol of a plurality of subframes.
  • the transmission of a sounding reference signal in the sounding reference signal(s) in a subframe of the secondary cell may be dropped if the wireless device is power limited in the subframe.
  • the transmission of a sounding reference signal in the sounding reference signal(s) in a subframe of the secondary cell may be dropped if the wireless device transmits data in the subframe of the secondary cell.
  • the wireless device may drop at least one sounding reference signal if one or more pre-defined conditions are met.
  • a wireless device may receive at least one control message from a base station at block 1600 .
  • the control message(s) may cause in the wireless device configuration of a plurality of cells.
  • the plurality of cells may comprise a primary cell and at least one secondary cell.
  • the control message(s) may cause in the wireless device an assignment of each of the secondary cell(s) to a cell group in a plurality of cell groups.
  • the plurality of cell groups may comprise a primary cell group and a secondary cell group.
  • the primary cell group may comprise a first subset of the plurality of cells.
  • the first subset may comprise the primary cell.
  • Uplink transmissions by the wireless device in the primary cell group may employ a first synchronization signal transmitted on the primary cell as a primary timing reference.
  • the secondary cell group may comprise a second subset of the secondary cell(s).
  • the wireless device may receive an activation command to activate the secondary cell in the wireless device at block 1602 .
  • the wireless device may receive a control command configured to cause transmission of a random access preamble on random access resources of one of the secondary cell(s) in the second subset.
  • the wireless device may receive a random access response.
  • the random access response may comprise a timing advance command for the secondary cell group.
  • the random access response may comprise a preamble identifier.
  • the preamble identifier may identify the random access preamble.
  • the wireless device may receive a second control message from the base station.
  • the second control message may cause, in the wireless device, configuration of transmissions of sounding reference signals on a secondary cell in the secondary cell group.
  • the wireless device may transmit one or more of the sounding reference signals on the secondary cell after applying the timing advance command to the secondary cell group.
  • the wireless device may be configured to not transmit any of the sounding reference signals on the secondary cell during the period: between receiving the activation command and applying the timing advance command; or when the secondary cell is inactive; or when a time alignment timer for said secondary cell group is not running. Applying the timing advance command may cause substantial alignment of reception timing of uplink signals in frames and subframes of the secondary cell group at the base station.
  • the wireless device may be configured to transmit at least one of the sounding reference signals if: the secondary cell is activated; the timing advance command is applied by the wireless device to the secondary cell group; and a time alignment timer for the secondary cell group is running. Even when these conditions are met, the sounding reference signals may be dropped due to insufficient wireless device transmit power or due to coinciding with other transmissions in the same cell group.
  • the control message(s) may be configured to further cause in the wireless device the configuration of a time alignment timer for each of the plurality of cell groups.
  • the time alignment timer may start or restart in response to the wireless device receiving a timing advance command to adjust uplink transmission timing of a commanded cell group in the plurality of cell groups.
  • the wireless device may comprise communication interface(s), processor(s), and memory.
  • the memory may store instructions.
  • the processor(s) may execute the instructions to cause actions described herein.
  • LTE Rel-8, 9 & 10 Timing Advance Command MAC command has a subheader and a MAC CE with fixed size of one octet that contains 2 reserved bits (R bits).
  • LTE Rel-8, 9 & 10 does not support multiple time alignment grouping (It may also be said: it supports only one time alignment group) and there is no need to indicate to which time alignment group the time alignment command may apply.
  • the time alignment command is applied to uplink carriers including PCell and SCell(s) of a wireless device. There is a need for enhancing the time alignment procedure in LTE Rel-8, 9 & 10 to efficiently support multiple time alignment groups.
  • a MAC CE identifying the TA group to which the TA value applies may be used.
  • the R bits may be used to signal the TA group to which the TA value applies.
  • the R bits of the Timing Advance Command MAC Control Elements may be used to signal the TA Group.
  • one TA is included in a MAC CE. If multiple TAs, each for a different TAG, need to be transmitted, then multiple CEs may be transmitted in the same TTI or different TTIs.
  • a CE may have its own MAC subheader, and LCID number may be the same for them. It may be possible to transmit multiple TA MAC CE to a given wireless device in the same TTI, and a TA MAC CE may have its own subheader.
  • MAC CE indicates the TA Group of the PCell (pTAG) and other values are addressed to other TA groups (sTAGs). This would allow for a maximum of 4 TA Groups. 0 may be used for the 2-bits correspond to pTAG (00), 1-3 (01, 10, 11) may be used for sTAGs. This solution minimizes the changes to the release 8, 9, 10 MAC layer, and enhances the MAC CE TA command to multiple TAGs.
  • RRC layer may configure TAGs for an SCell (implicitly or explicitly) and may assign a TAG index (or TAG identifier) to a TAG (implicitly or explicitly).
  • the index that is introduced for a TA Group in RRC may be used for the setting of the TAG-ID bits.
  • the RRC index of the TA Groups is used for the setting of the TAG-ID bits.
  • TAG-ID configured by RRC may be used to indicate TA group where the TA command applies. This may imply that the RRC signalling may configure up to 4 TAG-IDs.
  • One TAG in one TA Command may be supported.
  • R.11 or above UEs may check R bits in MAC CE, but R.10 or below UEs may not need to check the R bits.
  • an R.11 or above UE with one configured TAG (only pTAG) may not need to check the TAG-ID bits.
  • multiple TAG TA values may be supported in one MAC CE TA command, in which a TA applies to a TAG.
  • a 6-bit TA value may be associated with a TAG using 2-bit TAG index (identifier).
  • This enhancement supports transmitting TA value for a specific TAG without adding the size of MAC CE command compared to release 8, 9, 10.
  • Two bits of TAG index bits are introduced before the 6 bits of TA value. This may require a new definition for MAC CE command that would be applicable to release 11 or above UEs.
  • a method to introduce this new MAC CE command is to introduce a new MAC LCID for this new format.
  • MAC LCID is included in a MAC subheader. This is a viable implementation option. This may increase the number of used MAC LCIDs.
  • An embodiment is introduced here that would allow to use the same MAC LCID as in Rel-8, 9 & 10 for Rel-11 multiple TAG configuration.
  • eNB transmits TA MAC CEs to UEs in unicast messages. eNB has the information about the current LTE release supported by the UE. This information may be available to the eNB via network signaling (through S1 interface with the MME) or via air interface signaling (UE capability message received from the UE). eNB may use the same LCID for the legacy TA MAC CE and the newly introduced TA MAC CE. If the MAC CE is transmitted to the release 8, 9, 10 LTE UEs, then the R bits may not include a TAG index. If the MAC CE is transmitted to the release 11 or above UEs, then the R bits may include the TAG index if multiple TAGs are configured. If multiple TAGs are not configured, then TA value is applied to pTAG including all the carriers.
  • This enhancement may not require introducing a new LCID, although a new MAC CE format is introduced for transmitting TA commands.
  • Both legacy TA MAC CEs and new TA MAC CEs may use the same LCID and that reduces the number of LCIDs used in the MAC layer (compared with the scenario where a new LCID is introduced) and may further simplify UE implementation.
  • eNB may consider UE LTE release or may consider the number of configured TAGs (1 for pTAG only configuration, more than 1 for pTAG and sTAG configuration) to decide if legacy MAC CE format should be used or new MAC CE format should be used. If UE is a release 8, 9, 10, then legacy MAC CE is used.
  • eNB may use new MAC CEs with TAG-ID bits set to pTAG index (for example 0 for pTAG). For release 11 or above UEs (or for release 11 or above UEs with multiple TAG configuration), eNB may use the new MAC CE format, wherein 2-bit TAG-ID bits point to the TAG index, which was configured in UE using RRC configuration messages.
  • user terminals for example: UE1, UE2) communicating with an eNB may support different releases of LTE technology.
  • UE2 may support releases 8, 9, 10, and 11 of LTE
  • UE1 may support releases 8, 9 and/or 10 (or for example may support release 8, or may support 8 & 9).
  • user terminals (for example: UE1, UE2) communicating with an eNB may support different capabilities of LTE technology.
  • UE2 may support multiple time alignment groups, and UE1 may not support multiple time alignment groups.
  • eNB may send MAC TA CEs to the user terminals (UE1, UE2) in unicast messages.
  • MAC TA CEs may have the same LCID for UE1 and UE2.
  • the user terminals may interpret MAC TA CE messages for adjusting uplink timing differently dependent on the LTE release they support and are operating.
  • the same exact message may be processed differently by UE1 and UE2.
  • UE1 may not consider the value of the two bits before TA value (RR).
  • UE1 may change the uplink transmission timing for all uplink carriers according to the TA value in the MAC command.
  • the first two bits may indicate the TAG ID to which the TA may apply. Therefore, the same MAC CE message content may be processed differently by different UEs operating in different LTE releases.
  • a base station may transmit a plurality of unicast timing advance commands to a plurality of wireless devices for adjusting uplink transmission timing by the plurality of wireless devices.
  • Each of the plurality of wireless devices may operate in a mode.
  • the mode may comprise: a) a first mode employable by all of the plurality of wireless devices, or a second mode employable only by a subset of the plurality of wireless devices.
  • Each of the plurality of wireless devices being addressed by at least one of the plurality of unicast timing advance commands may interpret differently the at least one of the plurality of unicast timing advance commands depending on the mode in which each of the plurality of wireless devices is operating.
  • the plurality of unicast timing advance commands may have different formats for the plurality of wireless devices operating in the first mode and the plurality of wireless devices operating in the second mode.
  • the format may comprise: a) a subheader comprising a logical channel ID, the logical channel ID being the same for the plurality of unicast timing advance commands, and b) a control element comprising a timing advance value, c) 2-bit information interpreted differently depending on the wireless device mode.
  • the first mode may be configured to be compatible with release 8, 9 or 10 of LTE-Advance technology.
  • the second mode may be configured to be compatible with release 11 of LTE-Advance technology.
  • FIG. 15 is an example flow diagram illustrating a base station process for configuring multiple cell groups as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present invention.
  • a base station in a plurality of base stations may transmit control message(s) to a first wireless device at block 1500 .
  • the plurality of base stations may be compatible with LTE release 11 or above and support multiple timing advance groups.
  • the control message(s) may be configured to cause in the first wireless device configuration of a plurality of cells.
  • the plurality of cells may comprise a primary cell and at least one secondary cell.
  • the control message(s) may be configured to cause in the first wireless device to assign of each of the secondary cell(s) to a cell group in a plurality of cell groups.
  • the plurality of cell groups may comprise a primary cell group and a secondary cell group.
  • the primary cell group may comprise a first subset of the plurality of cells.
  • the first subset may comprise the primary cell.
  • the secondary cell group may comprise a second subset of the secondary cell(s).
  • the second subset may comprise a reference secondary cell.
  • control message(s) may be configured to modify a radio bearer.
  • Control message(s) may be transmitted by the base station to the first wireless device.
  • the control message may cause configuration of uplink random access resources on a secondary cell in the secondary cell group.
  • Control message(s) may comprise a plurality of random access resource parameters.
  • the plurality of random access resource parameters may comprise: an index; a frequency offset; and a plurality of sequence parameters.
  • Control message(s) may comprise a time alignment timer parameter for each cell group in the plurality of cell groups.
  • a plurality of timing advance commands may be transmitted by the base station to the first wireless device at block 1502 .
  • a second plurality of timing advance commands may be transmitted by the base station to a second wireless device.
  • the second wireless device may be unconfigurable with cell groups.
  • each command in the first plurality of timing advance commands and the second plurality of timing advance commands may consist of a MAC subheader and a MAC control element. All of the MAC subheaders may comprise the same logical channel identifier value.
  • Each of the first plurality of timing advance commands may comprise two bits. The content of the two bits may indicate a first cell group index. The first cell group index may identify a first cell group according to the configuration caused by the control message(s).
  • Each of the first plurality of timing advance commands may be configured to cause substantial alignment of reception timing of first uplink signals in frames and subframes at the base station.
  • the first uplink signals may be transmitted by the first wireless device in one or more activated uplink carriers of a cell group identified by the two bits.
  • Each of the second plurality of timing advance commands may comprise two reserved bits. Each of the second plurality of timing advance commands may be configured to cause substantial alignment of reception timing of second uplink signals in frames and subframes at the base station.
  • the second uplink signals may be transmitted by the second wireless device in one or more activated uplink carriers.
  • the timing advance command in the first plurality of timing advance commands may comprise a timing advance value and an index identifying the secondary cell group.
  • the timing advance command may be configured to cause substantial alignment of reception timing of third uplink signals in frames and subframes of the secondary cell group at the base station.
  • the wireless device may be assigned, by the configuration, a plurality of media access control dedicated parameters.
  • the media access control dedicated parameters may comprise a plurality of time alignment timer values.
  • Each of the plurality of time alignment timer values may be associated with a unique cell group in the wireless device.
  • a time alignment timer of a cell group in the plurality of cell groups may start or restart in response to the wireless device receiving a timing advance command to adjust uplink transmission timing of the cell group.
  • uplink transmissions by the wireless device in the primary cell group may employ a first synchronization signal transmitted on the primary cell.
  • Uplink transmissions in the secondary cell group may employ a second synchronization signal on the reference secondary cell as a secondary timing reference.
  • a first signaling bearer may be established between the base station and the first wireless device.
  • the establishing may comprise the base station transmitting a control message to the first wireless device on the primary cell.
  • the base station may receive a plurality of radio capability parameters from the first wireless device on the first signaling bearer on the primary cell.
  • the plurality of radio capability parameters may indicate that the wireless device supports configuration of the plurality of cell groups.
  • a base station may transmit control message(s) to a first wireless device at block 1500 .
  • the plurality of base stations may be compatible with LTE release 11 or above.
  • a plurality of timing advance commands may be transmitted to a plurality of wireless devices at block 1502 for adjusting uplink transmission timing by the plurality of wireless devices.
  • Each of the plurality of wireless devices may operate in a mode.
  • the mode may be one of: a first mode employable by all of the plurality of wireless devices; and a second mode employable only by a subset of the plurality of wireless devices.
  • the timing advance command(s) may be interpreted by a wireless device in the plurality of wireless devices being addressed by timing advance command(s). The interpretation may depend on the mode in which the wireless device is operating.
  • Each of the plurality of timing advance commands may consists of: a subheader, a control element, and a a two-bit information element.
  • the subheader may comprise the same logical channel identifier value for the each of the plurality of timing advance commands.
  • the control element may comprise a timing advance value.
  • the two-bit information element may be interpreted as: a cell group index associated to a cell group adjusting uplink transmission timing if the wireless device is operating in the second mode; and/or reserved bits if the wireless device is operating in the first mode.
  • the first mode may be unconfigurable with a plurality of cell groups and the second mode may be configurable with a plurality of cell groups.
  • the first mode may be configured to be compatible with at least release: 8, 9 or 10 of LTE technology; or release 11 of LTE technology without multiple time alignment capability.
  • the second mode may be configured to be compatible with release 11 of LTE technology with multiple time alignment capability.
  • the first mode may be configured to be compatible with at least release 8, 9 or 10 of LTE technology.
  • the second mode may be configured to be compatible with release 11 of LTE technology.
  • a first signaling bearer may be established between the base station and the first wireless device.
  • the establishing may comprise the base station transmitting a control message to the first wireless device on the primary cell.
  • the base station may receive a plurality of radio capability parameters from the first wireless device on the first signaling bearer on the primary cell.
  • the plurality of radio capability parameters may indicate that the wireless device supports configuration of the second mode.
  • the base station may receive a plurality of radio capability parameters from the second wireless device on the first signaling bearer on the primary cell.
  • the plurality of radio capability parameters may indicate that the wireless device supports configuration of the first mode.
  • the base station may transmit control message(s) to a first wireless device operating in the second mode.
  • the control message(s) may be configured to cause in the first wireless device configuration of a plurality of cells.
  • the plurality of cells may comprise a primary cell and at least one secondary cell.
  • the control message(s) may be configured to cause in the first wireless device, a cell group index for a secondary cell in the plurality of cells.
  • the cell group index may identify one of a plurality of cell groups.
  • the plurality of cell groups may comprise a primary cell group and a secondary cell group.
  • the primary cell group may comprise a first subset of the plurality of cells.
  • the first subset may comprise the primary cell.
  • the secondary cell group may comprise a second subset of the at least one secondary cell.
  • a base station in a wireless network may transmit a plurality of timing advance commands to a plurality of wireless devices for adjusting uplink transmission timing by the plurality of wireless devices.
  • Each of the plurality of wireless devices may operate in a mode.
  • the mode may be a first mode or a second mode.
  • the first mode may be employable by all of the plurality of wireless devices.
  • the second mode may be employable only by a subset of the plurality of wireless devices.
  • the timing advance command(s) may be interpreted by a wireless device in the plurality of wireless devices being addressed by timing advance command(s). The interpretation may depend on the mode in which the wireless device is operating.
  • Each of the plurality of timing advance commands may consists of: a subheader, a control element, and a two-bit information element.
  • the subheader may comprise the same logical channel identifier value for the each of the plurality of timing advance commands.
  • the control element may comprise a timing advance value.
  • the two-bit information element may be interpreted differently depending on the wireless device operating mode.
  • a first signaling bearer may be established between the base station and the first wireless device prior to transmitting the at least one control message.
  • the establishing may comprise the base station transmitting a control message to the first wireless device on the primary cell.
  • the base station may receive a plurality of radio capability parameters from the first wireless device on the first signaling bearer on the primary cell prior to transmitting the at least one control message.
  • the plurality of radio capability parameters may indicate that the wireless device supports configuration of the second mode.
  • the base station may transmit control message(s) to a first wireless device operating in the second mode.
  • the control message(s) may be configured to cause in the first wireless device configuration of a plurality of cells.
  • the plurality of cells may comprise a primary cell and at least one secondary cell.
  • the control message(s) may be configured to cause in the first wireless device a cell group index for each cell in the plurality of cells.
  • the cell group index may identify one of a plurality of cell groups.
  • the plurality of cell groups may comprise a primary cell group and a secondary cell group.
  • the primary cell group may comprise a first subset of the plurality of cells.
  • the first subset may comprise the primary cell.
  • the secondary cell group may comprise a second subset of the at least one secondary cell.
  • the random access procedure may be initiated by a PDCCH order or by the MAC sublayer itself. Random access procedure on an SCell may be initiated by a PDCCH order. If a UE receives a PDCCH transmission consistent with a PDCCH order masked with its C-RNTI (radio network temporary identifier), and for a specific serving cell, the UE may initiate a random access procedure on this serving cell.
  • C-RNTI radio network temporary identifier
  • a PDCCH order or RRC optionally indicate the ra-PreambleIndex and the ra-PRACH-MaskIndex; and for random access on an SCell, the PDCCH order indicates the ra-PreambleIndex with a value different from zero and the ra-PRACH-MaskIndex.
  • the PDCCH order indicates the ra-PreambleIndex with a value different from zero and the ra-PRACH-MaskIndex.
  • the procedure may use some of the following information: a) the available set of PRACH resources for the transmission of the random access preamble, prach-ConfigIndex., b) for PCell, the groups of random access preambles and/or the set of available random access preambles in each group, c) for PCell, the preambles that are contained in random access preambles group A and Random Access Preambles group B are calculated, d) the RA response window size ra-ResponseWindowSize, e) the power-ramping factor powerRampingStep, f) the maximum number of preamble transmission preambleTransMax, g) the initial preamble power preambleInitialReceivedTargetPower, h) the preamble format based offset DELTA_PREAMBLE, i) for PCell, the maximum number of Msg3 HARQ transmissions maxHARQ-Msg3Tx, j) for
  • the Random Access procedure may be performed as follows: Flush the Msg3 buffer; set the PREAMBLE_TRANSMISSION_COUNTER to 1; set the backoff parameter value in the UE to 0 ms; for the RN (relay node), suspend any RN subframe configuration; proceed to the selection of the Random Access Resource.
  • the Random Access Resource selection procedure may be performed as follows. If ra-PreambleIndex (Random Access Preamble) and ra-PRACH-MaskIndex (PRACH Mask Index) have been explicitly signalled and ra-PreambleIndex is not zero, then the Random Access Preamble and the PRACH Mask Index may be those explicitly signalled. Otherwise, the Random Access Preamble may be selected by the UE.
  • ra-PreambleIndex Random Access Preamble
  • PRACH Mask Index PRACH Mask Index
  • the UE may determine the next available subframe containing PRACH permitted by the restrictions given by the prach-ConfigIndex, the PRACH Mask Index and physical layer timing requirements (a UE may take into account the possible occurrence of measurement gaps when determining the next available PRACH subframe). If the transmission mode is TDD and the PRACH Mask Index is equal to zero, then if ra-PreambleIndex was explicitly signalled and it was not 0 (i.e., not selected by MAC), then randomly select, with equal probability, one PRACH from the PRACHs available in the determined subframe. Else, the UE may randomly select, with equal probability, one PRACH from the PRACHs available in the determined subframe and the next two consecutive subframes.
  • a UE may determine a PRACH within the determined subframe in accordance with the requirements of the PRACH Mask Index. Then the UE may proceed to the transmission of the Random Access Preamble.
  • PRACH mask index values may range for example from 0 to 16.
  • PRACH mask index value may determine the allowed PRACH resource index that may be used for transmission.
  • PRACH mask index 0 may mean that all PRACH resource indeces are allowed; or PRACH mask index 1 may mean that PRACH resource index 0 may be used.
  • PRACH mask index may have different meaning in TDD and FDD systems.
  • the random-access procedure may be performed by UE setting PREAMBLE_RECEIVED_TARGET_POWER to preambleInitialReceivedTargetPower+DELTA_PREAMBLE+(PREAMBLE_TRANSMISSION_COUNTER ⁇ 1)*powerRampingStep.
  • the UE may instruct the physical layer to transmit a preamble using the selected PRACH, corresponding RA-RNTI, preamble index and PREAMBLE_RECEIVED_TARGET_POWER.
  • the UE may monitor the PDCCH of the PCell for random access response(s) identified by the RA-RNTI (random access radio network identifier) a specific RA-RNTI defined below, in the random access response (RAR) window which may start at the subframe that contains the end of the preamble transmission plus three subframes and has length ra-ResponseWindowSize subframes.
  • RA-RNTI random access radio network identifier
  • RAR random access response
  • t_id is the index of the first subframe of the specified PRACH (0 ⁇ t_id ⁇ 10)
  • f_id is the index of the specified PRACH within that subframe, in ascending order of frequency domain (0 ⁇ f_id ⁇ 6).
  • the UE may stop monitoring for RAR(s) after successful reception of a RAR containing random access preamble identifiers that matches the transmitted random access preamble.
  • the UE may regardless of the possible occurrence of a measurement gap: if the RAR contains a backoff indicator (BI) subheader, set the backoff parameter value in the UE employing the BI field of the backoff indicator subheader, else, set the backoff parameter value in the UE to zero ms.
  • BI backoff indicator
  • the UE may consider this RAR reception successful and apply the following actions for the serving cell where the random access preamble was transmitted: process the received riming advance command for the cell group in which the preamble was transmitted, indicate the preambleInitialReceivedTargetPower and the amount of power ramping applied to the latest preamble transmission to lower layers (i.e., (PREAMBLE_TRANSMISSION_COUNTER ⁇ 1)*powerRampingStep); process the received uplink grant value and indicate it to the lower layers; the uplink grant is applicable to uplink of the cell in which the preamble was transmitted.
  • process the received riming advance command for the cell group in which the preamble was transmitted indicate the preambleInitialReceivedTargetPower and the amount of power ramping applied to the latest preamble transmission to lower layers (i.e., (PREAMBLE_TRANSMISSION_COUNTER ⁇ 1)*powerRampingStep); process the received uplink grant value and indicate it to the lower layers; the
  • ra-PreambleIndex was explicitly signalled and it was not zero (e.g., not selected by MAC), consider the random access procedure successfully completed. Otherwise, if the Random Access Preamble was selected by UE MAC, set the Temporary C-RNTI to the value received in the RAR message.
  • the eNB may not provide a grant smaller than 56 bits in the Random Access Response.
  • RRC upper layers
  • UE may consider the random access procedure unsuccessfully completed. UE may stay in RRC connected mode and keep the RRC connection active eventhough a random access procedure unsuccessfully completed on a secondary TAG. According to some of the various aspects of embodiments, at completion of the random access procedure, the UE may discard explicitly signalled ra-PreambleIndex and ra-PRACH-MaskIndex, if any; and flush the HARQ buffer used for transmission of the MAC PDU in the Msg3 buffer. In addition, the RN may resume the suspended RN subframe configuration, if any.
  • the UE may have a configurable timer timeAlignmentTimer per TAG.
  • the timeAlignmentTimer is used to control how long the UE considers the Serving Cells belonging to the associated TAG to be uplink time aligned (in-sync).
  • the UE may apply the riming advance command for the indicated TAG, and start or restart the timeAlignmentTimer associated with the indicated TAG.
  • the UE may apply the timing advance command for this TAG, and may start or restart the timeAlignmentTimer associated with this TAG.
  • the UE may: flush all HARQ buffers for all serving cells; notify RRC to release PUCCH/SRS for all serving cells; clear any configured downlink assignments and uplink grants; and consider all running timeAlignmentTimers as expired.
  • the UE may flush all HARQ buffers; and notify RRC to release SRS.
  • the UE may not perform any uplink transmission on a serving Cell except the random access preamble transmission when the timeAlignmentTimer associated with the TAG to which this serving cell belongs is not running.
  • the timeAlignmentTimer associated with the pTAG is not running, the UE may not perform any uplink transmission on any serving cell except the random access preamble transmission on the PCell.
  • a UE stores or maintains N_TA (current timing advance value of an sTAG) upon expiry of associated timeAlignmentTimer.
  • the UE may apply a received timing advance command MAC control element and starts associated timeAlignmentTimer. Transmission of the uplink radio frame number i from the UE may start (N TA +N TA offset ) ⁇ T s seconds before the start of the corresponding downlink radio frame at the UE, where 0 ⁇ N TA ⁇ 20512.
  • the UE may adjust uplink transmission timing for PUCCH/PUSCH/SRS of the primary cell based on the received timing advance command.
  • the UL transmission timing for PUSCH/SRS of a secondary cell may be the same as the primary cell if the secondary cell and the primary cell belong to the same TAG.
  • the UE may adjust uplink transmission timing for PUSCH/SRS of secondary cells in the TAG based on the received timing advance command where the UL transmission timing for PUSCH/SRS is the same for all the secondary cells in the TAG.
  • the timing advance command for a TAG may indicates the change of the uplink timing relative to the current uplink timing for the TAG as multiples of 16Ts (Ts: sampling time unit).
  • Ts sampling time unit
  • the start timing of the random access preamble may obtained employing a downlink synchronization time in the same TAG.
  • adjustment of NTA value by a positive or a negative amount indicates advancing or delaying the uplink transmission timing for the TAG by a given amount respectively.
  • the corresponding adjustment of the uplink transmission timing may apply from the beginning of subframe n+6.
  • the UE may complete transmission of subframe n and not transmit the overlapped part of subframe n+1. If the received downlink timing changes and is not compensated or is only partly compensated by the uplink timing adjustment without timing advance command, the UE may change NTA accordingly.
  • Downlink frames and subframes of downlink carriers are time aligned (by the base station) in carrier aggregation and multiple TAG configuration.
  • Time alignment errors may be tolerated to some extend. For example, for intra-band contiguous carrier aggregation, time alignment error may not exceed 130 ns. In another example, for intra-band non-contiguous carrier aggregation, time alignment error may not exceed 260 ns. In another example, for inter-band carrier aggregation, time alignment error may not exceed 1.3 ⁇ s.
  • the UE may have capability to follow the frame timing change of the connected base station.
  • the uplink frame transmission may take place (N TA +N TA offset ) ⁇ T s before the reception of the first detected path (in time) of the corresponding downlink frame from the reference cell.
  • the UE may be configured with a pTAG containing the PCell.
  • the pTAG may also contain one or more SCells, if configured.
  • the UE may also be configured with one or more sTAGs, in which case the pTAG may contain one PCell and the sTAG may contain at least one SCell with configured uplink.
  • UE may use the PCell as the reference cell for deriving the UE transmit timing for cells in the pTAG.
  • the UE may employ a synchronization signal on the reference cell to drive downlink timing.
  • the UE may use an activated SCell from the sTAG for deriving the UE transmit timing for cell in the sTAG.
  • uplink physical channel(s) may correspond to a set of resource elements carrying information originating from higher layers.
  • the following example uplink physical channel(s) may be defined for uplink: a) Physical Uplink Shared Channel (PUSCH), b) Physical Uplink Control Channel (PUCCH), c) Physical Random Access Channel (PRACH), and/or the like.
  • Uplink physical signal(s) may be used by the physical layer and may not carry information originating from higher layers.
  • reference signal(s) may be considered as uplink physical signal(s).
  • Transmitted signal(s) in slot(s) may be described by one or several resource grids including, for example, subcarriers and SC-FDMA or OFDMA symbols.
  • Antenna port(s) may be defined such that the channel over which symbol(s) on antenna port(s) may be conveyed and/or inferred from the channel over which other symbol(s) on the same antenna port(s) is/are conveyed. There may be one resource grid per antenna port.
  • the antenna port(s) used for transmission of physical channel(s) or signal(s) may depend on the number of antenna port(s) configured for the physical channel(s) or signal(s).
  • cell search may be the procedure by which a wireless device may acquire time and frequency synchronization with a cell and may detect the physical layer Cell ID of that cell (transmitter).
  • An example embodiment for synchronization signal and cell search is presented below.
  • a cell search may support a scalable overall transmission bandwidth corresponding to 6 resource blocks and upwards.
  • Primary and secondary synchronization signals may be transmitted in the downlink and may facilitate cell search.
  • 504 unique physical-layer cell identities may be defined using synchronization signals.
  • the physical-layer cell identities may be grouped into 168 unique physical-layer cell-identity groups, group(s) containing three unique identities. The grouping may be such that physical-layer cell identit(ies) is part of a physical-layer cell-identity group.
  • a physical-layer cell identity may be defined by a number in the range of 0 to 167, representing the physical-layer cell-identity group, and a number in the range of 0 to 2, representing the physical-layer identity within the physical-layer cell-identity group.
  • the synchronization signal may include a primary synchronization signal and a secondary synchronization signal.
  • physical downlink control channel(s) may carry transport format, scheduling assignments, uplink power control, and other control information.
  • PDCCH may support multiple formats. Multiple PDCCH packets may be transmitted in a subframe.
  • scheduling control packet(s) may be transmitted for packet(s) or group(s) of packets transmitted in downlink shared channel(s). Scheduling control packet(s) may include information about subcarriers used for packet transmission(s).
  • PDCCH may also provide power control commands for uplink channels.
  • PDCCH channel(s) may carry a plurality of downlink control packets in subframe(s). Enhance PDCCH may be implemented in a cell as an option to carrier control information.
  • PHICH may carry the hybrid-ARQ (automatic repeat request) ACK/NACK.
  • PCFICH, PHICH, PDCCH, enhanced PDCCH, and/or PDSCH may be supported.
  • the configurations presented here are for example purposes.
  • resources PCFICH, PHICH, and/or PDCCH radio resources may be transmitted in radio resources including a subset of subcarriers and pre-defined time duration in each or some of the subframes.
  • PUSCH resource(s) may start from the first symbol.
  • radio resource configuration(s) for PUSCH, PUCCH, and/or PRACH (physical random access channel) may use a different configuration.
  • channels may be time multiplexed, or time/frequency multiplexed when mapped to uplink radio resources.
  • the physical layer random access preamble may comprise a cyclic prefix of length Tcp and a sequence part of length Tseq.
  • the parameter values may be pre-defined and depend on the frame structure and a random access configuration.
  • Tcp may be 0.1 msec
  • Tseq may be 0.9 msec.
  • Higher layers may control the preamble format.
  • the transmission of a random access preamble, if triggered by the MAC layer, may be restricted to certain time and frequency resources.
  • the start of a random access preamble may be aligned with the start of the corresponding uplink subframe at a wireless device.
  • random access preambles may be generated from Zadoff-Chu sequences with a zero correlation zone, generated from one or several root Zadoff-Chu sequences.
  • the preambles may also be generated using other random sequences such as Gold sequences.
  • the network may configure the set of preamble sequences a wireless device may be allowed to use.
  • there may be a multitude of preambles (e.g. 64) available in cell(s). From the physical layer perspective, the physical layer random access procedure may include the transmission of random access preamble(s) and random access response(s).
  • Remaining message(s) may be scheduled for transmission by a higher layer on the shared data channel and may not be considered part of the physical layer random access procedure.
  • a random access channel may occupy 6 resource blocks in a subframe or set of consecutive subframes reserved for random access preamble transmissions.
  • layer 1 procedure may be triggered upon request of a preamble transmission by higher layers; 2) a preamble index, a target preamble received power, a corresponding RA-RNTI (random access-radio network temporary identifier) and/or a PRACH resource may be indicated by higher layers as part of a request; 3) a preamble transmission power P_PRACH may be determined; 4) a preamble sequence may be selected from the preamble sequence set using the preamble index; 5) a single preamble may be transmitted using selected preamble sequence(s) with transmission power P_PRACH on the indicated PRACH resource; 6) detection of a PDCCH with the indicated RAR may be attempted during a window controlled by higher layers; and/or the like. If detected, the corresponding downlink shared channel transport block may be passed to higher layers.
  • the higher layers may parse transport block(s) and/or indicate an uplink grant to the physical layer
  • a random access procedure may be initiated by a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) order and/or by the MAC sublayer in a wireless device. If a wireless device receives a PDCCH transmission consistent with a PDCCH order masked with its radio identifier, the wireless device may initiate a random access procedure. Preamble transmission(s) on physical random access channel(s) (PRACH) may be supported on a first uplink carrier and reception of a PDCCH order may be supported on a first downlink carrier.
  • PDCCH physical downlink control channel
  • a wireless device Before a wireless device initiates transmission of a random access preamble, it may access one or many of the following types of information: a) available set(s) of PRACH resources for the transmission of a random access preamble; b) group(s) of random access preambles and set(s) of available random access preambles in group(s); c) random access response window size(s); d) power-ramping factor(s); e) maximum number(s) of preamble transmission(s); f) initial preamble power; g) preamble format based offset(s); h) contention resolution timer(s); and/or the like. These parameters may be updated from upper layers or may be received from the base station before random access procedure(s) may be initiated.
  • a wireless device may select a random access preamble using available information.
  • the preamble may be signaled by a base station or the preamble may be randomly selected by the wireless device.
  • the wireless device may determine the next available subframe containing PRACH permitted by restrictions given by the base station and the physical layer timing requirements for TDD or FDD. Subframe timing and the timing of transmitting the random access preamble may be determined based, at least in part, on synchronization signals received from the base station and/or the information received from the base station.
  • the wireless device may proceed to the transmission of the random access preamble when it has determined the timing.
  • the random access preamble may be transmitted on a second plurality of subcarriers on the first uplink carrier.
  • a wireless device may monitor the PDCCH of a primary carrier for random access response(s), in a random access response window. There may be a pre-known identifier in PDCCH that identifies a random access response. The wireless device may stop monitoring for random access response(s) after successful reception of a random access response containing random access preamble identifiers that matches the transmitted random access preamble and/or a random access response address to a wireless device identifier.
  • a base station random access response may include a time alignment command. The wireless device may process the received time alignment command and may adjust its uplink transmission timing according the time alignment value in the command.
  • a time alignment command may be coded using 11 bits, where an amount of the time alignment may be based on the value in the command.
  • the base station may provide the wireless device a grant for uplink transmission.
  • the random access response reception may be considered unsuccessful and the wireless device may, based on the backoff parameter in the wireless device, select a random backoff time and delay the subsequent random access transmission by the backoff time, and may retransmit another random access preamble.
  • a wireless device may transmit packets on an uplink carrier.
  • Uplink packet transmission timing may be calculated in the wireless device using the timing of synchronization signal(s) received in a downlink.
  • the wireless device may adjust its uplink transmission timing.
  • the timing alignment command may indicate the change of the uplink timing relative to the current uplink timing.
  • the uplink transmission timing for an uplink carrier may be determined using time alignment commands and/or downlink reference signals.
  • a time alignment command may indicate timing adjustment for transmission of signals on uplink carriers.
  • a time alignment command may use 6 bits. Adjustment of the uplink timing by a positive or a negative amount indicates advancing or delaying the uplink transmission timing by a given amount respectively.
  • the corresponding adjustment of the timing may be applied with some delay, for example, it may be applied from the beginning of subframe n+6.
  • the wireless device's uplink transmissions in subframe n and subframe n+1 are overlapped due to the timing adjustment, the wireless device may transmit complete subframe n and may not transmit the overlapped part of subframe n+1.
  • control message(s) or control packet(s) may be scheduled for transmission in a physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH) and/or physical uplink shared channel PUSCH.
  • PDSCH and PUSCH may carry control and data message(s)/packet(s).
  • Control message(s) and/or packet(s) may be processed before transmission.
  • the control message(s) and/or packet(s) may be fragmented or multiplexed before transmission.
  • a control message in an upper layer may be processed as a data packet in the MAC or physical layer.
  • system information block(s), radio resource control messages, and data traffic may be scheduled for transmission in PDSCH.
  • a wireless device may be preconfigured with one or more carriers.
  • the base station and/or wireless device may activate and/or deactivate the configured carriers.
  • One of the carriers (the primary carrier) may always be activated.
  • Other carriers may be deactivated by default and/or may be activated by a base station when needed.
  • a base station may activate and deactivate carriers by sending an activation/deactivation MAC control element.
  • the UE may maintain a carrier deactivation timer per configured carrier and deactivate the associated carrier upon its expiry. The same initial timer value may apply to instance(s) of the carrier deactivation timer.
  • the initial value of the timer may be configured by a network.
  • the configured carriers (unless the primary carrier) may be initially deactivated upon addition and after a handover.
  • a wireless device may activate the carrier, and/or may apply normal carrier operation including: sounding reference signal transmissions on the carrier (if the carrier is uplink time aligned), CQI (channel quality indicator)/PMI (precoding matrix indicator)/RI (ranking indicator) reporting for the carrier, PDCCH monitoring on the carrier, PDCCH monitoring for the carrier, start or restart the carrier deactivation timer associated with the carrier, and/or the like.
  • the base station or device may deactivate the carrier, and may stop the carrier deactivation timer associated with the carrier, and/or may flush HARQ buffers associated with the carrier.
  • the device may restart the carrier deactivation timer associated with the carrier.
  • the wireless device may not transmit SRS (sounding reference signal) for the carrier, may not report CQI/PMI/RI for the carrier, may not transmit on UL-SCH for the carrier, may not monitor the PDCCH on the carrier, and/or may not monitor the PDCCH for the carrier.
  • SRS sounding reference signal
  • a process to assign subcarriers to data packets may be executed by a MAC layer scheduler.
  • the decision on assigning subcarriers to a packet may be made based on data packet size, resources required for transmission of data packets (number of radio resource blocks), modulation and coding assigned to data packet(s), QoS required by the data packets (i.e. QoS parameters assigned to data packet bearer), the service class of a subscriber receiving the data packet, or subscriber device capability, a combination of the above, and/or the like.
  • packets may be referred to service data units and/or protocols data units at Layer 1, Layer 2 and/or Layer 3 of the communications network.
  • Layer 2 in an LTE network may include three sub-layers: PDCP sub-layer, RLC sub-layer, and MAC sub-layer.
  • a layer 2 packet may be a PDCP packet, an RLC packet or a MAC layer packet.
  • Layer 3 in an LTE network may be Internet Protocol (IP) layer, and a layer 3 packet may be an IP data packet.
  • IP Internet Protocol
  • Packets may be transmitted and received via an air interface physical layer.
  • a packet at the physical layer may be called a transport block.
  • Many of the various embodiments may be implemented at one or many different communication network layers. For example, some of the actions may be executed by the PDCP layer and some others by the MAC layer or PHY layer.
  • a radio bearer may be a GBR (guaranteed bit rate) bearer and/or a non-GBR bearer.
  • a GBR and/or guaranteed bit rate bearer may be employed for transfer of real-time packets, and/or a non-GBR bearer may be used for transfer of non-real-time packets.
  • the non-GBR bearer may be assigned a plurality of attributes including: a scheduling priority, an allocation and retention priority, a portable device aggregate maximum bit rate, and/or the like. These parameters may be used by the scheduler in scheduling non-GBR packets.
  • GBR bearers may be assigned attributes such as delay, jitter, packet loss parameters, and/or the like.
  • the transmitter in the disclosed embodiments of the present invention may be a wireless device (also called user equipment), a base station (also called eNodeB), a relay node transmitter, and/or the like.
  • the receiver in the disclosed embodiments of the present invention may be a wireless device (also called user equipment-UE), a base station (also called eNodeB), a relay node receiver, and/or the like.
  • the MAC layer in some wireless device(s) may report buffer size(s) of either a single Logical Channel Group (LCG) or a group of LCGs to a base station.
  • An LCG may be a group of logical channels identified by an LCG ID. The mapping of logical channel(s) to LCG may be set up during radio configuration.
  • Buffer status report(s) may be used by a MAC scheduler to assign radio resources for packet transmission from wireless device(s).
  • HARQ and ARQ processes may be used for packet retransmission to enhance the reliability of radio transmission and reduce the overall probability of packet loss.
  • parameters may comprise one or more objects, and each of those objects may comprise one or more other objects.
  • IE Information elements
  • N comprises parameter (IE) M
  • IE parameter (IE) K
  • IE) K comprises parameter (information element) J
  • N comprises K
  • N comprises J
  • modules may be implemented as modules.
  • a module is defined here as an isolatable element that performs a defined function and has a defined interface to other elements.
  • the modules described in this disclosure may be implemented in hardware, software in combination with hardware, firmware, wetware (i.e hardware with a biological element) or a combination thereof, all of which are behaviorally equivalent.
  • modules may be implemented as a software routine written in a computer language configured to be executed by a hardware machine (such as C, C++, Fortran, Java, Basic, Matlab or the like) or a modeling/simulation program such as Simulink, Stateflow, GNU Script, or Lab VIEWMathScript.
  • modules using physical hardware that incorporates discrete or programmable analog, digital and/or quantum hardware.
  • programmable hardware comprise: computers, microcontrollers, microprocessors, application-specific integrated circuits (ASICs); field programmable gate arrays (FPGAs); and complex programmable logic devices (CPLDs).
  • Computers, microcontrollers and microprocessors are programmed using languages such as assembly, C, C++ or the like.
  • FPGAs, ASICs and CPLDs are often programmed using hardware description languages (HDL) such as VHSIC hardware description language (VHDL) or Verilog that configure connections between internal hardware modules with lesser functionality on a programmable device.
  • HDL hardware description languages
  • VHDL VHSIC hardware description language
  • Verilog Verilog

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

A wireless device receives message(s) configuring transmissions of sounding reference signals on a secondary cell in a secondary cell group. The wireless device receives an activation command to activate the secondary cell. The wireless device transmits one or more of the sounding reference signals on the secondary cell after applying a timing advance command to the secondary cell group. The wireless device is configured to not transmit any of the sounding reference signals on the secondary cell during a period between receiving the message(s) and applying the timing advance command to the secondary cell group.

Description

    CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS
  • This application is a continuation of application Ser. No. 13/749,695, filed Jan. 25, 2013, which claims the benefit of U.S. Provisional Application No. 61/590,366, filed Jan. 25, 2012, and U.S. Provisional Application No. 61/618,830, filed Apr. 1, 2012, and U.S. Provisional Application No. 61/661,329, filed Jun. 18, 2012, which are hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety.
  • BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE SEVERAL VIEWS OF THE DRAWINGS
  • Examples of several of the various embodiments of the present invention are described herein with reference to the drawings, in which:
  • FIG. 1 is a diagram depicting example sets of OFDM subcarriers as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present invention;
  • FIG. 2 is a diagram depicting an example transmission time and reception time for two carriers in a carrier group as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present invention;
  • FIG. 3 is a diagram depicting OFDM radio resources as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present invention;
  • FIG. 4 is a block diagram of a base station and a wireless device as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present invention;
  • FIG. 5 is a block diagram depicting a system for transmitting data traffic over an OFDM radio system as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present invention;
  • FIG. 6 is a diagram depicting uplink transmission timing of one or more cells in a first timing advance group (TAG) and a second TAG as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present invention;
  • FIG. 7 is an example message flow in a random access process in a secondary TAG as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present invention;
  • FIG. 8 shows example TAG configurations as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present invention;
  • FIG. 9 is an example physical random access channel (PRACH) configuration in a primary TAG (pTAG) and a secondary TAG (sTAG) as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present invention;
  • FIG. 10 is an example flow diagram illustrating timing reference change as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present invention;
  • FIG. 11 is an example flow diagram illustrating an unsuccessful random access process as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present invention;
  • FIG. 12 is an example flow diagram illustrating an unsuccessful random access process as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present invention;
  • FIG. 13 is an example flow diagram illustrating an unsuccessful random access process as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present invention;
  • FIG. 14 is an example flow diagram illustrating mechanisms in a wireless device when a time alignment timer expires as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present invention;
  • FIG. 15 is an example flow diagram illustrating a base station process for configuring multiple cell groups as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present invention; and
  • FIG. 16 is an example flow diagram illustrating a process for sounding transmission as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present invention.
  • DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EMBODIMENTS
  • Example embodiments of the present invention enable operation of multiple timing advance groups. Embodiments of the technology disclosed herein may be employed in the technical field of multicarrier communication systems. More particularly, the embodiments of the technology disclosed herein may relate to operation of multiple timing advance groups.
  • Example embodiments of the invention may be implemented using various physical layer modulation and transmission mechanisms. Example transmission mechanisms may include, but are not limited to: CDMA (code division multiple access), OFDM (orthogonal frequency division multiplexing), TDMA (time division multiple access), Wavelet technologies, and/or the like. Hybrid transmission mechanisms such as TDMA/CDMA, and OFDM/CDMA may also be employed. Various modulation schemes may be applied for signal transmission in the physical layer. Examples of modulation schemes include, but are not limited to: phase, amplitude, code, a combination of these, and/or the like. An example radio transmission method may implement QAM (quadrature amplitude modulation) using BPSK (binary phase shift keying), QPSK (quadrature phase shift keying), 16-QAM, 64-QAM, 256-QAM, and/or the like. Physical radio transmission may be enhanced by dynamically or semi-dynamically changing the modulation and coding scheme depending on transmission requirements and radio conditions.
  • FIG. 1 is a diagram depicting example sets of OFDM subcarriers as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present invention. As illustrated in this example, arrow(s) in the diagram may depict a subcarrier in a multicarrier OFDM system. The OFDM system may use technology such as OFDM technology, SC-OFDM (single carrier-OFDM) technology, or the like. For example, arrow 101 shows a subcarrier transmitting information symbols. FIG. 1 is for illustration purposes, and a typical multicarrier OFDM system may include more subcarriers in a carrier. For example, the number of subcarriers in a carrier may be in the range of 10 to 10,000 subcarriers. FIG. 1 shows two guard bands 106 and 107 in a transmission band. As illustrated in FIG. 1, guard band 106 is between subcarriers 103 and subcarriers 104. The example set of subcarriers A 102 includes subcarriers 103 and subcarriers 104. FIG. 1 also illustrates an example set of subcarriers B 105. As illustrated, there is no guard band between any two subcarriers in the example set of subcarriers B 105. Carriers in a multicarrier OFDM communication system may be contiguous carriers, non-contiguous carriers, or a combination of both contiguous and non-contiguous carriers.
  • FIG. 2 is a diagram depicting an example transmission time and reception time for two carriers as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present invention. A multicarrier OFDM communication system may include one or more carriers, for example, ranging from 1 to 10 carriers. Carrier A 204 and carrier B 205 may have the same or different timing structures. Although FIG. 2 shows two synchronized carriers, carrier A 204 and carrier B 205 may or may not be synchronized with each other. Different radio frame structures may be supported for FDD (frequency division duplex) and TDD (time division duplex) duplex mechanisms. FIG. 2 shows an example FDD frame timing. Downlink and uplink transmissions may be organized into radio frames 201. In this example, radio frame duration is 10 msec. Other frame durations, for example, in the range of 1 to 100 msec may also be supported. In this example, each 10 ms radio frame 201 may be divided into ten equally sized sub-frames 202. Other subframe durations such as including 0.5 msec, 1 msec, 2 msec, and 5 msec may also be supported. Sub-frame(s) may consist of two or more slots 206. For the example of FDD, 10 subframes may be available for downlink transmission and 10 subframes may be available for uplink transmissions in each 10 ms interval. Uplink and downlink transmissions may be separated in the frequency domain. Slot(s) may include a plurality of OFDM symbols 203. The number of OFDM symbols 203 in a slot 206 may depend on the cyclic prefix length and subcarrier spacing.
  • FIG. 3 is a diagram depicting OFDM radio resources as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present invention. The resource grid structure in time 304 and frequency 305 is illustrated in FIG. 3. The quantity of downlink subcarriers or resource blocks (RB) (in this example 6 to 100 RBs) may depend, at least in part, on the downlink transmission bandwidth 306 configured in the cell. The smallest radio resource unit may be called a resource element (e.g. 301). Resource elements may be grouped into resource blocks (e.g. 302). Resource blocks may be grouped into larger radio resources called Resource Block Groups (RBG) (e.g. 303). The transmitted signal in slot 206 may be described by one or several resource grids of a plurality of subcarriers and a plurality of OFDM symbols. Resource blocks may be used to describe the mapping of certain physical channels to resource elements. Other pre-defined groupings of physical resource elements may be implemented in the system depending on the radio technology. For example, 24 subcarriers may be grouped as a radio block for a duration of 5 msec. In an illustrative example, a resource block may correspond to one slot in the time domain and 180 kHz in the frequency domain (for 15 KHz subcarrier bandwidth and 12 subcarriers).
  • According to some embodiments, a radio resource framework using OFDM technology may be employed. Alternative embodiments may be implemented employing other radio technologies. Example transmission mechanisms include, but are not limited to: CDMA, OFDM, TDMA, Wavelet technologies, and/or the like. Hybrid transmission mechanisms such as TDMA/CDMA, and OFDM/CDMA may also be employed.
  • FIG. 4 is an example block diagram of a base station 401 and a wireless device 406, as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present invention. A communication network 400 may include at least one base station 401 and at least one wireless device 406. The base station 401 may include at least one communication interface 402, at least one processor 403, and at least one set of program code instructions 405 stored in non-transitory memory 404 and executable by the at least one processor 403. The wireless device 406 may include at least one communication interface 407, at least one processor 408, and at least one set of program code instructions 410 stored in non-transitory memory 409 and executable by the at least one processor 408. Communication interface 402 in base station 401 may be configured to engage in communication with communication interface 407 in wireless device 406 via a communication path that includes at least one wireless link 411. Wireless link 411 may be a bi-directional link. Communication interface 407 in wireless device 406 may also be configured to engage in a communication with communication interface 402 in base station 401. Base station 401 and wireless device 406 may be configured to send and receive data over wireless link 411 using multiple frequency carriers. According to some of the various aspects of embodiments, transceiver(s) may be employed. A transceiver is a device that includes both a transmitter and receiver. Transceivers may be employed in devices such as wireless devices, base stations, relay nodes, and/or the like. Example embodiments for radio technology implemented in communication interface 402, 407 and wireless link 411 are illustrated are FIG. 1, FIG. 2, and FIG. 3. and associated text.
  • FIG. 5 is a block diagram depicting a system 500 for transmitting data traffic generated by a wireless device 502 to a server 508 over a multicarrier OFDM radio according to one aspect of the illustrative embodiments. The system 500 may include a Wireless Cellular Network/Internet Network 507, which may function to provide connectivity between one or more wireless devices 502 (e.g., a cell phone, PDA (personal digital assistant), other wirelessly-equipped device, and/or the like), one or more servers 508 (e.g. multimedia server, application servers, email servers, or database servers) and/or the like.
  • It should be understood, however, that this and other arrangements described herein are set forth for purposes of example only. As such, those skilled in the art will appreciate that other arrangements and other elements (e.g., machines, interfaces, functions, orders of functions, etc.) may be used instead, some elements may be added, and some elements may be omitted altogether. Further, as in most telecommunications applications, those skilled in the art will appreciate that many of the elements described herein are functional entities that may be implemented as discrete or distributed components or in conjunction with other components, and in any suitable combination and location. Still further, various functions described herein as being performed by one or more entities may be carried out by hardware, firmware and/or software logic in combination with hardware. For instance, various functions may be carried out by a processor executing a set of machine language instructions stored in memory.
  • As shown, the access network may include a plurality of base stations 503 . . . 504. Base station 503 . . . 504 of the access network may function to transmit and receive RF (radio frequency) radiation 505 . . . 506 at one or more carrier frequencies, and the RF radiation may provide one or more air interfaces over which the wireless device 502 may communicate with the base stations 503 . . . 504. The user 501 may use the wireless device (or UE: user equipment) to receive data traffic, such as one or more multimedia files, data files, pictures, video files, or voice mails, etc. The wireless device 502 may include applications such as web email, email applications, upload and ftp applications, MMS (multimedia messaging system) applications, or file sharing applications. In another example embodiment, the wireless device 502 may automatically send traffic to a server 508 without direct involvement of a user. For example, consider a wireless camera with automatic upload feature, or a video camera uploading videos to the remote server 508, or a personal computer equipped with an application transmitting traffic to a remote server.
  • One or more base stations 503 . . . 504 may define a corresponding wireless coverage area. The RF radiation 505 . . . 506 of the base stations 503 . . . 504 may carry communications between the Wireless Cellular Network/Internet Network 507 and access device 502 according to any of a variety of protocols. For example, RF radiation 505 . . . 506 may carry communications according to WiMAX (Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access e.g., IEEE 802.16), LTE (long term evolution), microwave, satellite, MMDS (Multichannel Multipoint Distribution Service), Wi-Fi (e.g., IEEE 802.11), Bluetooth, infrared, and other protocols now known or later developed. The communication between the wireless device 502 and the server 508 may be enabled by any networking and transport technology for example TCP/IP (transport control protocol/Internet protocol), RTP (real time protocol), RTCP (real time control protocol), HTTP (Hypertext Transfer Protocol) or any other networking protocol.
  • According to some of the various aspects of embodiments, an LTE network may include many base stations, providing a user plane (PDCP: packet data convergence protocol/RLC: radio link control/MAC: media access control/PHY: physical) and control plane (RRC: radio resource control) protocol terminations towards the wireless device. The base station(s) may be interconnected with other base station(s) by means of an X2 interface. The base stations may also be connected by means of an S1 interface to an EPC (Evolved Packet Core). For example, the base stations may be interconnected to the MME (Mobility Management Entity) by means of the S1-MME interface and to the Serving Gateway (S-GW) by means of the S1-U interface. The S1 interface may support a many-to-many relation between MMEs/Serving Gateways and base stations. A base station may include many sectors for example: 1, 2, 3, 4, or 6 sectors. A base station may include many cells, for example, ranging from 1 to 50 cells or more. A cell may be categorized, for example, as a primary cell or secondary cell. When carrier aggregation is configured, a wireless device may have one RRC connection with the network. At RRC connection establishment/re-establishment/handover, one serving cell may provide the NAS (non-access stratum) mobility information (e.g. TAI-tracking area identifier), and at RRC connection re-establishment/handover, one serving cell may provide the security input. This cell may be referred to as the Primary Cell (PCell). In the downlink, the carrier corresponding to the PCell may be the Downlink Primary Component Carrier (DL PCC), while in the uplink, it may be the Uplink Primary Component Carrier (UL PCC). Depending on wireless device capabilities, Secondary Cells (SCells) may be configured to form together with the PCell a set of serving cells. In the downlink, the carrier corresponding to an SCell may be a Downlink Secondary Component Carrier (DL SCC), while in the uplink, it may be an Uplink Secondary Component Carrier (UL SCC). An SCell may or may not have an uplink carrier.
  • A cell, comprising a downlink carrier and optionally an uplink carrier, is assigned a physical cell ID and a cell index. A carrier (downlink or uplink) belongs to only one cell, the cell ID or Cell index may also identify the downlink carrier or uplink carrier of the cell (depending on the context it is used). In the specification, cell ID may be equally referred to a carrier ID, and cell index may be referred to carrier index. In implementation, the physical cell ID or cell index may be assigned to a cell. Cell ID may be determined using the synchronization signal transmitted on a downlink carrier. Cell index may be determined using RRC messages. For example, when the specification refers to a first physical cell ID for a first downlink carrier, it may mean the first physical cell ID is for a cell comprising the first downlink carrier. The same concept may apply to, for example, carrier activation. When the specification indicates that a first carrier is activated, it equally means that the cell comprising the first carrier is activated.
  • Embodiments may be configured to operate as needed. The disclosed mechanism may be performed when certain criteria are met, for example, in wireless device, base station, radio environment, network, a combination of the above, and/or the like. Example criteria may be based, at least in part, on for example, traffic load, initial system set up, packet sizes, traffic characteristics, a combination of the above, and/or the like. When the one or more criteria are met, the example embodiments may be applied. Therefore, it may be possible to implement example embodiments that selectively implement disclosed protocols.
  • Example embodiments of the invention may enable operation of multiple timing advance groups. Other example embodiments may comprise a non-transitory tangible computer readable media comprising instructions executable by one or more processors to cause operation of multiple timing advance groups. Yet other example embodiments may comprise an article of manufacture that comprises a non-transitory tangible computer readable machine-accessible medium having instructions encoded thereon for enabling programmable hardware to cause a device (e.g. wireless communicator, UE, base station, etc.) to enable operation of multiple timing advance groups. The device may include processors, memory, interfaces, and/or the like. Other example embodiments may comprise communication networks comprising devices such as base stations, wireless devices (or user equipment: UE), servers, switches, antennas, and/or the like.
  • According to some of the various aspects of embodiments, serving cells having an uplink to which the same time alignment (TA) applies may be grouped in a TA group (TAG). Serving cells in one TAG may use the same timing reference. For a given TAG, a user equipment (UE) may use one downlink carrier as the timing reference at a given time. The UE may use a downlink carrier in a TAG as the timing reference for that TAG. For a given TAG, a UE may synchronize uplink subframe and frame transmission timing of the uplink carriers belonging to the same TAG. According to some of the various aspects of embodiments, serving cells having an uplink to which the same TA applies may correspond to the serving cells hosted by the same receiver. A TA group may comprise at least one serving cell with a configured uplink. A UE supporting multiple TAs may support two or more TA groups. One TA group may contain the PCell and may be called a primary TAG (pTAG). In a multiple TAG configuration, at least one TA group may not contain the PCell and may be called a secondary TAG (sTAG). Carriers within the same TA group may use the same TA value and the same timing reference. In this disclosure, timing advance group, time alignment group, and cell group have the same meaning. Further, time alignment command and timing advance command have the same meaning.
  • FIG. 6 is a diagram depicting uplink transmission timing of one or more cells in a first timing advance group (TAG1) and a second TAG (TAG2) as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present invention. TAG1 may include one or more cells, TAG2 may also include one or more cells. TAG timing difference in FIG. 6 may be the difference in UE uplink transmission timing for uplink carriers in TAG1 and TAG2. The timing difference may range between, for example, sub micro-seconds to about 3o micro-seconds.
  • FIG. 8 shows example TAG configurations as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present invention. In Example 1, pTAG include PCell, and sTAG includes SCell1. In Example 2, pTAG includes PCell and SCell1, and sTAG includes SCell2 and SCell3. In Example 3, pTAG includes PCell and SCell1, and sTAG1 includes SCell2 and SCell3, and sTAG2 includes SCell4. Up to four TAGs may be supported and other example TAG configurations may also be provided. In many examples of this disclosure, example mechanisms are described for a pTAG and an sTAG. The operation with one example sTAG is described, and the same operation may be applicable to other sTAGs. The example mechanisms may be applied to configurations with multiple sTAGs.
  • According to some of the various aspects of embodiments, TA maintenance, pathloss reference handling and the timing reference for pTAG may follow LTE release 10 principles. The UE may need to measure downlink pathloss to calculate the uplink transmit power. The pathloss reference may be used for uplink power control and/or transmission of random access preamble(s). A UE may measure downlink pathloss using the signals received on the pathloss reference cell. The pathloss reference downlink cell and the corresponding uplink cell may be configured to be in the same frequency band due to the required accuracy of pathloss estimation. For SCell(s) in a pTAG, the choice of pathloss reference for cells may be selected from and be limited to the following two options: a) the downlink SCell linked to an uplink SCell using the system information block 2 (SIB2), and b) the downlink pCell. The pathloss reference for SCells in pTAG may be configurable using RRC message(s) as a part of SCell initial configuration and/or reconfiguration. According to some of the various aspects of embodiments, PhysicalConfigDedicatedSCell information element (IE) of an SCell configuration may include the pathloss reference SCell (downlink carrier) for an SCell in pTAG.
  • The downlink SCell linked to an uplink SCell using the system information block 2 (SIB2) may be referred to as the SIB2 linked downlink of the SCell. Different TAGs may operate in different bands. In another example, the signals in different TAGs may travel through different repeaters, or the signal of one SCell in an sTAG may travel through a repeater while the signal of another TAG may not go through the repeater. Having flexibility in SCell pathloss reference configuration for SCells belonging to an sTAG may result in pathloss estimation errors due to mobility of wireless device. The wireless device may autonomously change a timing reference SCell in an sTAG, but changing pathloss reference autonomously may result in confusion in the serving eNB, specially that different cells may have different transmit power. Therefore, both eNB configuration flexibility and autonomous UE pathloss selection for an SCell in sTAG may result in errors in pathloss estimation. For an uplink carrier in an sTAG, the pathloss reference may be only configurable to the downlink SCell linked to an uplink SCell using the system information block 2 (SIB2) of the SCell. No other downlink carrier may be configured as the pathloss reference for an SCell in an sTAG. This configuration may introduce accuracy in pathloss estimation.
  • According to some of the various aspects of embodiments, a UE may successfully complete a random access procedure from the reception of a random access response (RAR) message within the random access (RA) response window using a random access radio network temporary identifier (RA-RNTI). The UE may decode scheduling information for uplink transmission in the PDCCH common search space (CSS) with RA-RNTI. According to some of the various aspects of embodiments, in addition to the time alignment command (TAC) field, RAR for a PCell and/or SCell may contain at least one of the following: a Random Access Preamble Identifier (RAPID), a UL grant, a Temporary C-RNTI, a Backoff Indicator (BI), and/or the like. RAPID may be used to confirm the association between RAR and the transmitted preamble. The UL grant may be employed for uplink transmission on the cell that the preamble was transmitted. Temporary C-RNTI may be used for contention resolution in case of contention based random access (CBRA). A backoff Indicator (BI) may be used in case of collisions and/or high load on PRACH.
  • To obtain initial uplink (UL) time alignment for an sTAG, eNB may initiate an RA procedure. In an sTAG, a UE may use one of any activated SCells from this sTAG as a timing reference cell. In an example embodiment, the timing reference for SCells in an sTAG may be the SIB2 linked downlink of the SCell on which the preamble for the latest RA procedure was sent. There may be one timing reference and one time alignment timer (TAT) per TA group. TAT for TAGs may be configured with different values. When the TAT associated with the pTAG expires: all TATs may be considered as expired, the UE may flush all HARQ buffers of all serving cells, the UE may clear any configured downlink assignment/uplink grants, and the RRC in the UE may release PUCCH/SRS for all configured serving cells. When the pTAG TAT is not running, an sTAG TAT may not be running. When the TAT associated with sTAG expires: a) SRS transmissions may be stopped on the corresponding SCells, b) SRS RRC configuration may be released, c) CSI reporting configuration for the corresponding SCells may be maintained, and/or d) the MAC in the UE may flush the uplink HARQ buffers of the corresponding SCells.
  • Upon deactivation of the last SCell in an sTAG, the UE may not stop TAT of the sTAG. In an implementation, upon removal of the last SCell in an sTAG, TAT of the TA group may not be running. RA procedures in parallel may not be supported for a UE. If a new RA procedure is requested (either by UE or network) while another RA procedure is already ongoing, it may be up to the UE implementation whether to continue with the ongoing procedure or start with the new procedure. The eNB may initiate the RA procedure via a PDCCH order for an activated SCell. This PDCCH order may be sent on the scheduling cell of this SCell. When cross carrier scheduling is configured for a cell, the scheduling cell may be different than the cell that is employed for preamble transmission, and the PDCCH order may include the SCell index. At least a non-contention based RA procedure may be supported for SCell(s) assigned to sTAG(s). Upon new UL data arrival, the UE may not trigger an RA procedure on an SCell. PDCCH order for preamble transmission may be sent on a different serving cell than the SCell in which the preamble is sent. TA grouping may be performed without requiring any additional UE assisted information.
  • FIG. 7 is an example message flow in a random access process in a secondary TAG as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present invention. eNB transmits an activation command 600 to activate an SCell. A preamble 602 (Msg1) may be sent by a UE in response to the PDCCH order 601 on an SCell belonging to an sTAG. In an example embodiment, preamble transmission for SCells may be controlled by the network using PDCCH format 1A. Msg2 message 603 (RAR: random access response) in response to the preamble transmission on SCell may be addressed to RA-CRNTI in PCell common search space (CSS). Uplink packets 604 may be transmitted on the SCell, in which the preamble was transmitted.
  • According to some of the various aspects of embodiments, initial timing alignment may be achieved through a random access procedure. This may involve the UE transmitting a random access preamble and the eNB responding to an initial TA command NTA (amount of time alignment) within the random access response window. The start of the random access preamble may be aligned with the start of the corresponding uplink subframe at the UE assuming NTA=0. The eNB may estimate the uplink timing from the random access preamble transmitted by the UE. The TA command may be derived by the eNB based on the estimation of the difference between the desired UL timing and the actual UL timing. The UE may determine the initial uplink transmission timing relative to the corresponding downlink of the sTAG on which the preamble is transmitted.
  • PDCCH order may be used to trigger RACH for an activated SCell. For a newly configured SCell or a configured but deactivated SCell, eNB may need to firstly activate the corresponding SCell and then trigger a RA on it. In an example embodiment, with no retransmission of an activation/deactivation command, activation of an SCell may need at least 8 ms, which may be an extra delay for UE to acquire the valid TA value on an SCell compared to the procedure on an already activated SCell. For a newly configured SCell or a deactivated SCell, 8 ms may be required for SCell activation, and at least 6 ms may be required for preamble transmission, and at least 4 ms may be required to receive the random access response. At least 18 ms may be required for a UE to get a valid TA. The possible delay caused by retransmission or other configured parameters may need to be considered (e.g. the possible retransmission of an activation/deactivation command, and/or the time gap between when a RA is triggered and when a preamble is transmitted (equal or larger than 6 ms)). The RAR may be transmitted within the RAR window (for example, 2 ms, 10 ms, 50 ms), and possible retransmission of the preamble may be considered. The delay for such a case may be more than 20 ms or even 30 ms if retransmissions are considered.
  • A base station may communicate with a mix of wireless devices. Wireless devices may support multiple technologies, or multiple releases of the same technology, have some specific capability depending on the wireless device category and/or capability. A base station may comprise multiple sectors. When this disclosure refers to a base station communicating with a plurality of wireless devices, this disclosure may refer to a subset of the total wireless devices in the coverage area. This disclosure may refer to, for example, a plurality of wireless devices of a given LTE release with a given capability and in a given sector of the base station. The plurality of wireless devices in this disclosure may refer to a selected plurality of wireless devices, and/or a subset of total wireless devices in the coverage area, which perform according to the disclosed methods, and/or the like. There may be many wireless devices in the coverage area that may not comply with the disclosed methods, for example, because those wireless devices perform based on older releases of LTE technology. A time alignment command MAC control element may be a unicast MAC command transmitted to a wireless device. A wireless device may receive its own time alignment commands.
  • According to some of the various aspects of various embodiments, the base station or wireless device may group cells into a plurality of cell groups. The term “cell group” may refer to a timing advance group (TAG) or a timing alignment group or a time alignment group. A cell group may include at least one cell. A MAC TA command may correspond to a TAG. A group may explicitly or implicitly be identified by a TAG index. Cells in the same band may belong to the same cell group. A first cell's frame timing may be tied to a second cell's frame timing in a TAG. When a time alignment command is received for the second cell, the frame timing of both first cell and second cell may be adjusted. Base station(s) may provide TAG configuration information to the wireless device(s) by RRC configuration message(s).
  • According to some of the various aspects of some embodiments, the number of time alignment commands transmitted by the base station to a wireless device in a given period may depend, at least in part, on many parameters including at least one of: a) the speed that the wireless device moves in the coverage area, b) the direction that the wireless device moves in the coverage area, c) the coverage radius, and/or d) the number of active wireless devices in the coverage area. A base station may transmit at least two types of time alignment commands. A first type command may be transmitted to a first category of wireless devices. The first category may include devices compatible with at least release 8, 9, or 10 of the LTE standard. A second type command may be transmitted to a second category of devices. The second category may include devices with multi-time alignment group (MTG) capability and compatible with release 11 or beyond of the LTE standard. The time alignment may be transmitted to wireless devices that are in connected mode and are applicable to active cells.
  • A UE may transmit a Scheduling Request (SR) and/or a buffer status report (BSR) due to uplink data arrival in the UE. A UE may transmit a scheduling request on PUCCH when the UE has data for uplink transmission and UE do not have uplink grants for transmission of a buffer status report. The UE may receive uplink grant in response to a SR. A base station scheduler may also provide an uplink grant to a UE for some other reasons, for example, based on a previous BSR. The UE may transmit a MAC BSR in the uplink resources identified in an uplink grant to inform the base station about the size of the uplink transmission buffer(s). A UE BSR may be transmitted in an uplink resource identified in a received uplink grant. BSR indicates the amount of data in one or more logical channel buffers. Base station may determine the radio resources required for the UE in the uplink employing the received BSR and other parameters, e.g. link quality, interference, UE category, and/or the like. If the base station determines that radio resources of a first SCell which is uplink unsynchronized is required (the SCell may be in-active or may not be even configured yet), the base station may trigger an sTAG sync process to uplink synchronize the sTAG and the first SCell associated with the sTAG. The SCell should be in configured (e.g. using RRC messages) and be in active state (e.g. using MAC activate commands). An SCell is considered out-of-sync if it belongs to or will belong to (after RRC configuration) to an out-of-sync sTAG.
  • The sTAG sync process may also selectively be started by the base station if a GBR bit rate bearer with required uplink resources has been established. The Base station may determine the radio resources required for the UE in the uplink employing the received bit rate, QoS and priority requirements of the GBR bearer and other parameters, e.g. link quality, interference, UE category, and/or the like. If the base station determines that radio resources of a first SCell which is uplink unsynchronized is required (the SCell may be in-active or may not be even configured yet), the base station may trigger an sTAG sync process to uplink synchronize the sTAG and the first SCell associated with the sTAG. The SCell should be in configured (e.g. using RRC messages) and be in active state (e.g. using MAC activate commands) before uplink transmission starts.
  • eNB may select to synchronize the sTAG and then activate/configure the SCell. eNB may select to first configure/activate SCell and then to uplink synchronize it. For example, if an SCell is added and assigned to a synchronized sTAG, it will be synchronize upon its (re)configuration/addition. In another example, the SCell may be configured, then the sTAG may be synchronized using another SCell in the sTAG, and then the SCell may be activated. In another example, the SCell may be configured/activated, and then sTAG synchronization may start. Different embodiments with different orders in tasks may be implemented. Random access process for an SCell can only be initiated on configured and active SCells assigned to an sTAG.
  • In an example embodiment, in the sTAG sync process the base station may trigger random access preamble transmission on an SCell of the sTAG that the SCell belongs, or on the first SCell in which its uplink resources are required. In this example, the first SCell belongs to an sTAG which is uplink out-of-sync. In response to receiving a BSR and/or GBR bearer establishment, the eNB may, selectively and depending on a plurality of criteria, transmit a PDCCH order to the UE and may cause the UE to start a RA procedure on an SCell in the sTAG (in case of carrier aggregation). A PDCCH order may be triggered by the BSR reception due to the UL data arrival in the UE or by the establishment of GBR bearer with uplink resource requirements. Preamble transmission may be triggered in the case of UL data arrival, meaning that preamble transmission may be triggered by the BSR reception in the eNB and/or establishment of a non GBR bearer with uplink data. Upon new UL data arrival, the UE may not trigger an RA procedure on an SCell. The eNB may, selectively, trigger the RA procedure based on the BSR reception due to UL data arrival in the UE. eNB may consider many parameters in triggering an RA on an SCell. For example, parameters may include current eNB load, UE buffer size(s) in BSR report(s), UE category, UE capability, QoS requirements, GBR bearer requirements and/or the like. UE may determine that radio resources of the out-of-sync SCell may be required for uplink data transmission.
  • In a second embodiment, in the sTAG sync process base station may transmit a MAC timing advance command with a TAG index of the out-of-sync sTAG. The UE may use an stored value of N_TA for the out of sync sTAG and apply the timing advance value in the MAC timing advance command to the stored N_TA of the sTAG. A UE may store or maintains N_TA (current timing advance value of an sTAG) upon expiry of associated time Alignment Timer of the sTAG. The UE may apply the received timing advance command MAC control element and starts associated time Alignment Timer. This process may practically put the sTAG in an in-sync state. The base station may transmit one or more MAC timing advance commands upon receiving uplink packets from the UE on the sTAG to align UE uplink transmissions in the sTAG. It is up to eNB to select the first or second embodiment for synchronizing the uplink of first SCell. For example, the eNB may operate in the second embodiment, if the SCell has not been in-sync for a long time, or the sTAG has not been in-Sync since it has been configured. In another example, the eNB may operate in the first embodiment if the sTAG has recently entered an out-of-sync state. In another example, the eNB may operate in the second embodiment if the eNB-UE distance is relatively short, for example in the range of tens or hundreds of meters.
  • The mapping of a serving cell to a TAG may be configured by the serving eNB with RRC signaling. The mechanism for TAG configuration and reconfiguration may be based on RRC signalling. When needed, the mapping between an SCell and a TA group may be reconfigured with RRC signaling. In an example implementation, the mapping between an SCell and a TAG may not be reconfigured with RRC while the SCell is configured. For example if there is a need to move an SCell from an sTAG to a pTAG, at least one RRC message, for example, at least one RRC reconfiguration message, may be send to the UE to reconfigure TAG configurations. The PCell may not change its TA group and may always be a member of the pTAG.
  • According to some of the various aspects of embodiments, when an eNB performs SCell addition configuration, the related TAG configuration may be configured for the SCell. In an example embodiment, eNB may modify the TAG configuration of an SCell by removing (releasing) the SCell and adding a new SCell (with the same physical cell ID and frequency) with an updated TAG ID. The new SCell with the updated TAG ID may be initially inactive subsequent to joining the updated TAG ID. eNB may activate the updated new SCell and then start scheduling packets on the activated SCell. In an example implementation, it may not be possible to change the TAG associated with an SCell, but rather, the SCell may need to be removed and a new SCell may need to be added with another TAG. This may not require employing mobilityControlInfo in the RRC reconfiguration message.
  • An eNB may perform initial configuration based on initial configuration parameters received from a network node (for example a management platform), an initial eNB configuration, a UE location, a UE type, UE CSI feedback, UE uplink transmissions (for example, data, SRS, and/or the like), a combination of the above, and/or the like. For example, initial configuration may be based on UE channel state measurements. For example, depending on the signal strength received from a UE on various SCells downlink carrier or by determination of UE being in a repeater coverage area, or a combination of both, an eNB may determine the initial configuration of sTAGs and membership of SCells to sTAGs.
  • In an example implementation, the TA value of a serving cell may change, for example due to UE's mobility from a macro-cell to a repeater or an RRH (remote radio head) coverage area. The signal delay for that SCell may become different from the original value and different from other serving cells in the same TAG. In this scenario, eNB may relocate this TA-changed serving cell to another existing TAG. Or alternatively, the eNB may create a new TAG for the SCell based on the updated TA value. The TA value may be derived, for example, through eNB measurement(s) of signal reception timing, a RA mechanism, or other standard or proprietary processes. An eNB may realize that the TA value of a serving cell is no longer consistent with its current TAG. There may be many other scenarios which require eNB to reconfigure TAGs. During reconfiguration, the eNB may need to move the reference SCell belonging to an sTAG to another TAG. In this scenario, the sTAG would require a new reference SCell. In an example embodiment, the UE may select an active SCell in the sTAG as the reference timing SCell.
  • eNB may consider UE's capability in configuring multiple TAGs for a UE. UE may be configured with a configuration that is compatible with UE capability. Multiple TAG capability may be an optional feature and per band combination Multiple TAG capability may be introduced. UE may transmit its multiple TAG capability to eNB via an RRC message and eNB may consider UE capability in configuring TAG configuration(s).
  • The purpose of an RRC connection reconfiguration procedure may be to modify an RRC connection, (e.g. to establish, modify and/or release RBs, to perform handover, to setup, modify, and/or release measurements, to add, modify, and/or release SCells). As part of the procedure, NAS dedicated information may be transferred from E-UTRAN to the UE. If the received RRC Connection Reconfiguration message includes the sCellToReleaseList, the UE may perform an SCell release. If the received RRC Connection Reconfiguration message includes the sCellToAddModList, the UE may perform SCell additions or modification.
  • When a UE receives an sCellToAddModList in an RRC reconfiguration message, the UE may process the content of the message. The UE may, for an sCellIndex value included in the sCellToAddModList that is not part of the current UE configuration (SCell addition), add the SCell corresponding to the celldentification in accordance with the received radioResourceConfigCommonSCell (SCell common configuration parameters) and radioResourceConfigDedicatedSCell (SCell dedicated configuration parameters). The UE may configure lower layers to consider the SCell to be in a deactivated state. The UE may, for a sCellIndex value included in the sCellToAddModList that is part of the current UE configuration (SCell modification), modify the SCell configuration in accordance with the received radioResourceConfigDedicatedSCell.
  • According to some of the various aspects of embodiments, common parameters may comprise downlink common parameters and uplink common parameters. Examples of downlink common parameters include: downlink bandwidth, antennaInfoCommon, mbsfn-SubframeConfigList, phich-Config, pdsch-ConfigCommon, and tdd-Config. Examples of uplink common parameters include: ul-CarrierFreq, ul-Bandwidth, p-Max, uplinkPowerControlCommonSCell, soundingRS-UL-ConfigCommon, ul-CyclicPrefixLength, prach-ConfigSCell (TDD), and pusch-ConfigCommon. Dedicated parameters may comprise downlink dedicated parameters and uplink dedicated parameters. Examples of downlink dedicated parameters include AntennaInfoDedicated, CrossCarrierSchedulingConfig, csi-RS-Config, pdsch-ConfigDedicated. Examples of uplink dedicated parameters include antennaInfoUL, pusch-ConfigDedicatedSCell, uplinkPowerControlDedicatedSCell, cqi-ReportConfigSCell, soundingRS-UL-ConfigDedicated, soundingRS-UL-ConfigDedicated, soundingRS-UL-ConfigDedicatedAperiodic, and pathlossReferenceLinking. The names of these variables and example definition(s) and format for these variables may be found in releases of LTE RRC standard documentation.
  • In an example embodiment, SCell TAG configuration(s) (e.g. TAG ID assignment) may be included in sCellToAddModList or one of the IEs in sCellToAddModList. A TAG ID may be included in the TAG configuration of a cell. The TA group may be configured when an SCell is added. Thus the configuration of a TA group may be seen as part of the SCell addition/modification. A dedicated parameter in SCell dedicated parameters may include the TAG ID of the SCell if the SCell belongs to an sTAG. If a dedicated TAG id parameter is not included in dedicated radio resource configuration of an SCell, it may be assumed that the SCell is assigned to the pTAG. This may be an implicit assignment of the SCell to pTAG. According to some of the various aspects of embodiments, some of the TAG configuration parameters may be included in common configuration parameters and some other TAG configuration parameters may be included in dedicated configuration parameters. SCellToAddModList transmitted to a UE may comprise one or more of: an sCell Index, a physical Cell Id, a downlink Carrier Frequency, a radioResourceConfigCommonSCell, and a radioResourceConfigDedicatedSCell. radioResourceConfigDedicatedSCell IE in sCellToAddModList transmitted to a UE (in RRC message(s)) may comprise the TAG ID that the SCell belongs to. A TA group configuration may be UE-specific (a dedicated configuration parameter). The identity or index of a TA group which an SCell belongs to, a TA group identity (TAG ID), may be assigned to a SCell employing an dedicated parameter in radioResourceConfigDedicatedSCell. When an SCell is released, the TAG assignment of the SCell may also be released. eNB may not be needed to include TAG ID in sCellToReleaseList. Each Cell may be assigned a TAG ID (implicitly or explicitly). If an SCell is not assigned a TAG ID, the SCell may be considered belonging to the pTAG by default. Implicit assignment of SCells to pTAG may reduce the signaling overhead. It is expected that in many operating scenarios, sTAGs are not configured, and therefore transmission of pTAG index for the configured SCells is avoided. This may increase spectral efficiency and would reduce signaling overhead.
  • A TAG ID may be UE specific, and each UE may have its own TAG configuration. For example, a given SCell may be a part of the pTAG in one UE and a part of an sTAG in another UE. In this embodiment, the SCell configuration may include TAG Index. Assignment of an SCell to an sTAG may be UE specific, and may be different for different UEs connected to the same eNB. For example, a UE in the coverage of a repeater connected to the eNB may have a different sTAG configuration than a UE which is directly connected to the same eNB.
  • According to some of the various aspects of embodiments, MAC-Config-Dedicated parameter in an RRC connection reconfiguration message may include a dedicated TAT parameter for each of the time alignment groups configured in the UE. In this example embodiment, a TAT may be included in MAC Dedicated parameters. If TAT for an sTAG is received in MAC-Dedicated parameters, the UE may consider the dedicated parameter. For an SCell in an sTAG, the UE may not consider time alignment timer in the SIB parameter received from an eNB, instead the UE may consider the time alignment configuration parameter in the MAC-Dedicated parameters. Different UEs may be required to be configured with different TAT values in an optimized network operation. UE TAT value may be optimized depending on eNB-UE distance, UE speed, UE category, and/or the like. Therefore, it is not recommended to use a common variable for time alignment timer of secondary cell groups.
  • The TA maintenance for PCell may follow Rel-10 principles. If an SCell applying the TA of PCell is added, the Rel-10 procedures may be reused. In one example embodiment, there is no need to explicitly assign a TAG ID for cells in the pTAG. SCells configured with the pTAG may be grouped implicitly and a TAG ID for pTAG may not be needed or a TAG ID may be assigned implicitly by default (for example, TAGID: 0). TAG identity may be regarded as zero if the TAG identity field is absent in SCell dedicated parameters upon SCell addition. If an SCell is not configured with a TAG ID, it may apply that the SCell belongs to the pTAG.
  • According to some of the various aspects of embodiments, sTAG configurations may be released upon re-establishment or handover. TAG related configuration may include TAG ID, TAG-specific TAT, and/or the serving cells associated with it. In an example embodiment MAC dedicated parameters IE may include a TAG configuration information element comprising a sequence of one or more TAG ID and TAT for configured TAGs. In an example embodiment the TAG configuration information element may also comprise the list of SCells belonging to the TAG. The association between SCells with TAG IDs may be included in SCell configuration IE parameters, or may be included in TAG configuration information element.
  • The parameters related to SCell random access channel may be common to all UEs. For example PRACH configuration (RACH resources, configuration parameters, RAR window) for the SCell may be common to all UEs. RACH resource parameters may include prach-configuration index, and/or prach-frequency offset. SCell RACH common configuration parameters may also include power: power ramping parameter(s) for preamble transmission; and max number of preamble transmission parameter. It is more efficient to use common parameters for RACH configuration, since different UEs will share the same random access channel. Using dedicated parameters for SCell RACH configuration is not preferred since it will increase the size of the radio resources required for random access process, and may reduce spectral efficiency.
  • In an example implementation, TAT of an sTAG may not be running when the last SCell of the group is removed from the TA group. The eNB may remove sTAG when removing the last SCell from the sTAG. When sTAG is removed the TAT for sTAG may be stopped and the NTA value may be discarded. According to some of the various aspects of embodiments, sTAG TAT configuration may be released when no SCell is configured in the sTAG. When sTAG is released, then TAT is also released/de-configured (e.g. this may be achieved by de-configuring the timer). Upon sTAG depletion, the TAT may be de-configured by the eNB, which may implicitly stop the TAT of this group at the same time. If an sTAG is empty, the same RRC message may remove the sTAG and TAT and a removed sTAG may be released/de-configured. In another example embodiment, TAT may be stopped but a TAT entity may be maintained.
  • eNB may transmit at least one RRC message to configure PCell, SCell(s) and RACH, and TAG configuration parameters. MAC-MainConfig may include a timeAlignmentTimerDedicated IE to indicate time alignment timer value for the pTAG. MAC-MainConfig may further include an IE including a sequence of at least one (sTAG ID, and TAT value) to configure time alignment timer values for sTAGs. In an example, a first RRC message may configure TAT value for pTAG, a second RRC message may configure TAT value for sTAG1, and a third RRC message may configure TAT value for sTAG2. There is no need to include all the TAT configurations in a single RRC message. The IE including a sequence of at least one (sTAG ID, and TAT) value may also be used to update the TAT value of an existing sTAG to an updated TAT value. The at least one RRC message may also include sCellToAddModList including at least one SCell configuration parameters. The radioResourceConfigDedicatedSCell (dedicated radio configuration IEs) in sCellToAddModList may include an SCell MAC configuration comprising TAG ID for the corresponding SCell added or modified. The radioResourceConfigDedicatedSCell may also include pathloss reference configuration for an SCell. If TAG ID is not included in SCell configuration, the SCell is assigned to the pTAG. In other word, a TAG ID may not be included in radioResourceConfigDedicatedSCell for SCells assigned to pTAG. The radioResourceConfigCommonSCell (common radio configuration IEs) in sCellToAddModList may include RACH resource configuration parameters, preamble transmission power control parameters, and other preamble transmission parameter(s). At the least one RRC message configures PCell, SCell, RACH resources, and/or SRS transmissions and may assign each SCell to an sTAG (implicitly or explicitly). PCell is always assigned to the pTAG.
  • The pathloss reference IE (pathlossReferenceLinking) in radioResourceConfigDedicatedSCell may indicate whether the UE shall apply as pathloss reference either: the downlink of the PCell, or of the SIB2 downlink of the SCell that corresponds with the configured uplink. For SCells part of a secondary TAG eNB may only configure the pathloss reference to SIB2 downlink of the SCell that corresponds with the configured uplink. If a serving cell belongs to a TAG containing the primary cell then, for the uplink of the primary cell, the primary cell is used as the reference serving cell for determining reference Signal Power. For the uplink of the secondary cell, the serving cell configured by the RRC parameter pathloss Reference Linking IE is used as the reference serving cell for determining reference signal power. If a serving cell belongs to an sTAG then the serving cell is used as the reference serving cell for determining reference signal power.
  • According to some of the various aspects of embodiments, a base station may transmit at least one control message to a wireless device in a plurality of wireless devices. The at least one control message is for example, RRC connection reconfiguration message, RRC connection establishment message, RRC connection re-establishment message, and/or other control messages configuring or reconfiguring radio interface, and/or the like. The at least one control message may be configured to cause, in the wireless device, configuration of at least:
  • a) a plurality of cells. Each cell may comprise a downlink carrier and zero or one uplink carrier. The configuration may assign a cell group index to a cell in the plurality of cells. The cell group index may identify one of a plurality of cell groups. A cell group in the plurality of cell groups may comprise a subset of the plurality of cells. The subset may comprise a reference cell with a reference downlink carrier and a reference uplink carrier. Uplink transmissions by the wireless device in the cell group may employ a synchronization signal transmitted on the reference downlink carrier as timing reference.
  • b) a plurality of MAC dedicated parameters comprising a sequence of at least one element. An element in the sequence may comprises a time alignment timer value and a secondary time alignment group index. pTAG time alignment timer value may be included as a dedicated IE in MAC main configuration parameter (a dedicated IE). Each time alignment timer value being selected, by the base station, from a finite set of predetermined values. The time alignment timer value in the sequence may be associated with a cell group index that is specified in the same element. In an example embodiment, the element may also comprise the list of cell indexes associated with the time alignment group index.
  • c) a time alignment timer for each cell group in the plurality of cell groups.
  • The base station may transmit a plurality of timing advance commands. Each timing advance command may comprise: a time adjustment value, and a cell group index. A time alignment timer may start or may restart when the wireless device receives a timing advance command to adjust uplink transmission timing on a cell group identified by the cell group index. The cell group may be considered out-of-sync, by the wireless device, when the associated time alignment timer expires or is not running. The cell group may be considered in-sync when the associated time alignment timer is running.
  • The timing advance command may causes substantial alignment of reception timing of uplink signals in frames and subframes of all activated uplink carriers in the cell group at the base station. The time alignment timer value may be configured as one of a finite set of predetermined values. For example, the finite set of predetermined values may be eight. Each time alignment timer value may be encoded employing three bits. TAG TAT may be a dedicated time alignment timer value and is transmitted by the base station to the wireless device. TAG TAT may be configured to cause configuration of time alignment timer value for each time alignment group. The IE TAG TAT may be used to control how long the UE is considered uplink time aligned. It corresponds to the timer for time alignment for each cell group. Its value may be in number of sub-frames. For example, value sf500 corresponds to 500 sub-frames, sf750 corresponds to 750 sub-frames and so on. An uplink time alignment is common for all serving cells belonging to the same cell group. In an example embodiment, the IE TAG TAT may be defined as: TAG TAT::=SEQUENCE{TAG ID, ENUMERATED {sf500, sf750, sf1280, sf1920, sf2560, sf5120, sf10240, infinity}. Time alignment timer for pTAG may be indicated in a separate IE and may not be included in the sequence.
  • In an example, TimeAlignmentTimerDedicated IE may be sf500, and then TAG TAT may be {1, sf500; 2, sf2560; 3, sf500}. In the example, time alignment timer for the pTAG is configured separately and is not included in the sequence. In the examples, TAG0 (pTAG) time alignment timer value is 500 subframes (500 m-sec), TAG1 (sTAG) time alignment timer value is 500 subframes, TAG2 time alignment timer value is 2560 subframes, and TAG3 time alignment timer value is 500 subframes. This is for example purposes only. In this example a TAG may take one of 8 predefined values. In a different embodiment, the enumerated values could take other values. The size of the sequence is 3 in the first example and 4 in the second example. In another example embodiment, the size could be 2, 3, equal to the size of configured TAGs in the wireless device, and/or the like.
  • FIG. 9 is an example physical random access channel (PRACH) configuration in a primary TAG (pTAG) and a secondary TAG (sTAG) as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present invention. As shown in the example, PRACH resources are configured for the PCell in pTAG and SCell2 and SCell3 in sTAG. SCell1 and SCell4 are not configured with PRACH resources. This is an example and other configurations are also possible. In an example embodiment, no SCell in pTAG is configured with PRACH resources. In another example embodiment, PRACH resources for an SCell in pTAG may be configured, but eNB is not configured to trigger a preamble transmission on PRACH resources of an SCell in pTAG. Basically, PRACH resources in SCells in pTAG cannot be used for preamble transmissions by a UE.
  • According to some of the various aspects of embodiments, a UE may select one active SCell DL in a secondary TAG as the DL timing reference cell for the secondary TAG. This may reduce signalling overhead or complexity of implementation and/or increase efficiency. For a UE, an sTAG may have one timing reference cell at a given time. In an example embodiment, the active SCell with the highest signal quality may be selected as the timing reference SCell by the UE. In another example embodiment, DL timing reference cell for an sTAG may be the SCell DL SIB2-finked with the SCell UL where RACH was performed. For preamble transmission, the SIB2 linked DL of the cell which the preamble is sent may be used as DL timing reference. In an example embodiment, UE may autonomously select a downlink carrier in an active cell in the sTAG as the reference SCell. When TA command is received in RAR or MAC CE, the UE may apply the TA value to current UL timing of the corresponding TAG.
  • One timing reference SCell may be employed in an sTAG, the timing alignment value in RAR (random access response) or TAC (time alignment command) may be applied to all active SCell(s) in the same sTAG. Thus, the UE may select the most suitable SCell for timing reference depending on different circumstances. For example, the SCell which has a better signal quality may be selected as timing reference cell, since better signal quality may provide a more reliable performance and thus reduce the need of re-configuring the timing reference cell. Channel quality of an SCell in an sTAG may be considered for initial SCell timing reference and for reselecting timing reference cell. UE may change the timing reference when it is necessary.
  • In an example embodiment, the SCell served as the timing reference cell in sTAG may be deactivated in some cases. For a UE, eNB may keep a state of an SCell as active or inactive. In a UE, when an SCell is inactive, the UE may switch off some parts of the receiver and/or transmitter corresponding to the SCell. This act may reduce battery power consumption in the UE. In another example embodiment, the reference SCell in an sTAG may be released by the serving eNB. The timing reference cell may be changed to another active SCell in the sTAG for maintaining UL timing alignment for SCells in the same sTAG. Change of timing reference cell in an sTAG may be supported. The reference cell may also be changed for other reasons such as coverage quality, PRACH failure, Reference SCell release, subscriber mobility, a combination of the above, and/or the like. These scenarios may apply to cases where time alignment is running. If the time alignment is not running and the sTAG is not time aligned, then there is no uplink synchronization and UE may not use any reference SCell for uplink synchronization. In an example embodiment, the UE may autonomously change the timing reference SCell to another active SCell in the sTAG without informing the serving base station. The UE may not inform the base station about a change in the reference SCell, this process avoids additional signaling from a UE to the eNB and may increase radio resource efficiency. This process optimizes reference cell selection by the UE so that the UE can select a suitable SCell as the reference, without adding complexity in the network and without introducing additional signaling overhead.
  • According to some of the various aspects of embodiments, UE may autonomously select another reference SCell when the reference SCell becomes deactivated. Since the timing reference is used to derive the UL transmission timing at the UE, there is a need for the UE to select a downlink SCell as the timing reference. The UE may autonomously reselect another activated SCell in the sTAG as the reference when needed. Timing reference for uplink transmission on SCell may be reselected to the DL timing of any activated SCell of the same sTAG when needed. Any activated SCell in the sTAG may be chosen by the UE autonomously as the timing reference for this sTAG. For example, initially downlink SCell in which RA is transmitted may be used as a timing reference and then the UE may use another SCell as the timing reference, when the reference SCell needs to be changed.
  • FIG. 10 is an example flow diagram illustrating timing reference change as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present invention. At 1000, a wireless device may receive control message(s) from a base station. The control message(s) may cause in the wireless device configuration of a plurality of cells. The plurality of cells may comprise a primary cell and a plurality of secondary cells.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, the control message(s) may also cause in the wireless device configuration of a deactivation timer for each secondary cell in plurality of secondary cells. The deactivation timer may correspond to a secondary cell restarting in response to a packet transmission on the secondary cell. An RRC message may comprise MAC main configuration parameter comprising a deactivation timer value. The activation timer value may be applicable to deactivation timers of each of the secondary cells. The corresponding secondary cell may be deactivated in the wireless device in response to the deactivation timer expiring. The deactivation timer may correspond to secondary cell restarts in response to receiving an activation command for the secondary cell.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, the control message(s) may also cause in the wireless device assignment of each of the plurality of secondary cells to a cell group in a plurality of cell groups. The plurality of cell groups may comprise a primary cell group and a secondary cell group. The primary cell group may comprise a first subset of the plurality of cells. The first subset may comprise the primary cell. Uplink transmissions by the wireless device in the primary cell group may employ a first synchronization signal transmitted on the primary cell as a primary timing reference. The secondary cell group may comprise a second subset of the plurality of secondary cells. The second subset may comprise a reference secondary cell.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, the control message(s) may comprise a plurality of media access control dedicated parameters comprising a deactivation timer value. The deactivation timer value may be employed for each of the deactivation timers for the plurality of secondary cells.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, first uplink signals in the secondary cell group may be transmitted by the wireless device at 1002. The transmission may employ a synchronization signal on the reference secondary cell as a secondary timing reference. The reference secondary cell may be an activated cell in the secondary cell group.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, at 1007, the wireless device may autonomously select a new activated secondary cell in the secondary cell group as the secondary timing reference if the reference secondary cell is deactivated in the wireless device; and at least one secondary cell in the secondary cell group is active in the wireless device. The autonomous selection may be performed by the wireless device without the wireless device informing the base station.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, second uplink signals may be transmitted in the secondary cell group by the wireless device at 1009. The transmission may employ a second synchronization signal on the new activated secondary cell as the secondary timing reference.
  • The wireless device may receive a control command configured to cause transmission of a random access preamble on random access resources of the reference secondary cell in the secondary cell group. The wireless device may receive a random access response on a primary cell in the primary cell group. The random access response may comprise a timing advance command for the secondary cell group. The base station may receive the random access preamble on the random access resources. Transmission timing of the random access preamble may be determined, at least in part, employing the synchronization signal transmitted on the reference secondary cell. The control message(s) may cause configuration of the random access resources.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, the base station may transmit at least one timing advance command to the wireless device. The timing advance command may comprise: a time adjustment value; and an index identifying the secondary cell group. The timing advance command(s) may be configured to cause substantial alignment of reception timing of the uplink signals in frames and subframes of the secondary cell group at the base station.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, the wireless device may be assigned a plurality of media access control dedicated parameters by the configuration. The plurality of media access control dedicated parameters may comprise a plurality of time alignment timer values. Each of the plurality of time alignment timer values may be associated with a unique cell group in the wireless device.
  • Embodiments may vary. For example, according to some of the various embodiments, the control message(s) may cause in said wireless device assignment of each of the plurality of secondary cells to a cell group in a plurality of cell groups. The plurality of cell groups may comprise a secondary cell group comprising a subset of the plurality of secondary cells. The control message(s) may comprises at least one cell add-modify information element. Each of the cell add-modify information element(s) may comprise a first plurality of dedicated parameters in the plurality of dedicated parameters. The first plurality of dedicated parameters may comprise a first cell index for a first secondary cell in the secondary cell(s).
  • According to some of the various embodiments, the control message(s) may be configured to further cause in the wireless device configuration of a time alignment timer for each of the plurality of cell groups. The time alignment timer may start or restart in response to the wireless device receiving a timing advance command to adjust uplink transmission timing of a commanded cell group in the plurality of cell groups.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, the wireless device may transmit first uplink signals in the secondary cell group at 1002 employing a synchronization signal on a reference secondary cell in the secondary cell group as a timing reference. The reference secondary cell may be an activated cell in the secondary cell group.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, the wireless device may autonomously select a new activated secondary cell in the secondary cell group as the timing reference at 1007 if the reference secondary cell is deactivated in the wireless device; and at least one secondary cell in the secondary cell group is active in the wireless device. The selection may be performed autonomously by the wireless device without the wireless device informing the base station. According to some of the various embodiments, the wireless device may not monitor the reference secondary cell when the reference secondary cell is deactivated.
  • At 1009, the wireless device may transmit second uplink signals in the secondary cell group employing a third synchronization signal on the new activated secondary cell as the timing reference. The wireless device may transmit second uplink signals in the secondary cell group employing a third synchronization signal on the new activated secondary cell as the timing reference
  • According to some of the various embodiments, an activation command may be received causing activation of the new secondary cell in the wireless device.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, the base station may comprise communication interface(s), processor(s), and memory. The memory may store instructions. The processor(s) may execute the instructions to cause actions described herein.
  • At 1000, a wireless device may receive control message(s) from a base station. The control message(s) may cause in the wireless device configuration of a plurality of cells. The plurality of cells may comprise a primary cell and a plurality of secondary cells.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, the control message(s) may also cause in the wireless device assignment of each of the plurality of secondary cells to a cell group in a plurality of cell groups. The plurality of cell groups may comprise a primary cell group and a secondary cell group. The primary cell group may comprise a first subset of the plurality of cells. The first subset may comprise the primary cell. Uplink transmissions by the wireless device in the primary cell group may employ a first synchronization signal transmitted on the primary cell as a primary timing reference. The secondary cell group may comprise a second subset of the plurality of secondary cells. The second subset may comprise a reference secondary cell.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, the control message(s) may comprises a plurality of media access control dedicated parameters comprising a deactivation timer value. The deactivation timer value may be employed for each of the deactivation timers for the plurality of secondary cells. The control message(s) may cause configuration of the random access resources. The control message(s) may be configured to modify a radio bearer.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, first uplink signals in the secondary cell group may be transmitted by the wireless device at 1002. The transmission may employ a synchronization signal on the reference secondary cell as a secondary timing reference. The reference secondary cell may be an activated cell in the secondary cell group.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, at 1007, the wireless device may autonomously select (without the wireless device informing the base station) a new activated secondary cell in the secondary cell group as the secondary timing reference. The new activated secondary cell may be different from the reference secondary cell.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, at 1009, second uplink signals may be transmitted in the secondary cell group by the wireless device employing a third synchronization signal on the new activated secondary cell as the secondary timing reference.
  • A deactivation timer corresponding to the secondary cell may restart in response to receiving an activation command for the secondary cell.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, a wireless device may receive control message(s) from a base station. The control message(s) may cause in the wireless device configuration of: a plurality of cells comprising a primary cell and a plurality of secondary cells; and a cell group index for a secondary cell in the plurality of cells. The cell group index may identify one of a plurality of cell groups. The plurality of cell groups may comprise a secondary cell group. The secondary cell group may comprise a subset of the plurality of secondary cells. First uplink signals may be transmitted in the secondary cell group by the wireless device employing a first synchronization signal on a reference secondary cell in the secondary cell group as a timing reference. The reference secondary cell may be an activated cell in the secondary cell group. The wireless device may autonomously select (without the wireless device informing the base station) a new activated secondary cell in the secondary cell group as the timing reference. The new activated secondary cell may be different from the reference secondary cell. Second uplink signals may be transmitting in the secondary cell group by the wireless device employing a second synchronization signal on the new activated secondary cell as the timing reference.
  • According to some of the various aspects of embodiments, if the UE is configured with one or more SCells, the network may activate and deactivate the configured SCells associated with a wireless device (UE). The PCell is always activated when UE is in RRC-Connected mode. The network may activate and deactivate the SCell(s) by sending the Activation/Deactivation MAC control element. Furthermore, a UE and eNB may maintain an SCellDeactivationTimer timer per configured SCell and may deactivate the associated SCell upon its expiry. sCellDeactivationTimer may be configured by RRC. The same initial timer value may apply to instances of the sCellDeactivationTimer for SCells. The configured SCells may be initially deactivated upon addition and/or after a handover. With the current sCellDeactivationTimer, SCell may be deactivated during the PRACH process. Transmission of uplink preamble on a deactivated SCell may increase battery power consumption and UE complexity. If preamble is transmitted on a deactivated SCell, UE may need to turn on processing related to uplink transmission of the SCell. UE may not transmit data on a deactivated SCell and transmission of preamble may require special processing in the UE and may complicate UE implementation. To address this issue, if the SCell is deactivated during an ongoing RA process on the SCell, for example because SCell deactivation timer expires, the ongoing random access process on the SCell may be aborted. When an SCell is deactivated, the UE may stop all uplink transmissions (for the SCell) including uplink preamble. UE may not transmit any uplink preamble when the SCell is deactivated. eNB may avoid or reduce the probability of such a scenario, by keeping the corresponding SCell activated during random access process. For example, eNB can explicitly activate the SCell before the random access process starts. An eNB may initiate a random access process when there is enough time for performing the entire random access process. UE may start the random access process on an activated SCell. But if the SCell deactivation timer (of the SCell that is used for preamble transmission) expires during the random access process, the UE may deactivate the SCell and may abort the random access process and may not transmit a preamble in the uplink. This process may prevent a situation in which the UE may send uplink signals on a deactivated SCell. If an SCell in a UE is deactivated after a preamble transmission on the SCell and before receiving a random access response corresponding to the preamble transmission, the UE may abort the random access process. A random access process on an SCell is initiated in a UE when the UE received a PDCCH order to transmit a preamble on the SCell. The random access process is considered successfully completed when the UE successfully decodes a corresponding RAR. If the SCell is deactivated after the random access process is initiated and before the random access process is completed, then the UE may abort the random access process.
  • According to some of the various aspects of embodiments, sCellDeactivationTimer may be maintained in a way to reduce SCell deactivation during the RA process. The UE may for a TTI and for a configured SCell, if the UE receives an Activation/Deactivation MAC control element in this TTI activating the SCell, the UE may in the TTI according to a predefined timing activate the SCell and start or restart the sCellDeactivationTimer associated with the SCell. Activating an SCell may imply applying normal SCell operation including: SRS transmissions on the SCell (if the SCell is in sync), CQI/PMI/RI/PTI reporting for the SCell, PDCCH monitoring on the SCell, PDCCH monitoring for the SCell. If the UE receives an Activation/Deactivation MAC control element in this TTI deactivating the SCell, or if the sCellDeactivationTimer associated with the activated SCell expires in this TTI, in the TTI according to a predefined timing: deactivate the SCell, stop the sCellDeactivationTimer associated with the SCell, flush all HARQ buffers associated with the SCell.
  • If PDCCH on the activated SCell indicates an uplink grant or downlink assignment, or if PDCCH on the Serving Cell scheduling the activated SCell indicates an uplink grant or a downlink assignment for the activated SCell, the UE may restart the sCellDeactivationTimer associated with the SCell. If the SCell is deactivated, the UE may: not transmit SRS on the SCell, not report CQI/PMI/RI/PTI for the SCell, not transmit on UL-SCH on the SCell, not monitor the PDCCH on the SCell, not monitor the PDCCH for the SCell, and/or not to transmit uplink preamble on the SCell.
  • In an example embodiment, an SCell deactivation timer of the SCell may be restarted when the UE receives a PDCCH order to transmit uplink preamble on the SCell. The SCell deactivation timer of the Cell carrying PDCCH order may also be restarted in cross carrier scheduling configuration. In an example implementation, an SCell deactivation timer of the SCell may be restarted when the UE transmits a random access preamble on the uplink the SCell.
  • FIG. 11 is an example flow diagram illustrating an unsuccessful random access process as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present invention. According to some of the various embodiments, a wireless device may receive control message(s) from base station at 1100. The control message(s) may cause in the wireless device configuration of a plurality of cells comprising a primary cell and at least one secondary cell. The control message(s) may cause in the wireless device configuration of a deactivation timer for each secondary cell in the secondary cell(s). The deactivation timer may correspond to a secondary cell restarting in response to a packet transmission on the secondary cell. The corresponding secondary cell may be deactivated in the wireless device in response to the deactivation timer expiring. The deactivation timer associated with the secondary cell may be restarted by the wireless device if a random access response with an uplink grant for transmission on the secondary cell is received by the wireless device from the base station. In an example embodiment, the deactivation timer associated with the secondary cell may be restarted in response to the wireless device receiving the control command. The deactivation timer associated with a cell carrying the control command may be restarted if the cell is one of secondary cell(s). In an example implementation, the deactivation timer may be restarted in the wireless device when the wireless device transmits an uplink preamble.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, the control message(s) may cause in the wireless device assignment of each of the secondary cell(s) to a cell group in a plurality of cell groups. The plurality of cell groups may comprise a primary cell group and a secondary cell group. The primary cell group may comprise a first subset of the plurality of cells. The first subset may comprise the primary cell. Uplink transmissions by the wireless device in the primary cell group may employ a first synchronization signal transmitted on the primary cell as a primary timing reference. The secondary cell group may comprise a second subset of the secondary cell(s).
  • According to some of the various embodiments, the control message(s) may cause in the wireless device configuration of a time alignment timer for the secondary cell group. The time alignment timer may start or restart in response to the wireless device receiving a timing advance command to adjust uplink transmission timing on the secondary cell group.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, the wireless device may receive a control command (also called PDDCH order) initiating a random access process for a secondary cell in the secondary cell group in the wireless device at 1102. The control command may comprise a mask index and the random access preamble identifier.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, the wireless device may transmit a random access preamble on random access resources of the secondary cell in response to receiving the control command at 1107.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, at 1109, the wireless device may abort the random access process on the secondary cell if the secondary cell is deactivated before the wireless device receives a random access response for the random access preamble transmission. A downlink control channel of the primary cell for the random access response may be monitored after the random access preamble is transmitted. The random access response may comprise an identifier of the random access preamble. The random access response may be transmitted on the primary cell. The random access response may comprise a timing advance command for the secondary cell group.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, the wireless device may comprise communication interface(s), processor(s), and memory. The memory may store instructions. The processor(s) may execute the instructions to cause actions described herein.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, the wireless device may receive at least control message(s) from a base station at 1100. The control message(s) may cause in the wireless device configuration of a plurality of cells comprising a primary cell and at least one secondary cell.
  • The control message(s) may cause in the wireless device configuration of a deactivation timer for each secondary cell in the at least one secondary cell, the deactivation timer may correspond to a secondary cell restarting in response to a packet transmission on the secondary cell. The corresponding secondary cell may be deactivated in the wireless device in response to the deactivation timer expiring.
  • The control message(s) may cause in the wireless device assignment of each of the secondary cell(s) to a cell group in a plurality of cell groups. The plurality of cell groups may comprise a secondary cell group. The secondary cell group may comprise a second subset of the secondary cell(s).
  • The control message(s) may cause in the wireless device configuration of a time alignment timer for the secondary cell group. The time alignment timer may start or restart in response to the wireless device receiving a timing advance command to adjust uplink transmission timing on the secondary cell group.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, the wireless device may receive a control command initiating a random access process for a secondary cell in the secondary cell group in the wireless device at 1102. The control command may comprise a mask index and the random access preamble identifier.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, the wireless device may transmit a random access preamble on random access resources of the secondary cell in response to receiving the control command at 1107. The wireless device may monitor a downlink control channel of the primary cell for the random access response after transmitting the random access preamble. The wireless device may receive a random access response on the primary cell. The random access response may comprise a timing advance command for the secondary cell group. The random access response may comprise an identifier of the random access preamble.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, at 1109, the wireless device may abort the random access process on the secondary cell if the secondary cell is deactivated before the wireless device receives, on the primary cell, a random access response for the random access preamble transmission.
  • FIG. 12 is an example flow diagram illustrating an unsuccessful random access process as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present invention. A base station may transmit control message(s) to a wireless device at 1200. The control message(s) may be configured to cause in the wireless device configuration of a plurality of cells comprising a primary cell and at least one secondary cell.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, control message(s) may be configured to cause in the wireless device configuration of a deactivation timer for each secondary cell in secondary cell(s). The deactivation timer may correspond to a secondary cell restarting in response to a packet transmission on the secondary cell. The corresponding secondary cell may be deactivated in the wireless device in response to the deactivation timer expiring.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, control message(s) may be configured to cause in the wireless device assignment of each of the secondary cell(s) to a cell group in a plurality of cell groups. The plurality of cell groups may comprise a secondary cell group. The secondary cell group may comprise a second subset of the secondary cell(s).
  • According to some of the various embodiments, control message(s) may comprise a plurality of common parameters for the secondary cell. The plurality of common parameters may comprise a plurality of random access resource parameters identifying the random access resources and a plurality of power control parameters. Control message(s) may comprise a plurality of random access resource parameters. The plurality of random access resource parameters may comprise: an index; a frequency offset; and a plurality of sequence parameters. Control message(s) may comprise a plurality of media access control dedicated parameters comprising a plurality of time alignment timer values. Each time alignment timer value may be associated with a unique cell group in the wireless device.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, the base station may transmit a control command initiating a random access process for a secondary cell in the secondary cell group at 1202. The control command may be configured to cause the wireless device to transmit a random access preamble on random access resources of the secondary cell.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, at 1209, the base station may abort the random access process on the secondary cell if the secondary cell is deactivated before the base station receives the random access preamble on the random access resources.
  • The base station may receive the random access preamble from the wireless device. The base station may transmit a random access response comprising an uplink grant to the wireless device. The base station may abort the random access process if the secondary cell is deactivated before the base station receives an uplink packet from the wireless device in response to the uplink grant.
  • According to some of the various aspects of embodiments, for pTAG, in the case of RACH failure MAC and RRC layers perform certain functions. When the number of RA preamble transmissions reaches preambleTransMax, MAC layer in the UE may indicate Random Access problem to upper layers. UE may or may not continue RACH procedure, i.e. transmit the preamble. When RRC is informed of RACH failure from MAC, if neither T300,T301,T304 nor T311 is running, the RRC layer may trigger reestablishment if AS (access stratum) security has been activated. Otherwise the UE may directly move to RRC_IDLE. The RACH procedure may be stopped and other processes, for example, connection reestablishment, may start. For pTAG, when the number of RA preamble transmissions reaches preambleTransMax, the RACH procedure may be stopped by further RRC procedures. For pTAG, if random access fails, MAC may indicate a random access problem to upper layers and RRC may declare radio link failure and initiate RRC connection re-establishment procedure.
  • The purpose of RRC connection re-establishment procedure may be to re-establish the RRC connection, which involves the resumption of SRB1 operation, the re-activation of security and/or the configuration of the PCell. The UE may initiate the procedure when AS security has been activated. The UE may initiate the procedure upon detecting radio link failure. A UE in RRC_CONNECTED, for which security has been activated, may initiate the procedure in order to continue the RRC connection. The connection re-establishment may succeed if the concerned cell is prepared i.e. has a valid UE context. In case E-UTRAN accepts the re-establishment, SRB1 (signalling radio bearer one) operation resumes while the operation of other radio bearers remains suspended. If AS security has not been activated, the UE may not initiate the procedure but instead may directly move to RRC_IDLE. E-UTRAN may apply RRC connection re-establishment procedure to reconfigure SRB1 and to resume data transfer for this RB (radio bearer) and/or to re-activate AS security without changing algorithms.
  • If either T300,T301,T304 or T311 is running, when RACH problem is indicated from MAC to RRC, the RRC layer may do different handling if corresponding Timer expired. According to some of the various aspects of embodiments, timer T300 starts by transmission of RRCConnectionRequest and stops by reception of RRCConnectionSetup or RRCConnectionReject message, cell re-selection and upon abortion of connection establishment by upper layers. If timer T300 expires, UE may reset MAC, release the MAC configuration and re-establish RLC for all RBs that are established. UE may also inform upper layers about the failure to establish the RRC connection, upon which the procedure may end. Timer T301 starts by transmission of RRCConnectionReestabilshmentRequest and stops by reception of RRCConnectionReestablishment or RRCConnectionReestablishmentReject message as well as when the selected cell becomes unsuitable. After expiry UE may go to Go to RRC_IDLE. Timer T304 starts by reception of RRCConnectionReconfiguration message including the MobilityControl Info or reception of MobilityFromEUTRACommand message including CellChangeOrder and stops by criterion for successful completion of handover to EUTRA or cell change order is met (the criterion is specified in the target RAT in case of inter-RAT). At expiry, in case of cell change order from E-UTRA or intra E-UTRA handover, UE may initiate the RRC connection re-establishment procedure; In case of handover to E-UTRA, UE may perform the actions applicable for the source RAT. Timer T311 starts by initiating the RRC connection re-establishment procedure and stops by selection of a suitable E-UTRA cell or a cell using another RAT. After expiry UE may enter RRC_IDLE.
  • UE may not perform radio link monitoring (RLM) on SCells. eNB may prevent any UL transmission (PUSCH, SRS and ordered RA) on an SCell by a UE if the UE SCell is in insufficient radio conditions. RLM on SCells may not be required. RACH on an SCell in an sTAG may be triggered when sTAG is out-of-sync. RACH on an SCell in an sTAG may also be triggered when sTAG is in-sync. The RACH on an SCell may be used to synchronize sTAG for UL data transmission. In this case, normally PCell is in sync and there may be no need to trigger reestablishment for SCell RACH failure. The eNB may configure other suitable SCells if available and RRC connection reestablishment may not be needed. In another example, when the eNB detects SCell RACH failure itself, the eNB may deactivate or release the SCell in order to stop preamble transmission or the eNB may release UL of that SCell or remove the SRS and may stop scheduling on UL resources of that SCell.
  • RACH triggered on SCell may be unrelated to initial setup, HO, or reestablishment procedure. No further RRC procedure may be used to stop it. UE may autonomously stop SCell RACH process if SCell RACH process fails. When the number of RA preamble transmissions reaches its maximum number, the UE may stop preamble transmission. The UE may stop preamble transmission on SCell and may not report Random Access problem to upper layers when the number of RA preamble transmissions on SCell reaches preambleTransMax. UE may let eNB detect SCell RA failure. eNB may detect RA failure by its own timer. eNB may set the timer value according to configured RA parameters (e.g. the maximum number of preamble transmissions, etc). eNB may start a timer when triggering RA on SCell using a PDCCH order, and upon the timer expiry eNB may consider a RA failure. When SCell RA fails, eNB may detect the failure without UE reporting it to the eNB. eNB may then take a proper action, such as restarting RACH process on the same SCell or a different SCell in the same sTAG, or de-configuring the sCell with failed RACH process. This process may reduce the number of radio link failures in the system, since there will be no radio link failure in response to random access process failure in sTAGs. Furthermore, automatic detection of random access failure in sTAG by the base station may reduce signaling overhead, since the UE does not need to inform the base station about random access failure in an sTAG. In an improved process, random access process failure in the pTAG may initiate radio link failure, but random access process failure in an sTAG does not initiate radio link failure. Furthermore, overhead in signaling is reduced by introducing automatic eNB detection of the random access failure in an sTAG without UE informing the eNB. This process may increase radio network efficiency and reduce signaling overhead.
  • Upon reaching the maximum number of transmitted preambles in an SCell, UE MAC may not indicate RACH failure to RRC. The UE may keep RRC connection active (UE stays in RRC-connected mode), but stop random access transmission for the initiated random access process (UE considers the process unsuccessful). UE does not leave RRC-connected mode in response to an unsuccessful random access process for an SCell. RRC may not trigger radio link failure (RLF). UE may not report this condition to eNB. In a random access process, if PREAMBLE_TRANSMISSION_COUNTER in the UE is equal to preambleTransMax+1, and the Random Access Preamble is transmitted on the PCell, the UE may indicate a Random Access problem to upper layers (for example RRC layer). In a random access process, if PREAMBLE_TRANSMISSION_COUNTER in the UE is equal to preambleTransMax+1, and the Random Access Preamble is transmitted on the SCell, UE may consider the Random Access procedure unsuccessfully completed. At completion of the Random Access procedure, the UE may discard explicitly signalled ra-PreambleIndex and ra-PRACH-MaskIndex. At completion of the Random Access procedure, the UE may stop transmission of the signaled random access preamble in the uplink. UE may stop transmission of random access preamble on an SCell at least until another PDCCH order for transmission of random access preamble on the SCell is received from the eNB.
  • In one example embodiment, eNB may initiate sTAG random access when the sTAG is out-of-sync, when the UE sTAG is in out-of synch state and SCell RA fails, uplink timing is still out-of-sync, and the sTAG may stay in out-of-sync state. When sTAG is in out-of-sync state the following may occur: SRS transmissions may be stopped on the corresponding SCells in the sTAG, the type-0 SRS configuration may be released, the type-1 SRS configuration may be maintained, CSI reporting configuration for the corresponding SCells may be maintained, and/or MAC may flush the uplink HARQ buffers of the corresponding SCells.
  • In one example embodiment, eNB may initiate sTAG RA procedure when the sTAG is in-sync. eNB may trigger SCell RA on in-sync SCell, for example when it detects that the uplink timing is deteriorating or time-alignment timer is expiring, and sTAG needs initial uplink synchronization. In an example embodiment, if SCell RA fails, eNB and UE may not change the SCell sync state and TAT for the sTAT may continue running until it is expired. eNB may take a proper action upon detection of RACH failure on sTAG. For example, if there is another SCell in this TAG, the eNB may trigger RACH in another SCell for sync purpose. The SCells in sTAG may still be in sync. eNB may start RACH on another cell, which may be completed successfully. UE may not change sTAG status from in-sync to out-of-sync on its own if RACH-process on an in-sync sTAG fails. sTAG status may change from in-sync to out-of-sync, when TAT of the sTAG is expired or is not running.
  • According to some of the various aspects of embodiments, MAC may indicate a random access problem to higher layers when random access on PCell fails, and MAC may not indicate a random access problem when random access on SCell fails. No special UE upper layer behavior for SCell UL random access problem may be defined and network-based detection and control may be assumed sufficient. Random access failure on SCell may be mainly handled by L1/L2. The eNB may detect random access problem, and there may be less RRC impact compared with PCell RACH failure. PCell Random Access problem may be used by RRC layer to trigger reestablishment procedure. UE may not trigger reestablishment for RACH failure on SCell and the eNB may handle RACH failure on SCell itself. UE may not report SCell RACH failure to RRC layer inside UE.
  • FIG. 13 is an example flow diagram illustrating an unsuccessful random access process as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present invention.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, a wireless device may repeatedly transmit a first random access preamble on a primary cell at block 1300. The transmissions may continue until a condition is met. Example conditions include: until a first random access response corresponding to the first random access preamble is received from a base station; or a first predetermined number of transmissions is reached. The first random access preamble may be transmitted one time if a first random access response is received after the first transmission of the first random access preamble.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, at block 1302, if the first predetermined number of transmissions is reached without receiving the first random access response: a random access problem may be indicated to a radio resource control layer in the wireless device; and the radio resource control layer may determine a radio link failure.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, at block 1304, the wireless device may receive at least one control message from the base station. The control message(s) may cause in the wireless device: configuration of a plurality of cells. The plurality of cells may comprise a primary cell and at least one secondary cell. The control message(s) may cause in the wireless device assignment of each of the secondary cell(s) to a cell group in a plurality of cell groups. The plurality of cell groups may comprise a secondary cell group. The secondary cell group may comprise a subset of secondary cell(s).
  • According to some of the various embodiments, the wireless device may receive a control command causing the wireless device to transmit a second random access preamble on a first secondary cell in the secondary cell group. The first secondary cell may be an activated secondary cell.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, at block 1306, the wireless device may repeatedly transmit the second random access preamble until: a second random access response corresponding to the second random access preamble is received; or a second predetermined number of transmissions is reached.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, at block 1308, if the second predetermined number of transmissions is reached without receiving the second random access response, the wireless device may stop transmission of the second random access preamble; and keep a connection with the base station active.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, the first random access response may comprise a first random access preamble identifier corresponding to the first random access preamble. The second random access response may comprise a second random access preamble identifier corresponding to the second random access preamble.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, the wireless device may enter a no uplink transmission status for the secondary cell group until at least another control command is received from the base station if the second predetermined number of retransmissions is reached.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, if the second predetermined number of transmissions is reached, the wireless device may enter an out-of-sync status if the wireless device was in-sync before the wireless device receives the control command. If the second predetermined number of transmissions is reached, the wireless device may stay in the out-of-sync status if the wireless device was in the out-of-sync status before the wireless device receives the control command. The wireless device may stay in an in-sync status if a corresponding time alignment timer of the secondary cell group is running when the second predetermined number of transmissions is reached.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, a connection re-establishment process may be triggered by the wireless device if the first predetermined number of transmissions is reached without receiving the first random access response.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, a wireless device may repeatedly transmit a first random access preamble on a primary cell at block 1300 until: a first random access response corresponding to the first random access preamble is received from the base station; or a first predetermined number of transmissions is reached. At block 1302
  • According to some of the various embodiments, at block 1302, a random access problem to a radio resource control layer in the wireless device may be indicated and the radio resource control layer may determine a radio link failure if the first predetermined number of transmissions is reached without receiving the first random access response:
  • According to some of the various embodiments, at block 1304, the wireless device may receive a control command causing the wireless device to transmit a second random access preamble on a first secondary cell. The control command may comprise a mask index and the random access preamble identifier.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, at block 1306, the wireless device may repeatedly transmit the second random access preamble until: a second random access response corresponding to the second random access preamble is received; or a second predetermined number of transmissions is reached.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, at block 1308, the wireless device may stop transmission of the second random access preamble and keep a connection with the base station active if the second predetermined number of transmissions is reached without receiving the second random access response.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, a connection re-establishment process may be triggered by the wireless device if the first predetermined number of transmissions is reached without receiving the first random access response.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, the primary cell may be assigned to a primary cell group and the first secondary cell may be assigned to a secondary cell group. The uplink signals transmitted by the wireless device in the primary cell group may employ a first synchronization signal transmitted on the primary cell as a first timing reference. The uplink signals transmitted by the wireless device in the secondary cell group may employ a second synchronization signal transmitted on an activated secondary cell in the secondary cell group as a second timing reference. The wireless device may stop uplink transmissions in the secondary cell group if the second predetermined number of transmissions is reached without receiving the second random access response.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, the wireless device may stop uplink transmissions in the first secondary cell if the second predetermined number of transmissions is reached without receiving the second random access response.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, the wireless device may receive control message(s) from the base station. The control message may comprise the first predetermined number and the second predetermined number.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, the wireless device may comprise communication interface(s), processor(s), and memory. The memory may store instructions. The processor(s) may execute the instructions to cause actions described herein.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, the wireless device may repeatedly transmit a first random access preamble on a primary cell until: a first random access response corresponding to the first random access preamble is received from the base station; or a first predetermined number of transmissions is reached. If the first predetermined number of transmissions is reached without receiving the first random access response: a random access problem may be indicated to a radio resource control layer in the wireless device; and the radio resource control layer may determine a radio link failure. The wireless device may receive a control command causing the wireless device to transmit a second random access preamble on a first secondary cell. The wireless device may repeatedly transmit the second random access preamble until: a second random access response corresponding to the second random access preamble is received; or a second predetermined number of transmissions is reached. If the second predetermined number of transmissions is reached without receiving the second random access response: transmission of the second random access preamble may be stopped and a connection with the base station may be kept active.
  • The control command may comprise a mask index and the random access preamble identifier. The primary cell may be assigned to a primary cell group. The first secondary cell may be assigned to a secondary cell group. The first random access response may comprise a first random access preamble identifier corresponding to the first random access preamble. The second random access response may comprise a second random access preamble identifier corresponding to the second random access preamble.
  • According to some of the various aspects of embodiments, when the TAT associated with the pTAG expires, all TATs may be considered as expired and the UE may flush all HARQ buffers of all serving cells, may clear any configured downlink assignment/uplink grants, and/or RRC may release PUCCH/SRS for all configured serving cells as in Rel-10. The UE may not perform any uplink transmission except the random access preamble transmission when TAT for pTAG is not running.
  • For primary TAG if timeAlignmentTimer is stopped or expired UE and/or eNB may not indicate the generated positive or negative acknowledgement to the physical layer. If primary TAG timeAlignmentTimer is running, UE and/or eNB may indicate the generated positive or negative acknowledgement for a TB to the physical layer. The UE may follow LTE Rel-10 behaviour for DL HARQ feedback handling when the PCell-TAT is stopped or expired.
  • When the TAT associated with sTAG expires, SRS transmissions may be stopped on the corresponding SCells. In an example implementation, the type-0 SRS configuration may be released, but the type-1 SRS configuration may be maintained. CSI reporting configuration for the corresponding SCells may be maintained. MAC may flush the uplink HARQ buffers of the corresponding SCells. MAC may stop transmission of HARQ feedback in the downlink to the UE. Whether the SCell-TAT is running or not may not impact the HARQ feedback transmission in the uplink. Uplink HARQ feedback may be transmitted on PUCCH on PCell, and downlink HARQ feedback may be transmitted on the same or different serving cell as uplink transmission depending on cross carrier scheduling. This process may improve network performance. Upon expiry of TAT for an sTAG, many of the activities in the SCells assigned to sTAG may continue. For example, the UE may still receive downlink data on the SCells, transmit CSI for the downlink of uplink out-of-sync SCells, and transmit ACK/NACK for downlink data received on SCells belonging to an out-of-sync sTAG. This process may not de-configure, deactivate, and/or stop all activities on SCells of out-of-sync sTAG, and therefore may improve overall radio link efficiency.
  • FIG. 14 is an example flow diagram illustrating mechanisms in a wireless device when a time alignment timer expires as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present invention. According to some of the various embodiments, a wireless device may receive control message(s) from a base station at block 1400. The control message(s) may cause in the wireless device configuration of a plurality of cells comprising a primary cell and at least one secondary cell. The control message(s) may cause in the wireless device assignment of each of the secondary cell(s) to a cell group in a plurality of cell groups. The plurality of cell groups may comprise a primary cell group and a secondary cell group. The primary cell group may comprise a first subset of the plurality of cells. The first subset may comprise the primary cell. The secondary cell group may comprise a second subset of the secondary cell(s).
  • According to some of the various embodiments, the control message(s) may cause in the wireless device configuration of a time alignment timer for each of the plurality of cell groups. The time alignment timer may start or restart in response to the wireless device receiving a timing advance command to adjust the uplink transmission timing of a commanded cell group in the plurality of cell groups. The commanded cell group may be considered out-of-sync in response to the time alignment timer being expired or not running. The commanded cell group may be considered in-sync in response to the time alignment timer running.
  • The control message(s) may comprise a media access control dedicated information element. The media access control dedicated information element may comprise a sequence of first information element(s). Each of the first information element(s) may comprise: a first cell group index of a first secondary cell group; and a first time alignment timer for the first secondary cell group.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, when the primary cell group becomes out-of-sync, a series of actions may occur as illustrated in example block 1402. For each cell in the primary cell group and the secondary cell group: the uplink transmission of HARQ feedback may be stopped; re-transmissions of uplink transport blocks in response to downlink HARQ feedback may be stopped; uplink transmissions comprising transport block transmissions and channel state information transmissions may be stopped; and uplink transmission of at least one random access preamble may be allowed if the cell is the primary cell. The random access preamble(s) may be transmitted on the primary cell.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, a series of actions may occur as illustrated in example block 1404 for each activated cell in the secondary cell group when the secondary cell group becomes out-of-sync and the primary cell group is in-sync. In this case, for each activated cell in the secondary cell group: re-transmission of uplink transport blocks in response to downlink negative HARQ feedback may be stopped; transmissions of new transport blocks in an uplink of the activated cell may be stopped; transmission of HARQ feedback for transport blocks received on a downlink of the activated cell may continue; and transmission of channel state information for the downlink of the activated cell on an uplink carrier not belonging to the secondary cell group may be continued. Uplink transmission of at least one second random access preamble may be allowed on the secondary cell group when the secondary cell group becomes out-of-sync and the primary cell group is in-sync.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, when the secondary cell group is out-of-sync and the primary cell group is in-sync, for each activated cell in the secondary cell group, the continuing transmission of HARQ feedback may employ: a physical uplink control channel on the primary cell; or uplink control information feedback in a transport block transmitted on a shared data channel of an uplink carrier not belonging to the secondary cell group. When the secondary cell group is out-of-sync and the primary cell group is in-sync, for each activated cell in the secondary cell group, the continuing transmission of channel state information employs: a physical uplink control channel on the primary cell; or uplink control information feedback in a transport block transmitted on a shared data channel of an uplink carrier not belonging to the secondary cell group.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, for each cell in the plurality of cells, a radio resource control may be notified to release a sounding reference signal when the primary cell group becomes out-of-sync. For each activated cell in the secondary cell group, a radio resource control may be notified to release a sounding reference signal when the secondary cell group becomes out-of-sync and the primary cell group is in-sync.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, the wireless device may be assigned, by the configuration, a plurality of media access control dedicated parameters. The media access control dedicated parameters may comprise a plurality of time alignment timer values. Each of the plurality of time alignment timer values may be associated with a time alignment timer of a cell group. The wireless device may be assigned, by the configuration, a plurality of media access control dedicated parameters comprising a plurality of time alignment timer values, each of the plurality of time alignment timer values may be associated with a unique cell group in the wireless device.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, a wireless device may receive control message(s) from a base station at block 1400. The control message(s) may cause in the wireless device configuration of a plurality of cells comprising a primary cell and at least one secondary cell. The control message(s) may cause in the wireless device assignment of each of the secondary cell(s) to a cell group in a plurality of cell groups. The plurality of cell groups may comprise a primary cell group and a secondary cell group. The primary cell group may comprise a first subset of the plurality of cells. The first subset may comprise the primary cell. The secondary cell group may comprise a second subset of the secondary cell(s). The control message(s) may cause in the wireless device configuration of a time alignment timer for each of the plurality of cell groups. The time alignment timer may start or restart in response to the wireless device receiving a timing advance command to adjust uplink transmission timing of a commanded cell group in the plurality of cell groups.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, the wireless device may receive timing advance command(s) from the base station. The timing advance command may comprise: a time adjustment value; and an index identifying the secondary cell group. The timing advance command(s) may be configured to cause substantial alignment of reception timing of the uplink signals in frames and subframes of the secondary cell group at the base station. The time alignment timer of the secondary cell group may be restarted in response to receiving a timing advance command in the at least one timing advance command.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, as illustrated in block 1402, when a first time alignment timer of the primary cell group expires, for each cell in the primary cell group and the secondary cell group: uplink transmission of HARQ feedback may be stopped; re-transmissions of uplink transport blocks in response to downlink HARQ feedback may be stopped; uplink transmissions comprising transport block transmissions and channel state information transmissions may be stopped; and uplink transmission of at least one random access preamble may be allowed if the cell is the primary cell.
  • The primary cell group may comprise a first subset of the plurality of cells. The first subset may comprise the primary cell. Uplink transmissions by the wireless device in the primary cell group may employ a first synchronization signal transmitted on the primary cell. The second cell group may comprise a second subset of the plurality of cells. The second subset may comprise a reference secondary cell. Uplink transmissions in the secondary cell group may employ a second synchronization signal on the reference secondary cell as a secondary timing reference.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, as illustrated in block 1404, when a second time alignment timer of the secondary cell group expires and the first time alignment timer is running, for each activated cell in the secondary cell group: re-transmission of uplink transport blocks in response to downlink negative HARQ feedback may be stopped; transmissions of new transport blocks in an uplink of the activated cell may be stopped; transmission of HARQ feedback for transport blocks received on a downlink of the activated cell may be continued; and transmission of channel state information for the downlink of the activated cell on an uplink carrier not belonging to the secondary cell group may be continued.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, the wireless device may comprise communication interface(s), processor(s), and memory. The memory may store instructions. The processor(s) may execute the instructions to cause actions described herein.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, the wireless device may receive at least one control message from a base station at 1400. The control message(s) may cause in the wireless device configuration of a plurality of cells. The plurality of cells may comprise a primary cell secondary cell(s). The control message(s) may cause in the wireless device assignment of each of the secondary cell(s) to a cell group in a plurality of cell groups. The plurality of cell groups may comprise a primary cell group and a secondary cell group. The primary cell group may comprise a first subset of the plurality of cells. The first subset may comprise the primary cell. The secondary cell group may comprise a second subset of the secondary cell(s). The control message(s) may cause in the wireless device configuration of a time alignment timer for each of the plurality of cell groups. The time alignment timer may start or restart in response to the wireless device receiving a timing advance command to adjust uplink transmission timing of a commanded cell group in the plurality of cell groups.
  • The control message(s) may comprise a media access control dedicated information element. The media access control dedicated information element may comprise a sequence of first information element(s). Each of the first information element(s) may comprise: a first cell group index of a first secondary cell group; and a first time alignment timer for the first secondary cell group.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, at block 1402, when a first time alignment timer of the primary cell group expires, for each cell in the primary cell group and the secondary cell group: uplink transmission of HARQ feedback may be stopped; re-transmissions of uplink transport blocks in response to downlink HARQ feedback may be stopped; uplink transmissions comprising transport block transmissions and channel state information transmissions may be stopped; and uplink transmission of random access preamble(s) may be allowed if the cell is the primary cell. The random access preamble(s) may be transmitted on the primary cell.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, at block 1402, when a second time alignment timer of the secondary cell group expires and the first time alignment timer is running, for each activated cell in the secondary cell group: re-transmission of uplink transport blocks in response to downlink negative HARQ feedback may be stopped; transmissions of new transport blocks in an uplink of the activated cell may be stopped; transmission of HARQ feedback for transport blocks received on a downlink of the activated cell may be continued; and transmission of channel state information for the downlink of the activated cell on an uplink carrier not belonging to the secondary cell group may be continued.
  • The wireless device may be assigned, by the configuration, a plurality of media access control dedicated parameters. The media access control dedicated parameters may comprise a plurality of time alignment timer values. Each of the time alignment timer values may be associated with a time alignment timer of a cell group. The wireless device may be assigned, by the configuration, a plurality of media access control dedicated parameters. The media access control dedicated parameters may comprise a plurality of time alignment timer values. Each of the time alignment timer values may be associated with a unique cell group in the wireless device.
  • The wireless device may transmit a second random access preamble on a secondary cell of the secondary cell group in response to receiving a control command from the base station when: the second time alignment timer of the secondary cell group is expired; and the first time alignment timer is running.
  • Frames and subframe transmission timing for all downlink carriers in the primary cell group and the secondary cell group of a base station may be substantially time aligned with each other. Frames and subframe for all downlink carriers in the primary cell group and the secondary cell group are transmitted and their timing are controlled by the same base station, and therefore achieving an accurate time alignment by the base station would be feasible by the base station. The accuracy would be better than a fraction of a subframe, for example 10 micro-sec or better. For example, timing alignment error between downlink carriers belonging to different bands may be within 1.3 micro-seconds. In another example, for carriers in the same band the synchronization may be more accurate and may be below 1 micro-second.
  • According to some of the various aspects of embodiments, frames and subframe transmission timing for all downlink carriers in the primary cell group and the secondary cell group of the base station may be substantially time aligned with frames and subframe transmission timing of all downlink carriers in the plurality of base stations. This may be an optional synchronization requirement to enhance network performance and some network may not use this requirement. Such a time alignment requires, for example, coordination and signalling among the plurality of base stations. In another example, it requires that the plurality of base stations use the same synchronization source such as GPS signalling, some other sort of centralized algorithm, and/or some packet based synchronization system to achieve synchronization. Time alignment process between frames and subframes of the plurality of base stations thus may involve many external factors, and therefore the accuracy of time alignment may not be precise, but it may be substantially within certain pre-defined accuracy limits. Time alignment between carriers of the same base stations may be a simpler task compared with time alignment between carriers of multiple base stations. The accuracy of the former task may be higher than the accuracy of the later task. Therefore, the term substantially aligned here may imply that the carriers are substantially time aligned within a certain time alignment accuracy range. For example, in an implementation the error may be below half a subframe, a small fraction of a subframe, or for example 10 micro-seconds, or less.
  • Frames and subframe transmission timing for all uplink carriers in the primary cell group of the wireless device may be substantially time aligned with each other. Frames and subframe transmission timing for all uplink carriers in the secondary cell group of the wireless device may be substantially time aligned with each other. Frames and subframe transmission timing for uplink carriers in the primary cell group of the wireless device may not necessarily be time aligned with frames and subframe transmission timing for uplink carriers in the secondary cell group of the wireless device. Uplink transmission timing in different cell groups in the wireless device may be adjusted according to a different set of MAC time alignment commands, and may employ a different Cell timing reference. Substantial time alignment here may be considered in the context. In a wireless device, uplink signal transmission may not time aligned if they are not precisely time aligned. A wireless device may use a different downlink synchronization signals and/or time alignment commands to align uplink transmission in different carrier groups. Because the same device is generating the signal. The substantial alignment here may imply that the wireless device makes every effort to align transmission timing and may use the same timing reference. However, uplink transmission timing of uplink carriers in the primary cell group and the secondary cell group may not be exactly time aligned. Different cell groups use different downlink synchronization signals as the reference timing, and time alignment commands for the uplink are different for the primary cell group and secondary cell group uplink transmission. In an example, in a wireless signal uplink transmission even a few micro-second mis-alignment between uplink transmissions in two different carrier groups may be considered as not being substantially time aligned. Uplink transmission timing between cells in different cell groups, for example may differ up to 30 micro-seconds depending on cell radius, repeater locations, and/or the like.
  • According to a first embodiment, the plurality of time alignment commands may substantially align frame and subframe reception timing of signals transmitted by the plurality of wireless devices to the base station in the primary cell group. The plurality of time alignment commands may substantially align frame and subframe reception timing of signals transmitted by the plurality of wireless devices to the base station in the secondary cell group. The base station may employ time alignment commands in order to substantially time align uplink signals received from the same carrier group in different wireless devices, even though signal propagation/processing time may be different for different carrier groups. Each device may have a different signal propagation/processing delay, because of its distance to the base station, or its receiver structure, and/or the like. In this context, the substantial time alignment criteria is determined by a base station performance criteria, and in normal condition the base station may transmit the time alignment commands with the goal of achieving a substantial time alignment in the uplink. When signal reception timing in the base station deviates more than a threshold from a reference time for signals received from a wireless device, the base station may transmit a time alignment command to adjust the wireless device transmission timing. The reference eNB reception time may not be exactly the same for different carrier groups. The TA commands may have a resolution in the range of 1.6 micro-seconds.
  • According to a second embodiment, the plurality of time alignment commands may substantially align frame and subframe reception timing of signals transmitted by the plurality of wireless devices to the base station in the primary cell group and the secondary cell group. In this embodiment, time alignment commands are transmitted in order to maintain the same reception timing at the base station among all carriers of the cell, including all carriers in the primary cell group and secondary cell group. This process may require a more complex time alignment procedure in the base station, but may provide advantages because frames and subframes of all uplink transmissions by all wireless devices on all uplink carriers are substantially the same in the base station. The substantial time alignment implies that the base station may transmit time alignment commands to achieve such a time alignment in the received signal of all uplink carriers from all wireless devices in the coverage area of for example a base station sector. The base station may employ time alignment commands in order to substantially time align uplink signals received from different carrier groups in the same wireless device as well as signals received from a plurality of wireless devices, even though signal propagation/processing time may be different for different carrier groups and from different wireless devices. When signal reception timing in the base station deviates more than a threshold from a reference time for signals received from a wireless device, the base station may transmit a time alignment command to adjust the wireless device transmission timing. The reference eNB reception time may be the same for different wireless devices and for different carrier groups. The TA commands may have a resolution in the range of 1.6 micro-seconds.
  • FIG. 15 is an example flow diagram illustrating a base station process for configuring multiple cell groups as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present invention. According to some of the various embodiments, a base station in a plurality of base stations may transmit control message(s) to a wireless device at block 1500. The plurality of base stations may be compatible with LTE release 11 or above and support multiple timing advance groups.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, the control message(s) may be configured to cause in the wireless device configuration of a plurality of cells. The plurality of cells may comprise a primary cell and at least one secondary cell. The control message(s) may be configured to cause in the wireless device to assign of each of the secondary cell(s) to a cell group in a plurality of cell groups. The plurality of cell groups may comprise a primary cell group and a secondary cell group. The primary cell group may comprise a first subset of the plurality of cells. The first subset may comprise the primary cell. Uplink transmissions by the wireless device in the primary cell group may employ a first synchronization signal transmitted on the primary cell as a primary timing reference. The secondary cell group may comprise a second subset of the secondary cell(s). The second subset may comprise a reference secondary cell. Uplink transmissions in the secondary cell group may employ a second synchronization signal on the reference secondary cell as a secondary timing reference.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, control message(s) may be configured to modify a radio bearer. Control message(s) may be configured to cause in the wireless device configuration of uplink random access resources on the reference secondary cell.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, a plurality of timing advance commands may be transmitted by the base station to the wireless device at block 1502. Each of the plurality of timing advance commands may comprise a time adjustment value and an index identifying a cell group.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, frames and subframes transmission timing for downlink carriers in the primary cell group and downlink carriers in the secondary cell group may be substantially time aligned with each other. Frames and subframes transmission timing for downlink carriers in the primary cell group and downlink carriers in the secondary cell group of the base station may be substantially time aligned with frames and subframes transmission timing of downlink carriers of other base stations in the plurality of base stations. Frames and subframes transmission timing for uplink carriers in the primary cell group of the wireless device may be substantially time aligned with each other. Frames and subframes transmission timing for uplink carriers in the secondary cell group of the wireless device may be substantially time aligned with each other. Frames and subframes transmission timing for uplink carriers in the primary cell group and in the secondary cell group of the wireless device may employ: different synchronization signals as a timing reference; and different timing advance commands. The plurality of timing advance commands may be configured to cause the wireless device to adjust timing of uplink signal transmissions in uplink carriers of the primary cell group and the secondary cell group such that the base station receives the uplink signal transmissions in substantial alignment with frames and subframes of the base station. Transmission time may be divided into frames. Each frame may be divided into a plurality of subframes.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, frames and subframe reception timing for uplink carriers in the primary cell group and uplink carriers in the secondary cell group of the base station may be substantially time aligned with frames and subframe reception timing of uplink carriers of other base stations in the plurality of base stations. Frames and subframes transmission timing for uplink carriers in the primary cell group and in the secondary cell group of the wireless device may not necessarily time aligned.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, the wireless device may be assigned, by the configuration, a plurality of media access control dedicated parameters. The media access control dedicated parameters may comprise a plurality of time alignment timer values. Each of the plurality of time alignment timer values may be associated with a unique cell group in the wireless device.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, the base station may transmit a control command configured to cause transmission of a random access preamble on random access resources of the reference secondary cell in the secondary cell group. The base station may transmit a random access response on a primary cell in the primary cell group. The random access response may comprise a timing advance command for the secondary cell group. The secondary cell group may comprise the reference secondary cell. The control command may comprise a mask index and the random access preamble identifier. The random access response may comprise an identifier of the random access preamble.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, a base station in a plurality of base stations may transmit first control message(s) to a wireless device at block 1500. The plurality of base stations may be compatible with LTE release 11 or above.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, the first control message(s) may be configured to cause in the wireless device configuration of a plurality of cells. The plurality of cells may comprise a primary cell and at least one secondary cell. The first control message(s) may be configured to cause in the wireless device assignment of each of the secondary cell(s) to a cell group in a plurality of cell groups. The plurality of cell groups may comprise a primary cell group and a secondary cell group. The primary cell group may comprise a first subset of the plurality of cells. The first subset may comprise the primary cell. The secondary cell group may comprise a second subset of the secondary cell(s).
  • According to some of the various embodiments, the base station may transmit a plurality of timing advance commands to the wireless device at block 1502. Each of the plurality of timing advance commands may comprise a time adjustment value and an index identifying a cell group.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, frames and subframes transmission timing for downlink carriers in the primary cell group and downlink carriers in the secondary cell group may be substantially time aligned with each other. Frames and subframes transmission timing for downlink carriers in the primary cell group and downlink carriers in the secondary cell group of the base station may be substantially time aligned with frames and subframes transmission timing of downlink carriers of other base stations in the plurality of base stations. Frames and subframes transmission timing for uplink carriers in the primary cell group of the wireless device may be substantially time aligned with each other. Frames and subframes transmission timing for uplink carriers in the secondary cell group of the wireless device may be substantially time aligned with each other. Frames and subframes transmission timing for uplink carriers in the primary cell group and in the secondary cell group of the wireless device may employ different synchronization signals as a timing reference and different timing advance commands. The plurality of timing advance commands may be configured to cause the wireless device to adjust timing of uplink signal transmissions in uplink carriers of the primary cell group and the secondary cell group such that the base station receives the uplink signal transmissions in substantial alignment with frames and subframes of the base station.
  • The base station may transmit a control command configured to cause transmission of a random access preamble on random access resources of the reference secondary cell in the secondary cell group. The base station may transmit a random access response on a primary cell in the primary cell group. The random access response may comprise a timing advance command for the secondary cell group. The secondary cell group may comprise the reference secondary cell. The control command may comprise a mask index and the random access preamble identifier. The random access response may comprise an identifier of the random access preamble.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, the base station may comprise communication interface(s), processor(s), and memory. The memory may store instructions. The processor(s) may execute the instructions to cause actions described herein.
  • FIG. 7 is an example message flow in a random access process in a TAG as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present invention. A preamble 602 may be sent by a UE in response to the PDCCH order 601 on an SCell belonging to an sTAG. Preamble transmission for SCells may be controlled by the network using PDCCH format 1A. Msg2 message 603 in response to the preamble transmission on SCell may be addressed to RA-CRNTI in PCell common search space (CSS). Uplink packets 604 may be transmitted on a the SCell, in which the preamble was transmitted.
  • In an implementation, the SCell index in the uplink grant may not be transmitted in the uplink grant in RAR and the uplink grant contained in the RAR may be applicable to the cell where the preamble was sent. According to some of the various aspects of embodiments RAPID may be included in Msg2 to address possible preamble misdetection by the eNB. UE may compare the RAPID in Msg2 with the transmitted preamble ID to verify the validity of the Msg2 and to verify possible preamble misdetection by eNB.
  • If a UE receives an RRC message that causes the UE to be configured to transmit SRS signal on an SCell, the UE may transmit SRS signal after the SCell is active and in-sync. If the sTAG and the activated SCell are in-sync then UE may start transmission of one or more SRS signals after the SCell is being activated. In an example embodiment, if an SCell is configured with transmission of SRS signals and is associated with an sTAG that is out-of-sync. eNB may activate the SCell and eNB may initiate RA process on an SCell in the sTAG. UE may not transmit any SRS signals on the SCell before successful completion of random access process. In response to successful completion of RA process in the sTAG and applying the timing advance command, the UE may start transmission of one or more SRS signals on uplink of the SCells (in the sTAG) with configured SRS transmission. UE may not transmit any SRS signal in the uplink of an active SCell belonging to an out-of-sync sTAG. When SRS is configured for an SCell belonging to an out-of-sync sTAG, a UE may not send SRS until UE receives and applies a RAR including a TA value, and an UL grant, because otherwise SRS may be sent with incorrect transmission power and/or timing. UE may apply TA value to the sTAG. In an example embodiment, UE may apply the power control command in the uplink grant before starting transmission of one or more SRS signals. In an example embodiment Uplink grant may include power control information. The UE may receive TA value, uplink resources and a power control command (TPC) to adjust the uplink transmission timing and power before the UE starts to send SRS (if configured for the SCell). Transmission of one or more SRS signal may start after the SCell is activated and in-sync. This process may not be required for SCells of the pTAG, because pTAG may be in-sync when an SCell is activated.
  • For an active and in-sync SCell, one or more SRS signals transmission may be dropped in a subframe if UE has insufficient power to transmit SRS signal with other uplink data or control packets in the subframe. SRS signal may also be dropped if it collides with other uplink transmissions. For example, a UE may not simultaneously transmit uplink data and SRS in a subframe of an SCell. Transmission of one or more SRS signal may start after the SCell is activated and in-sync. Then for each subframe that SRS is configured to be transmitted, UE may examine power and other parallel transmission constraints and may drop or transmit an SRS signal in a subframe of an SCell if all other conditions are met. Therefore the UE may transmit one or more SRS signals after the SCell is activated and is in-sync. The UE may also drop one or more SRS signals depending on other predefined conditions after the SCell is activated and is in-sync. But prior to applying TAT to an activated and out-of-sync SCell no SRS signal may be transmitted on the SCell. This process may increase the transmission time and/or power of the transmitted SRS signals. Otherwise, SRS signal transmission may overlap with other symbols, and deteriorate radio link performance.
  • FIG. 16 is an example flow diagram illustrating a process for sounding transmission as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present invention.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, a wireless device may receive at least one control message from a base station at block 1600. The control message(s) may cause in the wireless device configuration of a plurality of cells. The plurality of cells may comprise a primary cell and at least one secondary cell. The control message(s) may cause in the wireless device an assignment of each of the secondary cell(s) to a cell group in a plurality of cell groups. The plurality of cell groups may comprise a primary cell group and a secondary cell group. The primary cell group may comprise a first subset of the plurality of cells. The first subset may comprise the primary cell. Uplink transmissions by the wireless device in the primary cell group may employ a first synchronization signal transmitted on the primary cell as a primary timing reference. The secondary cell group may comprise a second subset of the secondary cell(s). Control message(s) may cause in the wireless device configuration of transmissions of sounding reference signals on a secondary cell in the secondary cell group. Control message(s) may cause configuration of the random access resources.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, the wireless device may receive an activation command to activate the secondary cell in the wireless device at block 1602.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, at block 1604, the wireless device may receive a control command configured to cause transmission of a random access preamble on random access resources of one of the secondary cell(s) in the second subset.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, at block 1606, the wireless device may receive a random access response. The random access response may comprise a timing advance command for the secondary cell group. The random access response may comprise a preamble identifier. The preamble identifier may identify the random access preamble.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, at block 1608, the wireless device may transmit one or more of the sounding reference signals on the secondary cell after applying the timing advance command to the secondary cell group. The wireless device may be configured to not transmit any of the sounding reference signals on the secondary cell during the period: between receiving the activation command and applying the timing advance command; or when the secondary cell is inactive; or when a time alignment timer for said secondary cell group is not running. Applying the timing advance command may cause substantial alignment of reception timing of uplink signals in frames and subframes of the secondary cell group at the base station.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, the wireless device may be configured to transmit at least one of the sounding reference signals if: the secondary cell is activated; the timing advance command is applied by the wireless device to the secondary cell group; and a time alignment timer for the secondary cell group is running. Even when these conditions are met, the sounding reference signals may be dropped due to insufficient wireless device transmit power or due to coinciding with other transmissions in the same cell group.
  • The sounding reference signal(s) may be type zero sounding reference signals. The sounding reference signal(s) may be configured to be transmitted during a period. The sounding reference signal(s) may be transmitted on the last symbol of a plurality of subframes.
  • The transmission of a sounding reference signal in the sounding reference signal(s) in a subframe of the secondary cell may be dropped if the wireless device is power limited in the subframe. The transmission of a sounding reference signal in the sounding reference signal(s) in a subframe of the secondary cell may be dropped if the wireless device transmits data in the subframe of the secondary cell. The wireless device may drop at least one sounding reference signal if one or more pre-defined conditions are met.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, a wireless device may receive at least one control message from a base station at block 1600. The control message(s) may cause in the wireless device configuration of a plurality of cells. The plurality of cells may comprise a primary cell and at least one secondary cell. The control message(s) may cause in the wireless device an assignment of each of the secondary cell(s) to a cell group in a plurality of cell groups. The plurality of cell groups may comprise a primary cell group and a secondary cell group. The primary cell group may comprise a first subset of the plurality of cells. The first subset may comprise the primary cell. Uplink transmissions by the wireless device in the primary cell group may employ a first synchronization signal transmitted on the primary cell as a primary timing reference. The secondary cell group may comprise a second subset of the secondary cell(s).
  • According to some of the various embodiments, the wireless device may receive an activation command to activate the secondary cell in the wireless device at block 1602.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, at block 1604, the wireless device may receive a control command configured to cause transmission of a random access preamble on random access resources of one of the secondary cell(s) in the second subset.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, at block 1606, the wireless device may receive a random access response. The random access response may comprise a timing advance command for the secondary cell group. The random access response may comprise a preamble identifier. The preamble identifier may identify the random access preamble.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, the wireless device may receive a second control message from the base station. The second control message may cause, in the wireless device, configuration of transmissions of sounding reference signals on a secondary cell in the secondary cell group.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, at block 1608, the wireless device may transmit one or more of the sounding reference signals on the secondary cell after applying the timing advance command to the secondary cell group. The wireless device may be configured to not transmit any of the sounding reference signals on the secondary cell during the period: between receiving the activation command and applying the timing advance command; or when the secondary cell is inactive; or when a time alignment timer for said secondary cell group is not running. Applying the timing advance command may cause substantial alignment of reception timing of uplink signals in frames and subframes of the secondary cell group at the base station.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, the wireless device may be configured to transmit at least one of the sounding reference signals if: the secondary cell is activated; the timing advance command is applied by the wireless device to the secondary cell group; and a time alignment timer for the secondary cell group is running. Even when these conditions are met, the sounding reference signals may be dropped due to insufficient wireless device transmit power or due to coinciding with other transmissions in the same cell group.
  • The control message(s) may be configured to further cause in the wireless device the configuration of a time alignment timer for each of the plurality of cell groups. The time alignment timer may start or restart in response to the wireless device receiving a timing advance command to adjust uplink transmission timing of a commanded cell group in the plurality of cell groups.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, the wireless device may comprise communication interface(s), processor(s), and memory. The memory may store instructions. The processor(s) may execute the instructions to cause actions described herein.
  • LTE Rel-8, 9 & 10 Timing Advance Command MAC command has a subheader and a MAC CE with fixed size of one octet that contains 2 reserved bits (R bits). LTE Rel-8, 9 & 10 does not support multiple time alignment grouping (It may also be said: it supports only one time alignment group) and there is no need to indicate to which time alignment group the time alignment command may apply. The time alignment command is applied to uplink carriers including PCell and SCell(s) of a wireless device. There is a need for enhancing the time alignment procedure in LTE Rel-8, 9 & 10 to efficiently support multiple time alignment groups.
  • In release 11 or above, when multiple TAGs are configured, a MAC CE identifying the TA group to which the TA value applies may be used. The R bits may be used to signal the TA group to which the TA value applies. The R bits of the Timing Advance Command MAC Control Elements may be used to signal the TA Group. In this embodiment, one TA is included in a MAC CE. If multiple TAs, each for a different TAG, need to be transmitted, then multiple CEs may be transmitted in the same TTI or different TTIs. When multiple time alignment CEs are transmitted to a wireless device in a TTI, a CE may have its own MAC subheader, and LCID number may be the same for them. It may be possible to transmit multiple TA MAC CE to a given wireless device in the same TTI, and a TA MAC CE may have its own subheader.
  • According to some of the various aspects of embodiments, when the R bits are set to 0, MAC CE indicates the TA Group of the PCell (pTAG) and other values are addressed to other TA groups (sTAGs). This would allow for a maximum of 4 TA Groups. 0 may be used for the 2-bits correspond to pTAG (00), 1-3 (01, 10, 11) may be used for sTAGs. This solution minimizes the changes to the release 8, 9, 10 MAC layer, and enhances the MAC CE TA command to multiple TAGs.
  • RRC layer may configure TAGs for an SCell (implicitly or explicitly) and may assign a TAG index (or TAG identifier) to a TAG (implicitly or explicitly). The index that is introduced for a TA Group in RRC may be used for the setting of the TAG-ID bits. The RRC index of the TA Groups is used for the setting of the TAG-ID bits. TAG-ID configured by RRC may be used to indicate TA group where the TA command applies. This may imply that the RRC signalling may configure up to 4 TAG-IDs.
  • One TAG in one TA Command may be supported. R.11 or above UEs may check R bits in MAC CE, but R.10 or below UEs may not need to check the R bits. According to some of the various aspects of embodiments, an R.11 or above UE with one configured TAG (only pTAG) may not need to check the TAG-ID bits. According to some of the various aspects of embodiments, multiple TAG TA values may be supported in one MAC CE TA command, in which a TA applies to a TAG. A 6-bit TA value may be associated with a TAG using 2-bit TAG index (identifier).
  • This enhancement supports transmitting TA value for a specific TAG without adding the size of MAC CE command compared to release 8, 9, 10. Two bits of TAG index bits are introduced before the 6 bits of TA value. This may require a new definition for MAC CE command that would be applicable to release 11 or above UEs. A method to introduce this new MAC CE command is to introduce a new MAC LCID for this new format. MAC LCID is included in a MAC subheader. This is a viable implementation option. This may increase the number of used MAC LCIDs. An embodiment is introduced here that would allow to use the same MAC LCID as in Rel-8, 9 & 10 for Rel-11 multiple TAG configuration. The same LCID as in Rel-8, 9 & 10 may be used in this embodiment applicable to multiple TAG configuration in release 11 or beyond. eNB transmits TA MAC CEs to UEs in unicast messages. eNB has the information about the current LTE release supported by the UE. This information may be available to the eNB via network signaling (through S1 interface with the MME) or via air interface signaling (UE capability message received from the UE). eNB may use the same LCID for the legacy TA MAC CE and the newly introduced TA MAC CE. If the MAC CE is transmitted to the release 8, 9, 10 LTE UEs, then the R bits may not include a TAG index. If the MAC CE is transmitted to the release 11 or above UEs, then the R bits may include the TAG index if multiple TAGs are configured. If multiple TAGs are not configured, then TA value is applied to pTAG including all the carriers.
  • This enhancement may not require introducing a new LCID, although a new MAC CE format is introduced for transmitting TA commands. Both legacy TA MAC CEs and new TA MAC CEs may use the same LCID and that reduces the number of LCIDs used in the MAC layer (compared with the scenario where a new LCID is introduced) and may further simplify UE implementation. eNB may consider UE LTE release or may consider the number of configured TAGs (1 for pTAG only configuration, more than 1 for pTAG and sTAG configuration) to decide if legacy MAC CE format should be used or new MAC CE format should be used. If UE is a release 8, 9, 10, then legacy MAC CE is used. For release 11 or above UEs with one TAG configuration (only pTAG), eNB may use new MAC CEs with TAG-ID bits set to pTAG index (for example 0 for pTAG). For release 11 or above UEs (or for release 11 or above UEs with multiple TAG configuration), eNB may use the new MAC CE format, wherein 2-bit TAG-ID bits point to the TAG index, which was configured in UE using RRC configuration messages.
  • In an example, user terminals (for example: UE1, UE2) communicating with an eNB may support different releases of LTE technology. For example, UE2 may support releases 8, 9, 10, and 11 of LTE, and UE1 may support releases 8, 9 and/or 10 (or for example may support release 8, or may support 8 & 9). In another example, user terminals (for example: UE1, UE2) communicating with an eNB may support different capabilities of LTE technology. For example, UE2 may support multiple time alignment groups, and UE1 may not support multiple time alignment groups. eNB may send MAC TA CEs to the user terminals (UE1, UE2) in unicast messages. MAC TA CEs may have the same LCID for UE1 and UE2. The user terminals (UE1, UE2) may interpret MAC TA CE messages for adjusting uplink timing differently dependent on the LTE release they support and are operating. The same exact message may be processed differently by UE1 and UE2. For example, in a scenario, where MAC LCID indicate MAC TA CE, and RR field is 00, UE1 may not consider the value of the two bits before TA value (RR). UE1 may change the uplink transmission timing for all uplink carriers according to the TA value in the MAC command. UE2 may however, decode the value of two bits before TA value (RR=TAG ID), and when the two bits are for example 00, UE1 may only update the transmission timing for cells belonging to pTAG according to the TA value. The first two bits may indicate the TAG ID to which the TA may apply. Therefore, the same MAC CE message content may be processed differently by different UEs operating in different LTE releases.
  • According to some of the various aspects of embodiments, a base station may transmit a plurality of unicast timing advance commands to a plurality of wireless devices for adjusting uplink transmission timing by the plurality of wireless devices. Each of the plurality of wireless devices may operate in a mode. The mode may comprise: a) a first mode employable by all of the plurality of wireless devices, or a second mode employable only by a subset of the plurality of wireless devices. Each of the plurality of wireless devices being addressed by at least one of the plurality of unicast timing advance commands may interpret differently the at least one of the plurality of unicast timing advance commands depending on the mode in which each of the plurality of wireless devices is operating. The plurality of unicast timing advance commands may have different formats for the plurality of wireless devices operating in the first mode and the plurality of wireless devices operating in the second mode. The format may comprise: a) a subheader comprising a logical channel ID, the logical channel ID being the same for the plurality of unicast timing advance commands, and b) a control element comprising a timing advance value, c) 2-bit information interpreted differently depending on the wireless device mode. The first mode may be configured to be compatible with release 8, 9 or 10 of LTE-Advance technology. The second mode may be configured to be compatible with release 11 of LTE-Advance technology.
  • FIG. 15 is an example flow diagram illustrating a base station process for configuring multiple cell groups as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present invention. According to some of the various embodiments, a base station in a plurality of base stations may transmit control message(s) to a first wireless device at block 1500. The plurality of base stations may be compatible with LTE release 11 or above and support multiple timing advance groups.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, the control message(s) may be configured to cause in the first wireless device configuration of a plurality of cells. The plurality of cells may comprise a primary cell and at least one secondary cell. The control message(s) may be configured to cause in the first wireless device to assign of each of the secondary cell(s) to a cell group in a plurality of cell groups. The plurality of cell groups may comprise a primary cell group and a secondary cell group. The primary cell group may comprise a first subset of the plurality of cells. The first subset may comprise the primary cell. The secondary cell group may comprise a second subset of the secondary cell(s). The second subset may comprise a reference secondary cell.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, the control message(s) may be configured to modify a radio bearer. Control message(s) may be transmitted by the base station to the first wireless device. The control message may cause configuration of uplink random access resources on a secondary cell in the secondary cell group. Control message(s) may comprise a plurality of random access resource parameters. The plurality of random access resource parameters may comprise: an index; a frequency offset; and a plurality of sequence parameters. Control message(s) may comprise a time alignment timer parameter for each cell group in the plurality of cell groups.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, a plurality of timing advance commands may be transmitted by the base station to the first wireless device at block 1502. A second plurality of timing advance commands may be transmitted by the base station to a second wireless device. The second wireless device may be unconfigurable with cell groups.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, each command in the first plurality of timing advance commands and the second plurality of timing advance commands may consist of a MAC subheader and a MAC control element. All of the MAC subheaders may comprise the same logical channel identifier value. Each of the first plurality of timing advance commands may comprise two bits. The content of the two bits may indicate a first cell group index. The first cell group index may identify a first cell group according to the configuration caused by the control message(s). Each of the first plurality of timing advance commands may be configured to cause substantial alignment of reception timing of first uplink signals in frames and subframes at the base station. The first uplink signals may be transmitted by the first wireless device in one or more activated uplink carriers of a cell group identified by the two bits. Each of the second plurality of timing advance commands may comprise two reserved bits. Each of the second plurality of timing advance commands may be configured to cause substantial alignment of reception timing of second uplink signals in frames and subframes at the base station. The second uplink signals may be transmitted by the second wireless device in one or more activated uplink carriers.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, the timing advance command in the first plurality of timing advance commands may comprise a timing advance value and an index identifying the secondary cell group. The timing advance command may be configured to cause substantial alignment of reception timing of third uplink signals in frames and subframes of the secondary cell group at the base station.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, the wireless device may be assigned, by the configuration, a plurality of media access control dedicated parameters. The media access control dedicated parameters may comprise a plurality of time alignment timer values. Each of the plurality of time alignment timer values may be associated with a unique cell group in the wireless device. A time alignment timer of a cell group in the plurality of cell groups may start or restart in response to the wireless device receiving a timing advance command to adjust uplink transmission timing of the cell group.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, uplink transmissions by the wireless device in the primary cell group may employ a first synchronization signal transmitted on the primary cell. Uplink transmissions in the secondary cell group may employ a second synchronization signal on the reference secondary cell as a secondary timing reference.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, prior to transmitting the control message(s), a first signaling bearer may be established between the base station and the first wireless device. The establishing may comprise the base station transmitting a control message to the first wireless device on the primary cell. Prior to transmitting the control message(s), the base station may receive a plurality of radio capability parameters from the first wireless device on the first signaling bearer on the primary cell. The plurality of radio capability parameters may indicate that the wireless device supports configuration of the plurality of cell groups.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, a base station may transmit control message(s) to a first wireless device at block 1500. The plurality of base stations may be compatible with LTE release 11 or above.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, a plurality of timing advance commands may be transmitted to a plurality of wireless devices at block 1502 for adjusting uplink transmission timing by the plurality of wireless devices. Each of the plurality of wireless devices may operate in a mode. The mode may be one of: a first mode employable by all of the plurality of wireless devices; and a second mode employable only by a subset of the plurality of wireless devices.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, the timing advance command(s) may be interpreted by a wireless device in the plurality of wireless devices being addressed by timing advance command(s). The interpretation may depend on the mode in which the wireless device is operating. Each of the plurality of timing advance commands may consists of: a subheader, a control element, and a a two-bit information element. The subheader may comprise the same logical channel identifier value for the each of the plurality of timing advance commands. The control element may comprise a timing advance value. The two-bit information element may be interpreted as: a cell group index associated to a cell group adjusting uplink transmission timing if the wireless device is operating in the second mode; and/or reserved bits if the wireless device is operating in the first mode.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, in an example implementation, the first mode may be unconfigurable with a plurality of cell groups and the second mode may be configurable with a plurality of cell groups. In another example, the first mode may be configured to be compatible with at least release: 8, 9 or 10 of LTE technology; or release 11 of LTE technology without multiple time alignment capability. The second mode may be configured to be compatible with release 11 of LTE technology with multiple time alignment capability. In another example, the first mode may be configured to be compatible with at least release 8, 9 or 10 of LTE technology. The second mode may be configured to be compatible with release 11 of LTE technology.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, prior to transmitting the at least one control message, a first signaling bearer may be established between the base station and the first wireless device. The establishing may comprise the base station transmitting a control message to the first wireless device on the primary cell. Prior to transmitting the at least one control message, the base station may receive a plurality of radio capability parameters from the first wireless device on the first signaling bearer on the primary cell. The plurality of radio capability parameters may indicate that the wireless device supports configuration of the second mode. The base station may receive a plurality of radio capability parameters from the second wireless device on the first signaling bearer on the primary cell. The plurality of radio capability parameters may indicate that the wireless device supports configuration of the first mode.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, the base station may transmit control message(s) to a first wireless device operating in the second mode. The control message(s) may be configured to cause in the first wireless device configuration of a plurality of cells. The plurality of cells may comprise a primary cell and at least one secondary cell.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, the control message(s) may be configured to cause in the first wireless device, a cell group index for a secondary cell in the plurality of cells. The cell group index may identify one of a plurality of cell groups. The plurality of cell groups may comprise a primary cell group and a secondary cell group. The primary cell group may comprise a first subset of the plurality of cells. The first subset may comprise the primary cell. The secondary cell group may comprise a second subset of the at least one secondary cell.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, a base station in a wireless network may transmit a plurality of timing advance commands to a plurality of wireless devices for adjusting uplink transmission timing by the plurality of wireless devices. Each of the plurality of wireless devices may operate in a mode. The mode may be a first mode or a second mode. The first mode may be employable by all of the plurality of wireless devices. The second mode may be employable only by a subset of the plurality of wireless devices.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, the timing advance command(s) may be interpreted by a wireless device in the plurality of wireless devices being addressed by timing advance command(s). The interpretation may depend on the mode in which the wireless device is operating. Each of the plurality of timing advance commands may consists of: a subheader, a control element, and a two-bit information element. The subheader may comprise the same logical channel identifier value for the each of the plurality of timing advance commands. The control element may comprise a timing advance value. The two-bit information element may be interpreted differently depending on the wireless device operating mode.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, a first signaling bearer may be established between the base station and the first wireless device prior to transmitting the at least one control message. The establishing may comprise the base station transmitting a control message to the first wireless device on the primary cell. The base station may receive a plurality of radio capability parameters from the first wireless device on the first signaling bearer on the primary cell prior to transmitting the at least one control message. The plurality of radio capability parameters may indicate that the wireless device supports configuration of the second mode.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, the base station may transmit control message(s) to a first wireless device operating in the second mode. The control message(s) may be configured to cause in the first wireless device configuration of a plurality of cells. The plurality of cells may comprise a primary cell and at least one secondary cell.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, the control message(s) may be configured to cause in the first wireless device a cell group index for each cell in the plurality of cells. The cell group index may identify one of a plurality of cell groups. The plurality of cell groups may comprise a primary cell group and a secondary cell group. The primary cell group may comprise a first subset of the plurality of cells. The first subset may comprise the primary cell. The secondary cell group may comprise a second subset of the at least one secondary cell.
  • According to some of the various aspects of embodiments, the random access procedure may be initiated by a PDCCH order or by the MAC sublayer itself. Random access procedure on an SCell may be initiated by a PDCCH order. If a UE receives a PDCCH transmission consistent with a PDCCH order masked with its C-RNTI (radio network temporary identifier), and for a specific serving cell, the UE may initiate a random access procedure on this serving cell. For random access on the PCell a PDCCH order or RRC optionally indicate the ra-PreambleIndex and the ra-PRACH-MaskIndex; and for random access on an SCell, the PDCCH order indicates the ra-PreambleIndex with a value different from zero and the ra-PRACH-MaskIndex. For the pTAG preamble transmission on PRACH and reception of a PDCCH order may only be supported for PCell.
  • According to some of the various aspects of embodiments, the procedure may use some of the following information: a) the available set of PRACH resources for the transmission of the random access preamble, prach-ConfigIndex., b) for PCell, the groups of random access preambles and/or the set of available random access preambles in each group, c) for PCell, the preambles that are contained in random access preambles group A and Random Access Preambles group B are calculated, d) the RA response window size ra-ResponseWindowSize, e) the power-ramping factor powerRampingStep, f) the maximum number of preamble transmission preambleTransMax, g) the initial preamble power preambleInitialReceivedTargetPower, h) the preamble format based offset DELTA_PREAMBLE, i) for PCell, the maximum number of Msg3 HARQ transmissions maxHARQ-Msg3Tx, j) for PCell, the Contention Resolution Timer mac-ContentionResolutionTimer. These parameters may be updated from upper layers before each Random Access procedure is initiated.
  • According to some of the various aspects of embodiments, the Random Access procedure may be performed as follows: Flush the Msg3 buffer; set the PREAMBLE_TRANSMISSION_COUNTER to 1; set the backoff parameter value in the UE to 0 ms; for the RN (relay node), suspend any RN subframe configuration; proceed to the selection of the Random Access Resource. There may be one Random Access procedure ongoing at any point in time. If the UE receives a request for a new Random Access procedure while another is already ongoing, it may be up to UE implementation whether to continue with the ongoing procedure or start with the new procedure.
  • According to some of the various aspects of embodiments, the Random Access Resource selection procedure may be performed as follows. If ra-PreambleIndex (Random Access Preamble) and ra-PRACH-MaskIndex (PRACH Mask Index) have been explicitly signalled and ra-PreambleIndex is not zero, then the Random Access Preamble and the PRACH Mask Index may be those explicitly signalled. Otherwise, the Random Access Preamble may be selected by the UE.
  • The UE may determine the next available subframe containing PRACH permitted by the restrictions given by the prach-ConfigIndex, the PRACH Mask Index and physical layer timing requirements (a UE may take into account the possible occurrence of measurement gaps when determining the next available PRACH subframe). If the transmission mode is TDD and the PRACH Mask Index is equal to zero, then if ra-PreambleIndex was explicitly signalled and it was not 0 (i.e., not selected by MAC), then randomly select, with equal probability, one PRACH from the PRACHs available in the determined subframe. Else, the UE may randomly select, with equal probability, one PRACH from the PRACHs available in the determined subframe and the next two consecutive subframes. If the transmission mode is not TDD or the PRACH Mask Index is not equal to zero, a UE may determine a PRACH within the determined subframe in accordance with the requirements of the PRACH Mask Index. Then the UE may proceed to the transmission of the Random Access Preamble.
  • PRACH mask index values may range for example from 0 to 16. PRACH mask index value may determine the allowed PRACH resource index that may be used for transmission. For example, PRACH mask index 0 may mean that all PRACH resource indeces are allowed; or PRACH mask index 1 may mean that PRACH resource index 0 may be used. PRACH mask index may have different meaning in TDD and FDD systems.
  • The random-access procedure may be performed by UE setting PREAMBLE_RECEIVED_TARGET_POWER to preambleInitialReceivedTargetPower+DELTA_PREAMBLE+(PREAMBLE_TRANSMISSION_COUNTER−1)*powerRampingStep. The UE may instruct the physical layer to transmit a preamble using the selected PRACH, corresponding RA-RNTI, preamble index and PREAMBLE_RECEIVED_TARGET_POWER.
  • According to some of the various aspects of embodiments, once the random access preamble is transmitted and regardless of the possible occurrence of a measurement gap, the UE may monitor the PDCCH of the PCell for random access response(s) identified by the RA-RNTI (random access radio network identifier) a specific RA-RNTI defined below, in the random access response (RAR) window which may start at the subframe that contains the end of the preamble transmission plus three subframes and has length ra-ResponseWindowSize subframes. The specific RA-RNTI associated with the PRACH in which the Random Access Preamble is transmitted, is computed as: RA-RNTI=1+t_id+10*f_id. Where t_id is the index of the first subframe of the specified PRACH (0≦t_id<10), and f_id is the index of the specified PRACH within that subframe, in ascending order of frequency domain (0≦f_id<6). The UE may stop monitoring for RAR(s) after successful reception of a RAR containing random access preamble identifiers that matches the transmitted random access preamble.
  • According to some of the various aspects of embodiments, if a downlink assignment for this TTI (transmission time interval) has been received on the PDCCH for the RA-RNTI and the received TB (transport block) is successfully decoded, the UE may regardless of the possible occurrence of a measurement gap: if the RAR contains a backoff indicator (BI) subheader, set the backoff parameter value in the UE employing the BI field of the backoff indicator subheader, else, set the backoff parameter value in the UE to zero ms. If the RAR contains a random access preamble identifier corresponding to the transmitted random access preamble, the UE may consider this RAR reception successful and apply the following actions for the serving cell where the random access preamble was transmitted: process the received riming advance command for the cell group in which the preamble was transmitted, indicate the preambleInitialReceivedTargetPower and the amount of power ramping applied to the latest preamble transmission to lower layers (i.e., (PREAMBLE_TRANSMISSION_COUNTER−1)*powerRampingStep); process the received uplink grant value and indicate it to the lower layers; the uplink grant is applicable to uplink of the cell in which the preamble was transmitted. If ra-PreambleIndex was explicitly signalled and it was not zero (e.g., not selected by MAC), consider the random access procedure successfully completed. Otherwise, if the Random Access Preamble was selected by UE MAC, set the Temporary C-RNTI to the value received in the RAR message. When an uplink transmission is required, e.g., for contention resolution, the eNB may not provide a grant smaller than 56 bits in the Random Access Response.
  • According to some of the various aspects of embodiments, if no RAR is received within the RAR window, or if none of all received RAR contains a random access preamble identifier corresponding to the transmitted random access preamble, the random access response reception may considered not successful. If RAR is not received, UE may increment PREAMBLE_TRANSMISSION_COUNTER by 1. If PREAMBLE_TRANSMISSION_COUNTER=preambleTransMax+1 and random access preamble is transmitted on the PCell, then UE may indicate a random access problem to upper layers (RRC). This may result in radio link failure. If PREAMBLE_TRANSMISSION_COUNTER=preambleTransMax+1 and the random access preamble is transmitted on an SCell, then UE may consider the random access procedure unsuccessfully completed. UE may stay in RRC connected mode and keep the RRC connection active eventhough a random access procedure unsuccessfully completed on a secondary TAG. According to some of the various aspects of embodiments, at completion of the random access procedure, the UE may discard explicitly signalled ra-PreambleIndex and ra-PRACH-MaskIndex, if any; and flush the HARQ buffer used for transmission of the MAC PDU in the Msg3 buffer. In addition, the RN may resume the suspended RN subframe configuration, if any.
  • According to some of the various aspects of embodiments, The UE may have a configurable timer timeAlignmentTimer per TAG. The timeAlignmentTimer is used to control how long the UE considers the Serving Cells belonging to the associated TAG to be uplink time aligned (in-sync). When a Timing Advance Command MAC control element is received, the UE may apply the riming advance command for the indicated TAG, and start or restart the timeAlignmentTimer associated with the indicated TAG. When a timing advance command is received in a RAR message for a serving cell belonging to a TAG and if the random access preamble was not selected by UE MAC, the UE may apply the timing advance command for this TAG, and may start or restart the timeAlignmentTimer associated with this TAG. When a timeAlignmentTimer associated with the pTAG expires, the UE may: flush all HARQ buffers for all serving cells; notify RRC to release PUCCH/SRS for all serving cells; clear any configured downlink assignments and uplink grants; and consider all running timeAlignmentTimers as expired. When a timeAlignmentTimer associated with an sTAG expires, then for all Serving Cells belonging to this TAG, the UE may flush all HARQ buffers; and notify RRC to release SRS. The UE may not perform any uplink transmission on a serving Cell except the random access preamble transmission when the timeAlignmentTimer associated with the TAG to which this serving cell belongs is not running. When the timeAlignmentTimer associated with the pTAG is not running, the UE may not perform any uplink transmission on any serving cell except the random access preamble transmission on the PCell. A UE stores or maintains N_TA (current timing advance value of an sTAG) upon expiry of associated timeAlignmentTimer. The UE may apply a received timing advance command MAC control element and starts associated timeAlignmentTimer. Transmission of the uplink radio frame number i from the UE may start (NTA+NTA offset)×Ts seconds before the start of the corresponding downlink radio frame at the UE, where 0≦NTA≦20512. In an example implementation, NTA offset=0 for frame structure type 1 (FDD) and NTA offset=624 for frame structure type 2 (TDD).
  • According to some of the various aspects of embodiments, upon reception of a timing advance command for a TAG containing the primary cell, the UE may adjust uplink transmission timing for PUCCH/PUSCH/SRS of the primary cell based on the received timing advance command. The UL transmission timing for PUSCH/SRS of a secondary cell may be the same as the primary cell if the secondary cell and the primary cell belong to the same TAG. Upon reception of a timing advance command for a TAG not containing the primary cell, the UE may adjust uplink transmission timing for PUSCH/SRS of secondary cells in the TAG based on the received timing advance command where the UL transmission timing for PUSCH/SRS is the same for all the secondary cells in the TAG.
  • The timing advance command for a TAG may indicates the change of the uplink timing relative to the current uplink timing for the TAG as multiples of 16Ts (Ts: sampling time unit). The start timing of the random access preamble may obtained employing a downlink synchronization time in the same TAG. In case of random access response, an 11-bit timing advance command, TA, for a TAG may indicate NTA values by index values of TA=0, 1, 2, . . . , 1282, where an amount of the time alignment for the TAG may be given by NTA=TA×16. In other cases, a 6-bit timing advance command, TA, for a TAG may indicate adjustment of the current NTA value, NTA,old, to the new NTA value, NTA,new, by index values of TA=0, 1, 2, . . . , 63, where NTA,new=NTA,old+(TA−31)×16. Here, adjustment of NTA value by a positive or a negative amount indicates advancing or delaying the uplink transmission timing for the TAG by a given amount respectively. For a timing advance command received on subframe n, the corresponding adjustment of the uplink transmission timing may apply from the beginning of subframe n+6. For serving cells in the same TAG, when the UE's uplink PUCCH/PUSCH/SRS transmissions in subframe n and subframe n+1 are overlapped due to the timing adjustment, the UE may complete transmission of subframe n and not transmit the overlapped part of subframe n+1. If the received downlink timing changes and is not compensated or is only partly compensated by the uplink timing adjustment without timing advance command, the UE may change NTA accordingly.
  • Downlink frames and subframes of downlink carriers are time aligned (by the base station) in carrier aggregation and multiple TAG configuration. Time alignment errors may be tolerated to some extend. For example, for intra-band contiguous carrier aggregation, time alignment error may not exceed 130 ns. In another example, for intra-band non-contiguous carrier aggregation, time alignment error may not exceed 260 ns. In another example, for inter-band carrier aggregation, time alignment error may not exceed 1.3 μs.
  • The UE may have capability to follow the frame timing change of the connected base station. The uplink frame transmission may take place (NTA+NTA offset)×Ts before the reception of the first detected path (in time) of the corresponding downlink frame from the reference cell. The UE may be configured with a pTAG containing the PCell. The pTAG may also contain one or more SCells, if configured. The UE may also be configured with one or more sTAGs, in which case the pTAG may contain one PCell and the sTAG may contain at least one SCell with configured uplink. In pTAG, UE may use the PCell as the reference cell for deriving the UE transmit timing for cells in the pTAG. The UE may employ a synchronization signal on the reference cell to drive downlink timing. When a UE is configured with an sTAG, the UE may use an activated SCell from the sTAG for deriving the UE transmit timing for cell in the sTAG.
  • In at least one of the various embodiments, uplink physical channel(s) may correspond to a set of resource elements carrying information originating from higher layers. The following example uplink physical channel(s) may be defined for uplink: a) Physical Uplink Shared Channel (PUSCH), b) Physical Uplink Control Channel (PUCCH), c) Physical Random Access Channel (PRACH), and/or the like. Uplink physical signal(s) may be used by the physical layer and may not carry information originating from higher layers. For example, reference signal(s) may be considered as uplink physical signal(s). Transmitted signal(s) in slot(s) may be described by one or several resource grids including, for example, subcarriers and SC-FDMA or OFDMA symbols. Antenna port(s) may be defined such that the channel over which symbol(s) on antenna port(s) may be conveyed and/or inferred from the channel over which other symbol(s) on the same antenna port(s) is/are conveyed. There may be one resource grid per antenna port. The antenna port(s) used for transmission of physical channel(s) or signal(s) may depend on the number of antenna port(s) configured for the physical channel(s) or signal(s).
  • According to some of the various aspects of embodiments, cell search may be the procedure by which a wireless device may acquire time and frequency synchronization with a cell and may detect the physical layer Cell ID of that cell (transmitter). An example embodiment for synchronization signal and cell search is presented below. A cell search may support a scalable overall transmission bandwidth corresponding to 6 resource blocks and upwards. Primary and secondary synchronization signals may be transmitted in the downlink and may facilitate cell search. For example, 504 unique physical-layer cell identities may be defined using synchronization signals. The physical-layer cell identities may be grouped into 168 unique physical-layer cell-identity groups, group(s) containing three unique identities. The grouping may be such that physical-layer cell identit(ies) is part of a physical-layer cell-identity group. A physical-layer cell identity may be defined by a number in the range of 0 to 167, representing the physical-layer cell-identity group, and a number in the range of 0 to 2, representing the physical-layer identity within the physical-layer cell-identity group. The synchronization signal may include a primary synchronization signal and a secondary synchronization signal.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, physical downlink control channel(s) may carry transport format, scheduling assignments, uplink power control, and other control information. PDCCH may support multiple formats. Multiple PDCCH packets may be transmitted in a subframe. According to some of the various embodiments, scheduling control packet(s) may be transmitted for packet(s) or group(s) of packets transmitted in downlink shared channel(s). Scheduling control packet(s) may include information about subcarriers used for packet transmission(s). PDCCH may also provide power control commands for uplink channels. PDCCH channel(s) may carry a plurality of downlink control packets in subframe(s). Enhance PDCCH may be implemented in a cell as an option to carrier control information. According to some of the various embodiments, PHICH may carry the hybrid-ARQ (automatic repeat request) ACK/NACK.
  • Other arrangements for PCFICH, PHICH, PDCCH, enhanced PDCCH, and/or PDSCH may be supported. The configurations presented here are for example purposes. In another example, resources PCFICH, PHICH, and/or PDCCH radio resources may be transmitted in radio resources including a subset of subcarriers and pre-defined time duration in each or some of the subframes. In an example, PUSCH resource(s) may start from the first symbol. In another example embodiment, radio resource configuration(s) for PUSCH, PUCCH, and/or PRACH (physical random access channel) may use a different configuration. For example, channels may be time multiplexed, or time/frequency multiplexed when mapped to uplink radio resources.
  • According to some of the various aspects of embodiments, the physical layer random access preamble may comprise a cyclic prefix of length Tcp and a sequence part of length Tseq. The parameter values may be pre-defined and depend on the frame structure and a random access configuration. In an example embodiment, Tcp may be 0.1 msec, and Tseq may be 0.9 msec. Higher layers may control the preamble format. The transmission of a random access preamble, if triggered by the MAC layer, may be restricted to certain time and frequency resources. The start of a random access preamble may be aligned with the start of the corresponding uplink subframe at a wireless device.
  • According to an example embodiment, random access preambles may be generated from Zadoff-Chu sequences with a zero correlation zone, generated from one or several root Zadoff-Chu sequences. In another example embodiment, the preambles may also be generated using other random sequences such as Gold sequences. The network may configure the set of preamble sequences a wireless device may be allowed to use. According to some of the various aspects of embodiments, there may be a multitude of preambles (e.g. 64) available in cell(s). From the physical layer perspective, the physical layer random access procedure may include the transmission of random access preamble(s) and random access response(s). Remaining message(s) may be scheduled for transmission by a higher layer on the shared data channel and may not be considered part of the physical layer random access procedure. For example, a random access channel may occupy 6 resource blocks in a subframe or set of consecutive subframes reserved for random access preamble transmissions.
  • According to some of the various embodiments, the following actions may be followed for a physical random access procedure: 1) layer 1 procedure may be triggered upon request of a preamble transmission by higher layers; 2) a preamble index, a target preamble received power, a corresponding RA-RNTI (random access-radio network temporary identifier) and/or a PRACH resource may be indicated by higher layers as part of a request; 3) a preamble transmission power P_PRACH may be determined; 4) a preamble sequence may be selected from the preamble sequence set using the preamble index; 5) a single preamble may be transmitted using selected preamble sequence(s) with transmission power P_PRACH on the indicated PRACH resource; 6) detection of a PDCCH with the indicated RAR may be attempted during a window controlled by higher layers; and/or the like. If detected, the corresponding downlink shared channel transport block may be passed to higher layers. The higher layers may parse transport block(s) and/or indicate an uplink grant to the physical layer(s).
  • According to some of the various aspects of embodiments, a random access procedure may be initiated by a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) order and/or by the MAC sublayer in a wireless device. If a wireless device receives a PDCCH transmission consistent with a PDCCH order masked with its radio identifier, the wireless device may initiate a random access procedure. Preamble transmission(s) on physical random access channel(s) (PRACH) may be supported on a first uplink carrier and reception of a PDCCH order may be supported on a first downlink carrier.
  • Before a wireless device initiates transmission of a random access preamble, it may access one or many of the following types of information: a) available set(s) of PRACH resources for the transmission of a random access preamble; b) group(s) of random access preambles and set(s) of available random access preambles in group(s); c) random access response window size(s); d) power-ramping factor(s); e) maximum number(s) of preamble transmission(s); f) initial preamble power; g) preamble format based offset(s); h) contention resolution timer(s); and/or the like. These parameters may be updated from upper layers or may be received from the base station before random access procedure(s) may be initiated.
  • According to some of the various aspects of embodiments, a wireless device may select a random access preamble using available information. The preamble may be signaled by a base station or the preamble may be randomly selected by the wireless device. The wireless device may determine the next available subframe containing PRACH permitted by restrictions given by the base station and the physical layer timing requirements for TDD or FDD. Subframe timing and the timing of transmitting the random access preamble may be determined based, at least in part, on synchronization signals received from the base station and/or the information received from the base station. The wireless device may proceed to the transmission of the random access preamble when it has determined the timing. The random access preamble may be transmitted on a second plurality of subcarriers on the first uplink carrier.
  • According to some of the various aspects of embodiments, once a random access preamble is transmitted, a wireless device may monitor the PDCCH of a primary carrier for random access response(s), in a random access response window. There may be a pre-known identifier in PDCCH that identifies a random access response. The wireless device may stop monitoring for random access response(s) after successful reception of a random access response containing random access preamble identifiers that matches the transmitted random access preamble and/or a random access response address to a wireless device identifier. A base station random access response may include a time alignment command. The wireless device may process the received time alignment command and may adjust its uplink transmission timing according the time alignment value in the command. For example, in a random access response, a time alignment command may be coded using 11 bits, where an amount of the time alignment may be based on the value in the command. In an example embodiment, when an uplink transmission is required, the base station may provide the wireless device a grant for uplink transmission.
  • If no random access response is received within the random access response window, and/or if none of the received random access responses contains a random access preamble identifier corresponding to the transmitted random access preamble, the random access response reception may be considered unsuccessful and the wireless device may, based on the backoff parameter in the wireless device, select a random backoff time and delay the subsequent random access transmission by the backoff time, and may retransmit another random access preamble.
  • According to some of the various aspects of embodiments, a wireless device may transmit packets on an uplink carrier. Uplink packet transmission timing may be calculated in the wireless device using the timing of synchronization signal(s) received in a downlink. Upon reception of a timing alignment command by the wireless device, the wireless device may adjust its uplink transmission timing. The timing alignment command may indicate the change of the uplink timing relative to the current uplink timing. The uplink transmission timing for an uplink carrier may be determined using time alignment commands and/or downlink reference signals.
  • According to some of the various aspects of embodiments, a time alignment command may indicate timing adjustment for transmission of signals on uplink carriers. For example, a time alignment command may use 6 bits. Adjustment of the uplink timing by a positive or a negative amount indicates advancing or delaying the uplink transmission timing by a given amount respectively.
  • For a timing alignment command received on subframe n, the corresponding adjustment of the timing may be applied with some delay, for example, it may be applied from the beginning of subframe n+6. When the wireless device's uplink transmissions in subframe n and subframe n+1 are overlapped due to the timing adjustment, the wireless device may transmit complete subframe n and may not transmit the overlapped part of subframe n+1.
  • According to some of the various aspects of embodiments, control message(s) or control packet(s) may be scheduled for transmission in a physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH) and/or physical uplink shared channel PUSCH. PDSCH and PUSCH may carry control and data message(s)/packet(s). Control message(s) and/or packet(s) may be processed before transmission. For example, the control message(s) and/or packet(s) may be fragmented or multiplexed before transmission. A control message in an upper layer may be processed as a data packet in the MAC or physical layer. For example, system information block(s), radio resource control messages, and data traffic may be scheduled for transmission in PDSCH.
  • According to some of the various aspects of embodiments, a wireless device may be preconfigured with one or more carriers. When the wireless device is configured with more than one carrier, the base station and/or wireless device may activate and/or deactivate the configured carriers. One of the carriers (the primary carrier) may always be activated. Other carriers may be deactivated by default and/or may be activated by a base station when needed. A base station may activate and deactivate carriers by sending an activation/deactivation MAC control element. Furthermore, the UE may maintain a carrier deactivation timer per configured carrier and deactivate the associated carrier upon its expiry. The same initial timer value may apply to instance(s) of the carrier deactivation timer. The initial value of the timer may be configured by a network. The configured carriers (unless the primary carrier) may be initially deactivated upon addition and after a handover.
  • According to some of the various aspects of embodiments, if a wireless device receives an activation/deactivation MAC control element activating the carrier, the wireless device may activate the carrier, and/or may apply normal carrier operation including: sounding reference signal transmissions on the carrier (if the carrier is uplink time aligned), CQI (channel quality indicator)/PMI (precoding matrix indicator)/RI (ranking indicator) reporting for the carrier, PDCCH monitoring on the carrier, PDCCH monitoring for the carrier, start or restart the carrier deactivation timer associated with the carrier, and/or the like. If the device receives an activation/deactivation MAC control element deactivating the carrier, and/or if the carrier deactivation timer associated with the activated carrier expires, the base station or device may deactivate the carrier, and may stop the carrier deactivation timer associated with the carrier, and/or may flush HARQ buffers associated with the carrier.
  • If PDCCH on a carrier scheduling the activated carrier indicates an uplink grant or a downlink assignment for the activated carrier, the device may restart the carrier deactivation timer associated with the carrier. When a carrier is deactivated, the wireless device may not transmit SRS (sounding reference signal) for the carrier, may not report CQI/PMI/RI for the carrier, may not transmit on UL-SCH for the carrier, may not monitor the PDCCH on the carrier, and/or may not monitor the PDCCH for the carrier.
  • A process to assign subcarriers to data packets may be executed by a MAC layer scheduler. The decision on assigning subcarriers to a packet may be made based on data packet size, resources required for transmission of data packets (number of radio resource blocks), modulation and coding assigned to data packet(s), QoS required by the data packets (i.e. QoS parameters assigned to data packet bearer), the service class of a subscriber receiving the data packet, or subscriber device capability, a combination of the above, and/or the like.
  • According to some of the various aspects of embodiments, packets may be referred to service data units and/or protocols data units at Layer 1, Layer 2 and/or Layer 3 of the communications network. Layer 2 in an LTE network may include three sub-layers: PDCP sub-layer, RLC sub-layer, and MAC sub-layer. A layer 2 packet may be a PDCP packet, an RLC packet or a MAC layer packet. Layer 3 in an LTE network may be Internet Protocol (IP) layer, and a layer 3 packet may be an IP data packet. Packets may be transmitted and received via an air interface physical layer. A packet at the physical layer may be called a transport block. Many of the various embodiments may be implemented at one or many different communication network layers. For example, some of the actions may be executed by the PDCP layer and some others by the MAC layer or PHY layer.
  • According to some of the various aspects of embodiments, a radio bearer may be a GBR (guaranteed bit rate) bearer and/or a non-GBR bearer. A GBR and/or guaranteed bit rate bearer may be employed for transfer of real-time packets, and/or a non-GBR bearer may be used for transfer of non-real-time packets. The non-GBR bearer may be assigned a plurality of attributes including: a scheduling priority, an allocation and retention priority, a portable device aggregate maximum bit rate, and/or the like. These parameters may be used by the scheduler in scheduling non-GBR packets. GBR bearers may be assigned attributes such as delay, jitter, packet loss parameters, and/or the like.
  • According to some of the various aspects of embodiments, the transmitter in the disclosed embodiments of the present invention may be a wireless device (also called user equipment), a base station (also called eNodeB), a relay node transmitter, and/or the like. The receiver in the disclosed embodiments of the present invention may be a wireless device (also called user equipment-UE), a base station (also called eNodeB), a relay node receiver, and/or the like.
  • According to some of the various aspects of embodiments, the MAC layer in some wireless device(s) may report buffer size(s) of either a single Logical Channel Group (LCG) or a group of LCGs to a base station. An LCG may be a group of logical channels identified by an LCG ID. The mapping of logical channel(s) to LCG may be set up during radio configuration. Buffer status report(s) may be used by a MAC scheduler to assign radio resources for packet transmission from wireless device(s). HARQ and ARQ processes may be used for packet retransmission to enhance the reliability of radio transmission and reduce the overall probability of packet loss.
  • In this specification, “a” and “an” and similar phrases are to be interpreted as “at least one” and “one or more.” In this specification, the term “may” is to be interpreted as “may, for example,” In other words, the term “may” is indicative that the phrase following the term “may” is an example of one of a multitude of suitable possibilities that may, or may not, be employed to one or more of the various embodiments. If A and B are sets and every element of A is also an element of B, A is called a subset of B. In this specification, only non-empty sets and subsets are considered. For example, possible subsets of B={cell1, cell2} are: {cell1}, {cell2}, and {cell1, cell2}.
  • In this specification, parameters (Information elements: IEs) may comprise one or more objects, and each of those objects may comprise one or more other objects. For example, if parameter (IE) N comprises parameter (IE) M, and parameter (IE) M comprises parameter (IE) K, and parameter (IE) K comprises parameter (information element) J, then, for example, N comprises K, and N comprises J.
  • Many of the elements described in the disclosed embodiments may be implemented as modules. A module is defined here as an isolatable element that performs a defined function and has a defined interface to other elements. The modules described in this disclosure may be implemented in hardware, software in combination with hardware, firmware, wetware (i.e hardware with a biological element) or a combination thereof, all of which are behaviorally equivalent. For example, modules may be implemented as a software routine written in a computer language configured to be executed by a hardware machine (such as C, C++, Fortran, Java, Basic, Matlab or the like) or a modeling/simulation program such as Simulink, Stateflow, GNU Octave, or Lab VIEWMathScript. Additionally, it may be possible to implement modules using physical hardware that incorporates discrete or programmable analog, digital and/or quantum hardware. Examples of programmable hardware comprise: computers, microcontrollers, microprocessors, application-specific integrated circuits (ASICs); field programmable gate arrays (FPGAs); and complex programmable logic devices (CPLDs). Computers, microcontrollers and microprocessors are programmed using languages such as assembly, C, C++ or the like. FPGAs, ASICs and CPLDs are often programmed using hardware description languages (HDL) such as VHSIC hardware description language (VHDL) or Verilog that configure connections between internal hardware modules with lesser functionality on a programmable device. Finally, it needs to be emphasized that the above mentioned technologies are often used in combination to achieve the result of a functional module.
  • The disclosure of this patent document incorporates material which is subject to copyright protection. The copyright owner has no objection to the facsimile reproduction by anyone of the patent document or the patent disclosure, as it appears in the Patent and Trademark Office patent file or records, for the limited purposes required by law, but otherwise reserves all copyright rights whatsoever.
  • While various embodiments have been described above, it should be understood that they have been presented by way of example, and not limitation. It will be apparent to persons skilled in the relevant art(s) that various changes in form and detail can be made therein without departing from the spirit and scope. In fact, after reading the above description, it will be apparent to one skilled in the relevant art(s) how to implement alternative embodiments. Thus, the present embodiments should not be limited by any of the above described exemplary embodiments. In particular, it should be noted that, for example purposes, the above explanation has focused on the example(s) using FDD communication systems. However, one skilled in the art will recognize that embodiments of the invention may also be implemented in TDD communication systems. The disclosed methods and systems may be implemented in wireless or wireline systems. The features of various embodiments presented in this invention may be combined. One or many features (method or system) of one embodiment may be implemented in other embodiments. Only a limited number of example combinations are shown to indicate to one skilled in the art the possibility of features that may be combined in various embodiments to create enhanced transmission and reception systems and methods.
  • In addition, it should be understood that any figures which highlight the functionality and advantages, are presented for example purposes only. The disclosed architecture is sufficiently flexible and configurable, such that it may be utilized in ways other than that shown. For example, the actions listed in any flowchart may be re-ordered or only optionally used in some embodiments.
  • Further, the purpose of the Abstract of the Disclosure is to enable the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office and the public generally, and especially the scientists, engineers and practitioners in the art who are not familiar with patent or legal terms or phraseology, to determine quickly from a cursory inspection the nature and essence of the technical disclosure of the application. The Abstract of the Disclosure is not intended to be limiting as to the scope in any way.
  • Finally, it is the applicant's intent that only claims that include the express language “means for” or “step for” be interpreted under 35 U.S.C. 112, paragraph 6. Claims that do not expressly include the phrase “means for” or “step for” are not to be interpreted under 35 U.S.C. 112, paragraph 6.

Claims (20)

What is claimed is:
1. A method comprising:
a) receiving, by a wireless device, at least one control message from a base station, said at least one control message causing in said wireless device:
i) configuration of a plurality of cells comprising a primary cell and at least one secondary cell;
ii) assignment of each of said at least one secondary cell to a cell group in a plurality of cell groups, said plurality of cell groups comprising:
(1) a primary cell group comprising a first subset of said plurality of cells, said first subset comprising said primary cell; and
(2) a secondary cell group comprising a second subset of said at least one secondary cell; and
iii) configuration of transmissions of sounding reference signals on a secondary cell in said secondary cell group;
b) receiving, by said wireless device, an activation command to activate said secondary cell in said wireless device;
c) receiving, by said wireless device, a control command configured to cause transmission of a random access preamble on random access resources of one of said at least one secondary cell in said second subset;
d) receiving, by said wireless device, a random access response, said random access response comprising a timing advance command for said secondary cell group; and
e) transmitting, by said wireless device, one or more of said sounding reference signals on said secondary cell after applying said timing advance command to said secondary cell group, said wireless device configured to not transmit any of said sounding reference signals on said secondary cell during a period between receiving said at least one control message and applying said timing advance command to said secondary cell group.
2. The method of claim 1, wherein said sounding reference signals are type zero sounding reference signals.
3. The method of claim 1, wherein said sounding reference signals are configured to be transmitted during a time period.
4. The method of claim 1, wherein said one or more of said sounding reference signals are transmitted on the last symbol of a plurality of subframes.
5. The method of claim 1, further comprising dropping transmission of a sounding reference signal in said sounding reference signals in a subframe of said secondary cell if said wireless device is power limited in said subframe.
6. The method of claim 1, further comprising dropping transmission of a sounding reference signal in said sounding reference signals in a subframe of said secondary cell if said wireless device transmits data in said subframe of said secondary cell.
7. The method of claim 1, wherein applying said timing advance command causes substantial alignment of reception timing of uplink signals in frames and subframes of said secondary cell group at said base station.
8. The method of claim 1, wherein said wireless device drops at least one sounding reference signal if one or more pre-defined conditions are met.
9. The method of claim 1, wherein said random access response comprises a preamble identifier, said preamble identifier identifying said random access preamble.
10. The method of claim 1, wherein said at least one control message further causes configuration of said random access resources.
11. A method comprising:
a) receiving, by a wireless device, at least one control message from a base station, said at least one control message causing in said wireless device:
i) configuration of a plurality of cells comprising a primary cell and at least one secondary cell; and
ii) assignment of each of said at least one secondary cell to a cell group in a plurality of cell groups, said plurality of cell groups comprising:
(1) a primary cell group comprising a first subset of said plurality of cells, said first subset comprising said primary cell; and
(2) a secondary cell group comprising a second subset of said at least one secondary cell;
b) receiving, by said wireless device, a control command configured to cause transmission of a random access preamble on random access resources of one of said at least one secondary cell in said second subset;
c) receiving, by said wireless device, a random access response, said random access response comprising a timing advance command for said secondary cell group;
d) receiving, by a wireless device, a second control message from said base station, said second control message causing in said wireless device configuration of transmissions of sounding reference signals on a secondary cell in said secondary cell group; and
e) transmit one or more of said sounding reference signals on said secondary cell after applying said timing advance command to said secondary cell group, said wireless device configured to not transmit any of said sounding reference signals on said secondary cell during a period between receiving said at least one control message and applying said timing advance command to said secondary cell group.
12. The method of claim 11, wherein said at least one control message is configured to further cause in said wireless device configuration of a time alignment timer for each of said plurality of cell groups, said time alignment timer starting or restarting in response to said wireless device receiving a timing advance command to adjust uplink transmission timing of a commanded cell group in said plurality of cell groups.
13. The method of claim 11, wherein applying said timing advance command causes substantial alignment of reception timing of uplink signals in frames and subframes of said secondary cell group at said base station.
14. The method of claim 11, wherein said wireless device drops at least one sounding reference signal if one or more pre-defined conditions are met.
15. The method of claim 11, wherein said random access response comprises a preamble identifier, said preamble identifier identifying said random access preamble.
16. A wireless device comprising:
a) one or more communication interfaces;
b) one or more processors; and
c) memory storing instructions that, when executed, cause said wireless device to:
i) receive at least one control message from a base station, said at least one control message causing in said wireless device:
(1) configuration of a plurality of cells comprising a primary cell and at least one secondary cell;
(2) assignment of each of said at least one secondary cell to a cell group in a plurality of cell groups, said plurality of cell groups comprising:
(a) a primary cell group comprising a first subset of said plurality of cells, said first subset comprising said primary cell; and
(b) a secondary cell group comprising a second subset of said at least one secondary cell; and
(3) transmissions of sounding reference signals on a secondary cell in said secondary cell group; and
ii) receive a control command configured to cause transmission of a random access preamble on random access resources of one of said at least one secondary cell in said second subset;
iii) receive a random access response, said random access response comprising a timing advance command for said secondary cell group; and
iv) transmitting, by said wireless device, one or more of said sounding reference signals on said secondary cell after applying said timing advance command to said secondary cell group, said wireless device configured to not transmit any of said sounding reference signals on said secondary cell during a period between receiving said at least one control message and applying said timing advance command to said secondary cell group.
17. The wireless device of claim 16, wherein said sounding reference signals are type zero sounding reference signals.
18. The wireless device of claim 16, wherein said sounding reference signals are configured to be transmitted during a period.
19. The wireless device of claim 16, wherein said one or more of said sounding reference signals are transmitted on the last symbol of a plurality of subframes.
20. The wireless device of claim 16, further said instructions further cause said wireless device to drop transmission of a sounding reference signal in said sounding reference signals in a subframe of said secondary cell if said wireless device is power limited in said subframe.
US13/899,618 2012-01-25 2013-05-22 Uplink sounding transmission with carrier aggregation Active US8531966B1 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US13/899,618 US8531966B1 (en) 2012-01-25 2013-05-22 Uplink sounding transmission with carrier aggregation
US13/947,052 US8553558B1 (en) 2012-01-25 2013-07-20 Uplink sounding transmission with carrier aggregation

Applications Claiming Priority (5)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US201261590366P 2012-01-25 2012-01-25
US201261618830P 2012-04-01 2012-04-01
US201261661329P 2012-06-18 2012-06-18
US13/749,695 US8526310B2 (en) 2012-01-25 2013-01-25 Secondary cell sounding transmission
US13/899,618 US8531966B1 (en) 2012-01-25 2013-05-22 Uplink sounding transmission with carrier aggregation

Related Parent Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US13/749,695 Continuation US8526310B2 (en) 2012-01-25 2013-01-25 Secondary cell sounding transmission

Related Child Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US13/947,052 Continuation US8553558B1 (en) 2012-01-25 2013-07-20 Uplink sounding transmission with carrier aggregation

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
US8531966B1 US8531966B1 (en) 2013-09-10
US20130250929A1 true US20130250929A1 (en) 2013-09-26

Family

ID=47679059

Family Applications (9)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US13/748,583 Active 2033-11-16 US9237537B2 (en) 2012-01-25 2013-01-23 Random access process in a multicarrier base station and wireless device
US13/749,695 Active US8526310B2 (en) 2012-01-25 2013-01-25 Secondary cell sounding transmission
US13/899,618 Active US8531966B1 (en) 2012-01-25 2013-05-22 Uplink sounding transmission with carrier aggregation
US13/947,052 Active US8553558B1 (en) 2012-01-25 2013-07-20 Uplink sounding transmission with carrier aggregation
US14/969,682 Active 2033-04-18 US10154500B2 (en) 2012-01-25 2015-12-15 Wireless multicarrier random access process
US16/168,178 Active 2033-04-02 US11013011B2 (en) 2012-01-25 2018-10-23 Wireless multicarrier random access process
US17/225,804 Active US11516812B2 (en) 2012-01-25 2021-04-08 Resource allocation for multicarrier communications
US17/975,372 Active US11903000B2 (en) 2012-01-25 2022-10-27 Resource allocation for multicarrier communications
US18/396,170 Pending US20240188112A1 (en) 2012-01-25 2023-12-26 Resource Allocation for Multicarrier Communications

Family Applications Before (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US13/748,583 Active 2033-11-16 US9237537B2 (en) 2012-01-25 2013-01-23 Random access process in a multicarrier base station and wireless device
US13/749,695 Active US8526310B2 (en) 2012-01-25 2013-01-25 Secondary cell sounding transmission

Family Applications After (6)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US13/947,052 Active US8553558B1 (en) 2012-01-25 2013-07-20 Uplink sounding transmission with carrier aggregation
US14/969,682 Active 2033-04-18 US10154500B2 (en) 2012-01-25 2015-12-15 Wireless multicarrier random access process
US16/168,178 Active 2033-04-02 US11013011B2 (en) 2012-01-25 2018-10-23 Wireless multicarrier random access process
US17/225,804 Active US11516812B2 (en) 2012-01-25 2021-04-08 Resource allocation for multicarrier communications
US17/975,372 Active US11903000B2 (en) 2012-01-25 2022-10-27 Resource allocation for multicarrier communications
US18/396,170 Pending US20240188112A1 (en) 2012-01-25 2023-12-26 Resource Allocation for Multicarrier Communications

Country Status (3)

Country Link
US (9) US9237537B2 (en)
EP (2) EP2947933B1 (en)
WO (1) WO2013112773A1 (en)

Cited By (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2019139962A1 (en) * 2018-01-09 2019-07-18 Ofinno, Llc Physical and mac layer processes in a wireless device
US10382238B2 (en) * 2015-07-05 2019-08-13 Ofinno, Llc Uplink signal transmission in a wireless device
WO2021026802A1 (en) * 2019-08-14 2021-02-18 Qualcomm Incorporated Timing advance adjustment for downlink carrier aggregation
US11751082B2 (en) * 2019-05-21 2023-09-05 Qualcomm Incorporated Reporting of information related to sounding reference signals (SRS) timing adjustments

Families Citing this family (147)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US7940746B2 (en) 2004-08-24 2011-05-10 Comcast Cable Holdings, Llc Method and system for locating a voice over internet protocol (VoIP) device connected to a network
WO2011084027A2 (en) 2010-01-11 2011-07-14 엘지전자 주식회사 Method for communicating with data through component carriers in mobile communication system to which carrier aggregation method is applied and apparatus therefor
KR101862410B1 (en) * 2011-03-29 2018-05-29 엘지전자 주식회사 Method and apparatus for managing uplink time alignment
US8395985B2 (en) 2011-07-25 2013-03-12 Ofinno Technologies, Llc Time alignment in multicarrier OFDM network
US8964780B2 (en) 2012-01-25 2015-02-24 Ofinno Technologies, Llc Sounding in multicarrier wireless communications
US9237537B2 (en) 2012-01-25 2016-01-12 Ofinno Technologies, Llc Random access process in a multicarrier base station and wireless device
US8964683B2 (en) 2012-04-20 2015-02-24 Ofinno Technologies, Llc Sounding signal in a multicarrier wireless device
EP3937551A3 (en) * 2012-01-25 2022-02-09 Comcast Cable Communications, LLC Random access channel in multicarrier wireless communications with timing advance groups
DK2813025T3 (en) * 2012-02-07 2017-02-06 ERICSSON TELEFON AB L M (publ) METHOD AND DEVICE FOR SENDING TIMING ADJUSTMENT
US20130242892A1 (en) * 2012-03-16 2013-09-19 Acer Incorporated Apparatuses and methods for handling random access procedures
KR101885540B1 (en) 2012-03-23 2018-09-11 주식회사 골드피크이노베이션즈 Apparatus and method for uplink synchronizing in multiple component carrier system
US11943813B2 (en) 2012-04-01 2024-03-26 Comcast Cable Communications, Llc Cell grouping for wireless communications
US20130258956A1 (en) 2012-04-01 2013-10-03 Esmael Hejazi Dinan Random Access Process in a Wireless Device
EP2835023B1 (en) 2012-04-01 2021-09-01 Comcast Cable Communications, LLC Cell group configuration in a wireless device and base station with timing advance groups
WO2013151348A1 (en) * 2012-04-04 2013-10-10 Lg Electronics Inc. Method and apparatus of controlling cell activation in a wireless communication system
US11252679B2 (en) 2012-04-16 2022-02-15 Comcast Cable Communications, Llc Signal transmission power adjustment in a wireless device
US9210664B2 (en) 2012-04-17 2015-12-08 Ofinno Technologies. LLC Preamble transmission in a wireless device
US11582704B2 (en) 2012-04-16 2023-02-14 Comcast Cable Communications, Llc Signal transmission power adjustment in a wireless device
US8964593B2 (en) 2012-04-16 2015-02-24 Ofinno Technologies, Llc Wireless device transmission power
US11825419B2 (en) 2012-04-16 2023-11-21 Comcast Cable Communications, Llc Cell timing in a wireless device and base station
WO2013158511A1 (en) * 2012-04-16 2013-10-24 Dinan Esmael Hejazi Cell group configuration for uplink transmission in a multicarrier wireless device and base station with timing advance groups
US9179425B2 (en) 2012-04-17 2015-11-03 Ofinno Technologies, Llc Transmit power control in multicarrier communications
JP5302438B1 (en) * 2012-04-20 2013-10-02 株式会社エヌ・ティ・ティ・ドコモ Mobile station
WO2013168917A1 (en) 2012-05-09 2013-11-14 삼성전자 주식회사 Method and apparatus for transmitting and receiving data using plurality of carriers in mobile communication system
EP2849501B1 (en) * 2012-05-09 2020-09-30 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method and apparatus for controlling discontinuous reception in mobile communication system
JP5426718B2 (en) * 2012-05-10 2014-02-26 株式会社Nttドコモ Mobile station and radio base station
CN109982378A (en) 2012-05-21 2019-07-05 三星电子株式会社 Method and apparatus for transmitting and receiving data in mobile communication system
JP6348712B2 (en) * 2012-05-31 2018-06-27 パナソニック インテレクチュアル プロパティ コーポレーション オブ アメリカPanasonic Intellectual Property Corporation of America Wireless communication terminal, wireless communication device, wireless communication system, and uplink resource request processing method
US11622372B2 (en) 2012-06-18 2023-04-04 Comcast Cable Communications, Llc Communication device
US9210619B2 (en) 2012-06-20 2015-12-08 Ofinno Technologies, Llc Signalling mechanisms for wireless device handover
US11882560B2 (en) 2012-06-18 2024-01-23 Comcast Cable Communications, Llc Carrier grouping in multicarrier wireless networks
US9107206B2 (en) 2012-06-18 2015-08-11 Ofinne Technologies, LLC Carrier grouping in multicarrier wireless networks
US9113387B2 (en) 2012-06-20 2015-08-18 Ofinno Technologies, Llc Handover signalling in wireless networks
US9179457B2 (en) 2012-06-20 2015-11-03 Ofinno Technologies, Llc Carrier configuration in wireless networks
US8971298B2 (en) 2012-06-18 2015-03-03 Ofinno Technologies, Llc Wireless device connection to an application server
US9084228B2 (en) 2012-06-20 2015-07-14 Ofinno Technologies, Llc Automobile communication device
WO2014021664A1 (en) * 2012-08-01 2014-02-06 엘지전자 주식회사 Method for signaling control information, and apparatus therefor
GB201214137D0 (en) * 2012-08-07 2012-09-19 Gen Dynamics Broadband Inc Communication unit, integrated circuit and method for supporting a virtual carrier
US9226290B2 (en) 2012-08-16 2015-12-29 Qualcomm Incorporated Multiple timing advance groups (TAGS) for UL carrier aggregation (CA)
WO2014032281A1 (en) * 2012-08-31 2014-03-06 华为技术有限公司 Method for adding secondary cell, base station and terminal
EP3883170B1 (en) 2012-09-28 2022-11-30 BlackBerry Limited Methods and apparatus for enabling enhancements to flexible subframes in lte heterogeneous networks
US9930646B2 (en) * 2012-10-10 2018-03-27 Lg Electronics Inc. Method and user device for receiving uplink control information, and method and base station for transmitting uplink information
WO2014088479A1 (en) * 2012-12-04 2014-06-12 Telefonaktiebolaget L M Ericsson (Publ) Overload control in a communication network
WO2014112920A1 (en) * 2013-01-18 2014-07-24 Telefonaktiebolaget L M Ericsson (Publ) Avoiding serving cell interruption
CN104937868B (en) * 2013-01-24 2018-02-16 Lg电子株式会社 The method of secondary cell is added in the wireless access system for supporting carrier aggregation and supports its device
US10326569B2 (en) 2013-02-12 2019-06-18 Altiostar Networks, Inc. Inter-site carrier aggregation with physical uplink control channel monitoring
US10009803B2 (en) 2013-02-12 2018-06-26 Altiostar Networks, Inc. Long term evolution radio access network
KR20140102112A (en) * 2013-02-13 2014-08-21 주식회사 케이티 Methods and apparatuses for activating or deactivating small cells
CN104995982B (en) * 2013-02-15 2018-12-04 Lg电子株式会社 According to bandwidth transmission/receiving frame method and apparatus in wlan system
JP2014183464A (en) * 2013-03-19 2014-09-29 Fujitsu Ltd Pilot signal scheduling method, frequency deviation estimation method, and wireless apparatus
EP2991401B1 (en) * 2013-05-27 2017-11-01 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Transmission of old and new system information of a target base station in a handover
KR101615803B1 (en) 2013-07-25 2016-04-26 주식회사 케이티 Methods of controlling and configuring carrier aggregation and apparatuses thereof
KR101615804B1 (en) 2013-07-26 2016-04-26 주식회사 케이티 Methods of controlling carrier aggregation in Small cell deployment and apparatuses thereof
KR101882883B1 (en) * 2013-08-13 2018-07-27 후아웨이 테크놀러지 컴퍼니 리미티드 Method for sending preamble sequence and user equipment
WO2015030483A1 (en) * 2013-08-27 2015-03-05 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method and system for random access procedure and radio link failure in inter-enb carrier aggregation
CN105684496B (en) * 2013-10-23 2019-05-31 Lg电子株式会社 Method and device thereof for report radio link problem
JP2015088997A (en) * 2013-10-31 2015-05-07 株式会社Nttドコモ Mobile station
US10117170B2 (en) * 2014-01-08 2018-10-30 Lg Electronics Inc. Method and an apparatus of wireless communication
CN105940753B (en) * 2014-01-29 2020-03-24 三星电子株式会社 Random access method and apparatus in mobile communication system
US9538575B2 (en) * 2014-01-30 2017-01-03 Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha Systems and methods for dual-connectivity operation
JP6298329B2 (en) * 2014-03-20 2018-03-20 株式会社Nttドコモ User terminal, radio base station, and radio communication method
CN106105333B (en) * 2014-03-24 2018-11-09 瑞典爱立信有限公司 System and method for activating and deactivating multiple supplementary cells
KR20150114442A (en) * 2014-04-01 2015-10-12 삼성전자주식회사 Method and system for providing small cell deployment and access in a wireless communication system
US10141983B2 (en) 2014-05-08 2018-11-27 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method for activating pSCell and SCell in mobile communication system supporting dual connectivity
US10159062B2 (en) * 2014-05-19 2018-12-18 Lg Electronics Inc. Method and apparatus for indicating user equipment capability in wireless communication system
GB201412265D0 (en) * 2014-07-10 2014-08-27 Vodafone Ip Licensing Ltd Carrier aggregation activation
US9867146B2 (en) * 2014-08-06 2018-01-09 Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha Systems and methods for dual-connectivity operation
US10462713B2 (en) * 2014-10-30 2019-10-29 Qualcomm Incorporated Techniques for handover procedure management
KR101997901B1 (en) * 2014-11-07 2019-07-08 후아웨이 테크놀러지 컴퍼니 리미티드 Physical downlink control channel transmission method, base station device, and user equipment
WO2016108548A1 (en) * 2014-12-30 2016-07-07 Lg Electronics Inc. Method and apparatus for configuring bi-directional channel in wireless communication system
US10237858B2 (en) * 2015-01-13 2019-03-19 Lg Electronics Inc. Method for de-configuring a cell from PUCCH resource in a carrier aggregation system and a device therefor
US10912067B2 (en) * 2015-02-26 2021-02-02 Htc Corporation Device and method of handling communication operations with cells in timing advance groups
US9820298B2 (en) 2015-03-09 2017-11-14 Ofinno Technologies, Llc Scheduling request in a wireless device and wireless network
US10327236B2 (en) 2015-03-09 2019-06-18 Comcast Cable Communications, Llc Secondary cell in a wireless device and wireless network
US9929848B2 (en) * 2015-03-09 2018-03-27 Ofinno Technologies, Llc Secondary cell deactivation in carrier aggregation
CN107409317B (en) * 2015-03-09 2020-08-04 Lg 电子株式会社 Method for operating fast random access procedure in wireless communication system and apparatus therefor
US10182406B2 (en) 2015-03-09 2019-01-15 Comcast Cable Communications, Llc Power headroom report for a wireless device and a base station
US10271371B2 (en) 2015-03-09 2019-04-23 Ofinno Technologies, Llc Control channel of a secondary cell in a timing advance group
US10700845B2 (en) 2015-03-09 2020-06-30 Comcast Cable Communications, Llc Secondary cell deactivation in a wireless device and a base station
US9843955B2 (en) * 2015-03-09 2017-12-12 Ofinno Technologies, Llc Radio configuration in a carrier aggregation
US9820264B2 (en) 2015-03-09 2017-11-14 Ofinno Technologies, Llc Data and multicast signals in a wireless device and wireless network
US9871572B2 (en) 2015-03-09 2018-01-16 Ofinno Technologies, Llc Uplink control channel in a wireless network
US9992759B2 (en) 2015-03-09 2018-06-05 Ofinno Technologies, Llc Downlink multicast channel and data channel in a wireless network
US10447367B2 (en) * 2015-03-16 2019-10-15 Ofinno, Llc Channel state information transmission in a wireless device and wireless network
US10159110B2 (en) * 2015-03-27 2018-12-18 Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha Systems and methods for a physical uplink control channel on a secondary cell
US11641255B2 (en) 2015-04-05 2023-05-02 Comcast Cable Communications, Llc Uplink control information transmission in a wireless network
US9877334B2 (en) * 2015-04-05 2018-01-23 Ofinno Technologies, Llc Cell configuration in a wireless device and wireless network
CN112911622B (en) * 2015-04-10 2024-04-12 瑞典爱立信有限公司 Method and apparatus for uplink control channel transmission
US10165599B2 (en) * 2015-06-10 2018-12-25 Apple Inc. Random access procedures for link budget constrained wireless devices
US10200177B2 (en) 2015-06-12 2019-02-05 Comcast Cable Communications, Llc Scheduling request on a secondary cell of a wireless device
US9894681B2 (en) * 2015-06-12 2018-02-13 Ofinno Technologies, Llc Uplink scheduling in a wireless device and wireless network
US9948487B2 (en) 2015-06-15 2018-04-17 Ofinno Technologies, Llc Uplink resource allocation in a wireless network
US10588114B2 (en) * 2015-06-20 2020-03-10 Ofinno, Llc Uplink power control for a secondary cell in carrier aggregation
US10117187B2 (en) * 2015-06-20 2018-10-30 Ofinno Technologies, Llc Initializing uplink power in a wireless network
US10172124B2 (en) 2015-09-22 2019-01-01 Comcast Cable Communications, Llc Carrier selection in a multi-carrier wireless network
US10200164B2 (en) 2015-09-22 2019-02-05 Comcast Cable Communications, Llc Carrier activation in a multi-carrier wireless network
KR101990753B1 (en) 2015-10-17 2019-06-20 콤캐스트 케이블 커뮤니케이션스 엘엘씨 Control channel configuration in partial sub-frame and entire sub-frame
KR20170078530A (en) * 2015-12-29 2017-07-07 한국전자통신연구원 Method and apparatus for transmitting sounding reference signal in unlicensed wireless communication system, and method and apparatus for triggering transmission of sounding reference signal
CN108353387A (en) * 2015-12-30 2018-07-31 华为技术有限公司 Multicarrier processing method, base station and user equipment
US11026142B2 (en) * 2016-01-20 2021-06-01 Qualcomm Incorporated Techniques for providing uplink-based mobility
US10548121B2 (en) 2016-02-03 2020-01-28 Comcast Cable Communications, Llc Downlink and uplink channel transmission and monitoring in a wireless network
US10880921B2 (en) 2016-02-04 2020-12-29 Comcast Cable Communications, Llc Detection threshold for a wireless network
US20170265230A1 (en) 2016-03-14 2017-09-14 Futurewei Technologies, Inc. System and Method for Random Access Backoffs
US10932297B2 (en) * 2016-04-05 2021-02-23 Sony Corporation Wireless telecommunications apparatus and methods
US10791481B2 (en) 2016-04-08 2020-09-29 Altiostar Networks, Inc. Dual connectivity
US10499413B2 (en) 2016-04-08 2019-12-03 Altiostar Networks, Inc. Wireless data priority services
US10200992B2 (en) 2016-05-06 2019-02-05 Comcast Cable Communications, Llc Uplink signal starting position in a wireless device and wireless network
US20170325174A1 (en) 2016-05-09 2017-11-09 Ofinno Technologies, Llc Uplink transmission power control in a wireless device and wireless network
US11570708B2 (en) 2016-09-09 2023-01-31 Ofinno, Llc Deactivation timer management in a wireless device and wireless network
US10321398B2 (en) 2016-09-10 2019-06-11 Ofinno, Llc Deactivation timer management and cross carrier scheduling in a wireless device and wireless network
CN107872853B (en) * 2016-09-28 2020-07-24 华为技术有限公司 Data transmission method and equipment
US11032850B2 (en) 2016-09-30 2021-06-08 Qualcomm Incorporated PRACH and/or SRS switching enhancements
US11122473B2 (en) * 2016-10-11 2021-09-14 Kyocera Corporation Methods for a user equipment device to request MAC messages from a base station
US11147062B2 (en) 2016-10-14 2021-10-12 Comcast Cable Communications, Llc Dual connectivity power control for wireless network and wireless device
US10848977B2 (en) 2016-11-02 2020-11-24 Comcast Cable Communications, Llc Dual connectivity with licensed assisted access
US20180124831A1 (en) 2016-10-29 2018-05-03 Ofinno Technologies, Llc Dual connectivity scheduling request for wireless network and wireless device
US10652911B2 (en) * 2016-11-02 2020-05-12 Lg Electronics Inc. Method for dropping communication based on priority by wireless device supporting WAN communication and V2X communication and, the wireless device performing the method
US11706837B2 (en) 2016-11-04 2023-07-18 Lg Electronics Inc. Method and user equipment for transmitting uplink signals
EP3536062B1 (en) * 2016-11-04 2020-12-02 Telefonaktiebolaget LM Ericsson (PUBL) Methods, wireless communication device and location node for managing a location request
US10624034B2 (en) 2016-12-13 2020-04-14 Altiostar Networks, Inc. Power control in wireless communications
CN108271270B (en) * 2017-01-04 2020-02-28 电信科学技术研究院 SR/BSR triggering method and device
CN106856630B (en) * 2017-01-13 2018-12-11 北京小米移动软件有限公司 Resource allocation methods, device, user equipment and base station
CN108632897B (en) * 2017-03-15 2019-07-26 电信科学技术研究院 Obtain and issue the method and device of data
CN107196750B (en) 2017-06-08 2020-03-20 上海华为技术有限公司 Re-synchronization triggering method and base station
US11483119B2 (en) 2017-07-28 2022-10-25 Qualcomm Incorporated Secondary cell configuration signaling and activation field
US11197258B2 (en) 2017-08-10 2021-12-07 Beijing Xiaomi Mobile Software Co., Ltd. Timing advance group configuration
US10820366B2 (en) 2017-08-10 2020-10-27 Comcast Cable Communications, Llc Activation of grant-free transmission
JP6977066B2 (en) 2017-08-11 2021-12-08 エルジー エレクトロニクス インコーポレイティドLg Electronics Inc. A method for adjusting the uplink timing in a wireless communication system, and a device for this purpose.
US12022448B2 (en) 2017-08-11 2024-06-25 Qualcomm Incorporated Carrier switching for multiple carriers using the same components of a component path
CN110012499B (en) * 2018-01-04 2022-07-12 株式会社Kt Method for controlling SCell state and apparatus therefor
US10887843B2 (en) * 2018-05-11 2021-01-05 Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. Method and apparatus for transmitting an uplink transmission based on a pathloss estimate
CA3043813A1 (en) * 2018-05-18 2019-11-18 Comcast Cable Communications, Llc Cross-carrier scheduling with multiple active bandwidth parts
US11399410B2 (en) 2018-07-09 2022-07-26 Qualcomm Incorporated Techniques for controlling timing of downstream nodes in wireless communications
US11147117B2 (en) * 2018-09-28 2021-10-12 Mediatek Singapore Pte. Ltd. Timing advance validation for transmission in preconfigured uplink resources in NB-IoT
US11438821B2 (en) * 2018-10-26 2022-09-06 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd Method and system for handling beam blockage in wireless communication system
CN111294928A (en) * 2018-12-06 2020-06-16 夏普株式会社 Method performed by user equipment and user equipment
WO2020164964A1 (en) * 2019-02-15 2020-08-20 Nokia Technologies Oy Apparatus, methods, and computer programs
WO2020186532A1 (en) * 2019-03-21 2020-09-24 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 Radio communication method, terminal device and network device
WO2020192741A1 (en) * 2019-03-28 2020-10-01 FG Innovation Company Limited Method and apparatus with multi-pdsch reception and harq feedback transmission control
EP3952556A1 (en) * 2019-03-29 2022-02-09 Ntt Docomo, Inc. User equipment, base station apparatus, and communication method
US11563482B2 (en) * 2020-03-26 2023-01-24 Qualcomm Incorporated Configuration of a repeater via system information
US11252646B1 (en) 2020-06-19 2022-02-15 Sprint Communications Company L.P. Wireless data service delivery over wireless repeaters
CN113972964A (en) * 2020-07-22 2022-01-25 维沃移动通信有限公司 Transmission method of feedback information, terminal and network side equipment
US11464051B2 (en) * 2020-10-30 2022-10-04 Qualcomm Incorporated Aperiodic random access procedures
WO2022110048A1 (en) * 2020-11-27 2022-06-02 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 Information indication method and apparatus, terminal device, and network device
GB2602812A (en) * 2021-01-14 2022-07-20 Nec Corp Communication system
CN113993203B (en) * 2021-10-27 2023-12-22 韦华半导体(苏州)有限公司 Wireless communication data scheduling method and device based on double-channel transmission

Family Cites Families (351)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US4954892A (en) 1989-02-14 1990-09-04 Mitsubishi Denki Kabushiki Kaisha Buffer controlled picture signal encoding and decoding system
US6389010B1 (en) 1995-10-05 2002-05-14 Intermec Ip Corp. Hierarchical data collection network supporting packetized voice communications among wireless terminals and telephones
JP2746183B2 (en) 1995-04-04 1998-04-28 日本電気株式会社 Multiple access method
GB9508884D0 (en) 1995-05-02 1995-06-21 Telecom Sec Cellular Radio Ltd Cellular radio system
DE69833863T2 (en) 1997-08-01 2006-11-23 Iwics Inc., Bothell PERFORMANCE ADAPTATION IN A MULTI-STATION NETWORK
FI112841B (en) 1999-06-01 2004-01-15 Nokia Corp Method and apparatus for forming a connection between mobile station and base station and mobile station
US10728381B2 (en) 1999-06-04 2020-07-28 Raman K. Rao Reconfigurable mobile device interfaces supporting authenticated high quality video, audio, TV and multimedia services
FI109321B (en) 1999-06-10 2002-06-28 Nokia Corp Method and Arrangement for Implementing Fast Cell Switching in a Packet Switched Cellular Radio System
EP1304897A1 (en) 2001-10-22 2003-04-23 Agilent Technologies, Inc. (a Delaware corporation) Methods and apparatus for providing data for enabling location of a mobile communications device
US20040001448A1 (en) 2002-06-28 2004-01-01 Preston Shawn E. System and method for transmitting highly correlated preambles in QAM constellations
US7352714B2 (en) 2002-09-24 2008-04-01 Lucent Technologies Inc. Methods and apparatuses for allocating time slots to half duplex wireless mobile stations
US20040202119A1 (en) 2003-04-10 2004-10-14 Edge Stephen William Base station synchronization in a wireless network
CN1549610A (en) 2003-05-09 2004-11-24 ��������ͨ�ż����о����޹�˾ Method for providing multi-stage insertion service in public insertion information channel
EP1625711B1 (en) 2003-05-09 2007-07-18 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. Measuring medium activity patterns in wireless networks and deriving information from the activity patterns
US7155244B2 (en) 2003-08-14 2006-12-26 Siemens Communications, Inc. Precise common timing in a wireless network
US7912485B2 (en) 2003-09-11 2011-03-22 Qualcomm Incorporated Method and system for signaling in broadcast communication system
US7499704B1 (en) 2005-10-21 2009-03-03 Cingular Wireless Ii, Llc Display caller ID on IPTV screen
KR20070061407A (en) 2005-12-08 2007-06-13 한국전자통신연구원 Handover re-establishment method of the high speed portable internet system
TWI451774B (en) 2006-01-31 2014-09-01 Interdigital Tech Corp Method and apparatus for providing and utilizing a non-contention based channel in a wireless communication system
US8150412B2 (en) 2006-03-06 2012-04-03 Alcatel Lucent Interference mitigation in a wireless communication system
CN101416556B (en) 2006-04-07 2011-04-06 艾利森电话股份有限公司 Method, user equipment and radio base station for random access in honeycomb telecommunication system
ES2530992T3 (en) 2006-04-12 2015-03-09 Lg Electronics Inc Assignment of reference signals in MIMO system
US20090239545A1 (en) 2006-05-03 2009-09-24 Electronics And Telecommunications Research Intitu Method for random access in cellular system
EP2667660B1 (en) 2006-06-20 2017-04-26 InterDigital Technology Corporation Recovering from an unsuccessful handover in a LTE system
EP1876846B1 (en) 2006-07-03 2009-09-09 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. System and method for performing periodic ranging in sleep mode in a communication system
CA2653421C (en) 2006-07-03 2015-02-17 Arne Simonsson Method and arrangement for handover in a radio access network
GB2440991B (en) 2006-07-05 2009-01-07 Motorola Inc An orthogonal frequency domain multiplexing (ofdm) communication system
US7852817B2 (en) 2006-07-14 2010-12-14 Kineto Wireless, Inc. Generic access to the Iu interface
US20100238872A1 (en) 2006-08-23 2010-09-23 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method for transmitting response message of random access in cellular system and method of random access using the same
US7957349B2 (en) 2006-09-20 2011-06-07 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd Handover method and apparatus in a mobile communication system
CN101183888B (en) 2006-09-27 2012-12-05 三星电子株式会社 Method and apparatus for scheduling data considering power of the data in a communication system
EP2080401B1 (en) 2006-10-03 2019-06-12 QUALCOMM Incorporated Random access signaling transmission for system access in wireless communication
TWI511593B (en) 2006-10-03 2015-12-01 Interdigital Tech Corp Combined open loop/closed loop (cqi-based) uplink transmit power control with interference mitigation for e-utra
US20080084849A1 (en) 2006-10-06 2008-04-10 Interdigital Technology Corporation Autonomous timing advance adjustment during handover
KR20080037247A (en) 2006-10-25 2008-04-30 삼성전자주식회사 Method of disposing ranging error state in broadband wireless communication system
KR101368588B1 (en) 2006-10-30 2014-02-27 인터디지탈 테크날러지 코포레이션 Method and apparatus for implementing tracking area update and cell reselection in a long term evolution system
US8270424B2 (en) 2006-11-01 2012-09-18 Alcatel Lucent Method of signaling allocated resources
US8121094B2 (en) 2006-12-04 2012-02-21 Electronics And Telecommunications Research Institute Method for managing cross-layer handover
US20080137632A1 (en) 2006-12-06 2008-06-12 Electronics And Telecommunications Research Institute Apparatus and method of controlling power of terminal in mobile communication system
WO2008084395A1 (en) 2007-01-12 2008-07-17 Nokia Corporation Apparatus, method and computer program product providing synchronized handover
US20080182579A1 (en) 2007-01-26 2008-07-31 Industrial Technology Research Institute Methods and Systems for Handover Process in Wireless Communication Networks
KR101350623B1 (en) 2007-02-02 2014-01-10 엘지전자 주식회사 Method of Transmitting Scheduling Reference Signal
MX2009009235A (en) 2007-03-01 2009-09-08 Ntt Docomo Inc Base station device and communication control method.
US9380503B2 (en) 2007-04-30 2016-06-28 Google Technology Holdings LLC Method and apparatus for handover in a wireless communication system
GB0708345D0 (en) 2007-04-30 2007-06-06 Nokia Siemens Networks Oy Signalling within a communication system
KR101486352B1 (en) * 2007-06-18 2015-01-26 엘지전자 주식회사 Method of controlling uplink synchronization state at a user equipment in a mobile communication system
EP2658326A1 (en) 2007-08-08 2013-10-30 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Timing alignment in a radio communication system
BRPI0721906A2 (en) 2007-08-10 2014-07-01 Fujitsu Ltd TRANSMISSION APPARATUS, RECEPTION APPARATUS AND METHOD OF COMMUNICATION.
KR101274400B1 (en) 2007-08-10 2013-06-17 후지쯔 가부시끼가이샤 Method of random access in radio communication system, radio communication system, radio terminal and base station apparatus
EP2031921A1 (en) 2007-08-14 2009-03-04 Alcatel Lucent Apparatus and method for handling mobile terminal capability informanion
KR101441138B1 (en) 2007-09-28 2014-09-18 엘지전자 주식회사 Method of performing uplink time alignment in wireless communication system
EP3432504B1 (en) 2007-10-30 2021-06-23 Nokia Technologies Oy Methods, apparatuses, system and related computer program product for resource allocation
EP2056635A1 (en) 2007-10-30 2009-05-06 Innovative Sonic Limited Method of handling random access procedure failure and related communication device
US9204468B2 (en) 2007-11-05 2015-12-01 Telefonaktiebolaget L M Ericsson (Publ) Timing alignment in an LTE system
CN101448325B (en) 2007-11-27 2012-11-21 电信科学技术研究院 Processing method and base station for random access process
KR101420879B1 (en) 2007-11-29 2014-07-17 엘지전자 주식회사 Method for Transmitting Data regarding Scheduling Information
US8504046B2 (en) 2008-01-03 2013-08-06 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Fast radio link recovery after handover failure
KR101447750B1 (en) 2008-01-04 2014-10-06 엘지전자 주식회사 Method for performing random access process
CN102612162B (en) 2008-01-07 2015-09-09 三星电子株式会社 The equipment of transmitting random access preamble signal and method
EP2241049B8 (en) * 2008-01-08 2019-05-22 HMD global Oy Sounding reference signal arrangement
KR101572882B1 (en) 2008-01-25 2015-11-30 엘지전자 주식회사 Method for reducing handover latency
WO2009107985A1 (en) 2008-02-28 2009-09-03 Lg Electronics Inc. Method for multiplexing data and control information
US7990919B2 (en) 2008-03-20 2011-08-02 Apple Inc. Techniques for reducing communication errors in a wireless communication system
JP5169442B2 (en) * 2008-04-25 2013-03-27 富士通株式会社 Radio base station, mobile station, and communication method
US20090276675A1 (en) 2008-05-05 2009-11-05 Jussi Ojala Signaling of redundancy version and new data indication
GB2461159B (en) * 2008-06-18 2012-01-04 Lg Electronics Inc Method for transmitting Mac PDUs
US8493917B2 (en) * 2008-07-01 2013-07-23 Telefonaktiebolaget L M Ericsson (Publ) Methods and apparatuses for performing preamble assignment for random access in a telecommunications system
KR100939722B1 (en) * 2008-08-11 2010-02-01 엘지전자 주식회사 Data transmission method and user equipment for the same
EP2154921A1 (en) * 2008-08-11 2010-02-17 Nokia Siemens Networks OY Method for transferring a base station of a wireless communication network from a standby mode to a fully activated mode
KR101441147B1 (en) 2008-08-12 2014-09-18 엘지전자 주식회사 Method of transmitting sr in wireless communication system
US8548479B2 (en) 2008-08-28 2013-10-01 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Apparatus and method for transmitting inter-working signal in wireless communication system
US8526374B2 (en) 2008-09-12 2013-09-03 Qualcomm Incorporated Physical random access channel (PRACH) transmission in multicarrier operation
JP5410437B2 (en) 2008-09-22 2014-02-05 シャープ株式会社 BASE STATION DEVICE, TERMINAL DEVICE, RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM EQUIPPED WITH THE SAME, AND PROGRAM RUNNED BY THE BASE STATION
US8873474B2 (en) * 2008-10-17 2014-10-28 Telefonaktiebolaget L M Ericsson (Publ) Method and mobile terminal providing priority-based uplink scheduling information
EP3554170A1 (en) 2008-10-20 2019-10-16 InterDigital Patent Holdings, Inc. Carrier aggregation
WO2010047545A2 (en) 2008-10-22 2010-04-29 엘지전자 주식회사 Efficient initial access system under a multi-carrier combination condition for supporting broadband
US9681423B2 (en) 2008-10-29 2017-06-13 Lg Electronics Inc. Method for efficiently transmitting physical channel in multi-carrier aggregation state to support broadband
EP2182754B1 (en) 2008-10-30 2014-01-15 Telefonaktiebolaget LM Ericsson (publ) Method and receiver for estimating and reporting a channel quality measure
PL2351401T3 (en) 2008-11-18 2017-08-31 Nokia Technologies Oy Relaying in a communication system
EP3125628A1 (en) 2008-11-21 2017-02-01 InterDigital Patent Holdings, Inc. Method and apparatus for multiple carrier utilization in wireless communications
JP5578082B2 (en) 2008-11-26 2014-08-27 日本電気株式会社 Base station, base station transmission power control method, processing apparatus, program, and communication system
US8238303B2 (en) 2008-11-26 2012-08-07 Telefonaktiebolaget L M Ericsson (Publ) Method and apparatus of allocating subcarriers in an orthogonal frequency division multiplexing system
CN102227930B (en) 2008-11-28 2014-12-24 日本电气株式会社 Base station device, method for controlling base station device, communication system
EP2374303A1 (en) 2008-12-05 2011-10-12 Nokia Siemens Networks OY Network apparatus and method for performing a handover in a network
US8054807B2 (en) 2008-12-10 2011-11-08 Korea Advanced Institute Of Science And Technology Handover method for mobile WiMAX network based on human mobility behavior
WO2010068069A2 (en) 2008-12-11 2010-06-17 엘지전자 주식회사 Method for control channel detection in a multicarrier system
KR20100073992A (en) 2008-12-23 2010-07-01 엘지전자 주식회사 Uplink transmission in carrier aggregation environment
WO2010078729A1 (en) 2009-01-12 2010-07-15 华为技术有限公司 Method, apparatus and system for multi-carrier cell handover
KR20100085248A (en) 2009-01-20 2010-07-29 삼성전자주식회사 Apparatus and method for adjusting offset in wireless communication system
KR101697596B1 (en) 2009-01-29 2017-01-18 엘지전자 주식회사 Method and apparatus of controlling transmission power
KR101674940B1 (en) 2009-01-29 2016-11-10 엘지전자 주식회사 Method and apparatus of controlling transmission power
US8964659B2 (en) 2009-02-02 2015-02-24 Lg Electronics Inc. Random access channel resource allocation
US7940740B2 (en) 2009-02-03 2011-05-10 Motorola Mobility, Inc. Apparatus and method for communicating and processing a positioning reference signal based on identifier associated with a base station
WO2010090477A2 (en) 2009-02-06 2010-08-12 엘지전자주식회사 Device and method supporting multi-carrier waves
US20120026977A1 (en) * 2009-03-11 2012-02-02 So Yeon Kim Method and apparatus for handover in a multi-carrier system
KR101313357B1 (en) 2009-03-12 2013-10-02 인터디지탈 패튼 홀딩스, 인크 Method and apparatus for performing component carrier-specific reconfiguration
KR101642517B1 (en) 2009-03-13 2016-07-25 엘지전자 주식회사 Method of handling an uplink synchronization timer during a handover in wireless communication system
JP5609862B2 (en) 2009-03-13 2014-10-22 日本電気株式会社 Wireless communication system, base station, mobile station, base station control method, mobile station control method, and program
US8553574B2 (en) * 2009-03-16 2013-10-08 Htc Corporation Method of handling packet error in a wireless communication system and related communication device
JP5555763B2 (en) 2009-03-17 2014-07-23 インターデイジタル パテント ホールディングス インコーポレイテッド Method and apparatus for power control of sounding reference signal (SRS) transmission
US9137764B2 (en) 2009-03-17 2015-09-15 Htc Corporation Method of managing timing alignment functionality for multiple component carriers and related communication device
ES2905351T3 (en) 2009-03-17 2022-04-08 Nokia Solutions & Networks Oy Configuring Periodic Feedback Information Transmission on a Physical Uplink Shared Channel (PUSCH)
WO2010107358A1 (en) * 2009-03-20 2010-09-23 Telefonaktiebolaget L M Ericsson (Publ) Method and apparatus for monitoring a random access channel
WO2010110522A1 (en) * 2009-03-22 2010-09-30 Lg Electronics Inc. Random access response processing
CN102396280B (en) 2009-04-09 2013-04-17 华为技术有限公司 A method for random accessing, evolution base station and terminal equipment
US8077670B2 (en) 2009-04-10 2011-12-13 Jianke Fan Random access channel response handling with aggregated component carriers
WO2010121205A1 (en) 2009-04-16 2010-10-21 Nearverse, Inc. Method and apapratus for distributed communication using short range and wide range communication links
US8938247B2 (en) 2009-04-23 2015-01-20 Qualcomm Incorporated Sounding reference signal for coordinated multi-point operation
EP2244515A1 (en) 2009-04-23 2010-10-27 Panasonic Corporation Logical channel prioritization procedure for generating multiple uplink transport blocks
JP5395256B2 (en) * 2009-04-23 2014-01-22 インターデイジタル パテント ホールディングス インコーポレイテッド Method and apparatus for random access in multi-carrier wireless communication
CN101877911B (en) 2009-04-30 2014-06-25 电信科学技术研究院 Special scheduling request resource allocation method and device
CN101888648A (en) 2009-05-11 2010-11-17 大唐移动通信设备有限公司 Uplink synchronous control method and device
KR101128817B1 (en) 2009-05-15 2012-03-23 엘지전자 주식회사 Method for transmitting sounding reference signal in wireless communication system and apparatus therefor
CN101902817B (en) 2009-05-26 2015-07-22 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Uplink radio resource dispatching method and device for wireless communication system
WO2010137926A2 (en) * 2009-05-29 2010-12-02 엘지전자 주식회사 Method and apparatus for transmitting control information from relay node on backhaul uplink
US8634313B2 (en) 2009-06-19 2014-01-21 Qualcomm Incorporated Method and apparatus that facilitates a timing alignment in a multicarrier system
CN101932052B (en) 2009-06-23 2016-08-24 华为技术有限公司 A kind of changing method, user terminal and network equipment
US20110158117A1 (en) * 2009-06-29 2011-06-30 Qualcomm Incorporated Power headroom report for simultaneous transmissions on disparate radio access technologies
EP2453598A4 (en) 2009-07-07 2015-08-19 Lg Electronics Inc Method and apparatus for carrier scheduling in a multi-carrier system
KR101684969B1 (en) 2009-07-27 2016-12-09 엘지전자 주식회사 Method and appratus of transmitting control information
KR101707867B1 (en) 2009-07-28 2017-02-17 엘지전자 주식회사 Method for performing carrier management procedure in a multi-carrier supported wideband wireless communication system and appartus for the same
JP2011035861A (en) 2009-08-06 2011-02-17 Sharp Corp Mobile station device, wireless communication method and control program of mobile station device
CN102474886B (en) * 2009-08-12 2014-11-19 交互数字专利控股公司 Method and apparatus for contention-based uplink data transmission
US8280391B2 (en) 2009-08-21 2012-10-02 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method and apparatus for identifying downlink message responsive to random access preambles transmitted in different uplink channels in mobile communication system supporting carrier aggregation
CN101998607B (en) 2009-08-31 2013-07-31 中国移动通信集团公司 Method, system and device for transmitting secondary synchronization signals by introducing uplink time slot to downlink
WO2011032308A1 (en) 2009-09-15 2011-03-24 华为技术有限公司 Uplink synchronization processing method, user equipment and base station
US9585164B2 (en) 2009-09-25 2017-02-28 Blackberry Limited System and method for multi-carrier network operation
ES2458548T3 (en) 2009-09-30 2014-05-06 Telefonaktiebolaget L M Ericsson (Publ) Methods and provisions in a mobile telecommunications system
WO2011041700A1 (en) 2009-10-02 2011-04-07 Interdigital Patent Holdings, Inc. Method and apparatus for controlling transmit power of transmissions on more than one component carrier
US8457079B2 (en) 2009-10-05 2013-06-04 Motorola Mobility Llc Method and apparatus for mitigating downlink control channel interference
CN102577551B (en) 2009-10-09 2015-03-25 瑞典爱立信有限公司 Extended cell range
CN102014476B (en) 2009-10-10 2013-09-04 电信科学技术研究院 Uplink synchronization method, system and equipment
US11012947B2 (en) 2009-10-21 2021-05-18 Qualcomm Incorporated Uplink multi-power amplifier/antenna operation and channel prioritization
CN102014477B (en) 2009-10-30 2013-11-06 电信科学技术研究院 Method, apparatus and system for uplink synchronization
KR101785997B1 (en) 2009-10-30 2017-10-17 주식회사 골드피크이노베이션즈 Transmitting method for information of component carrir grouping and base station thereof, receiving method of terminal in wireless communication system
EP3961964A1 (en) 2009-11-02 2022-03-02 Nokia Solutions and Networks Oy Sounding reference signal configuration
EP2317815A1 (en) 2009-11-02 2011-05-04 Panasonic Corporation Power-limit reporting in a communication system using carrier aggregation
KR101950361B1 (en) 2009-11-10 2019-02-22 삼성전자주식회사 Method for managing neighbor base station information in mobile communications system and therefor system
CN201967138U (en) 2009-11-19 2011-09-07 交互数字专利控股公司 Wireless emitting/receiving unit
KR20110060550A (en) 2009-11-30 2011-06-08 삼성전자주식회사 Apparatus and method for handover of ms in wireless communication terminal
KR101770209B1 (en) 2009-12-03 2017-08-22 엘지전자 주식회사 Method and apparatus for reducing inter-cell interference in a wireless communication system
US9385849B2 (en) 2009-12-07 2016-07-05 Lg Electronics Inc. Method and apparatus for transmitting and receiving a signal in a wireless communication system that supports plural component carriers
KR101657125B1 (en) 2009-12-10 2016-09-13 엘지전자 주식회사 Method and apparatus for reducing inter-cell interference in a wireless communication system
KR101570542B1 (en) * 2009-12-10 2015-11-19 삼성전자주식회사 Apparatus and method for performing content based access
KR101688263B1 (en) * 2010-01-08 2016-12-20 인터디지탈 패튼 홀딩스, 인크 Maintaining time alignment with multiple uplink carriers
US9426765B2 (en) 2010-01-11 2016-08-23 Acer Incorporated Method of handling uplink synchronization and related communication device
EP2536047B1 (en) 2010-02-09 2020-03-04 LG Electronics Inc. Method for transmitting an uplink signal in a wireless communication system, and apparatus for same
KR101803015B1 (en) 2010-02-10 2017-12-01 주식회사 골드피크이노베이션즈 Method and apparatus for configuring uplink synchronization in component carrier aggregation
US8848520B2 (en) 2010-02-10 2014-09-30 Qualcomm Incorporated Aperiodic sounding reference signal transmission method and apparatus
KR101327131B1 (en) 2010-02-12 2013-11-07 엘지전자 주식회사 Method and apparatus of transmitting data in wireless communication system
KR20110093402A (en) 2010-02-12 2011-08-18 주식회사 팬택 Method and apparatus for configuring uplink synchronization in component carrier aggregation
CN108124287B (en) 2010-02-12 2021-07-20 交互数字技术公司 Wireless transmit and receive unit WTRU and method
KR101328213B1 (en) 2010-02-12 2013-11-14 엘지전자 주식회사 Method and apparatus of transmitting data in wireless communication system
JP4913222B2 (en) 2010-02-12 2012-04-11 シャープ株式会社 Wireless communication system, mobile station apparatus, wireless communication method, and integrated circuit
KR20110094163A (en) 2010-02-14 2011-08-22 엘지전자 주식회사 Method and apparatus for delivering measurement results information in a mobile communication system
CA2789923A1 (en) 2010-02-15 2011-08-18 Telefonaktiebolaget L M Ericsson (Publ) Methods and arrangements in radio communication systems
WO2011102686A2 (en) 2010-02-21 2011-08-25 Lg Electronics Inc. Method for managing carrier aggregation sets,and related devices
EP3373500B1 (en) 2010-02-22 2020-09-16 Telefonaktiebolaget LM Ericsson (publ) Methods and arrangements for dynamically triggering the transmission of sounding reference signal in a telecommunication system
US8918135B2 (en) 2010-03-08 2014-12-23 Lg Electronics Inc. Method and apparatus for controlling uplink transmission power
MX2012010034A (en) 2010-03-10 2012-09-21 Lg Electronics Inc Method and apparatus for transmitting uplink control information in a wireless communication system.
EP3285537B1 (en) 2010-03-12 2019-12-25 BlackBerry Limited Method and device for registration and data transmission using fast / zero contention resolution
EP3755075A3 (en) 2010-03-12 2021-03-31 BlackBerry Limited Timing advance enhancements for cellular communications
US8917593B2 (en) * 2010-03-18 2014-12-23 Qualcomm Incorporated Random access design in a multiple component carrier communication network
US9236979B2 (en) * 2010-03-19 2016-01-12 Lg Electronics Inc. Apparatus and method for transmitting/receiving control information in a wireless communication system that supports carrier aggregation
US8873439B2 (en) 2010-03-25 2014-10-28 Qualcomm Incorporated Subframe dependent physical uplink control channel (PUCCH) region design
KR20110108536A (en) 2010-03-29 2011-10-06 주식회사 팬택 Method and apparatus for transmittng random access preamble(s) using component carrier aggregation and method and apparatus for transmittng timing advance using the same
US20110243111A1 (en) 2010-03-31 2011-10-06 Niklas Andgart Timing of Uplink Transmissions in a Multi-Carrier Communication System
US9084195B2 (en) 2010-04-01 2015-07-14 Nokia Technologies Oy Multiple timing advance and carrier aggregation
CN105162509B (en) 2010-04-01 2018-06-01 Lg电子株式会社 The method and its holding equipment of CSI report are sent and received in wireless access system
CA2793703C (en) 2010-04-01 2020-06-30 Panasonic Corporation Transmit power control for physical random access channels
PL2760241T3 (en) 2010-04-01 2018-12-31 Sun Patent Trust Transmit power control for physical random access channels
US9749968B2 (en) 2010-04-02 2017-08-29 Interdigital Patent Holdings, Inc. Uplink sounding reference signals configuration and transmission
US20110243106A1 (en) 2010-04-02 2011-10-06 Mediatek Inc. Methods for carrier agggregation
KR20110111790A (en) 2010-04-05 2011-10-12 주식회사 팬택 Method and apparatus for signaling component carrier information of handover in communication system using multiple component carrier
CN102884844A (en) 2010-04-07 2013-01-16 宏达国际电子股份有限公司 Communication device and method thereof
US20110249639A1 (en) 2010-04-08 2011-10-13 Yu-Chih Jen Method of Handling Sounding Reference Signal and Physical Uplink Control Channel and Related Communication Device
KR20110113484A (en) * 2010-04-09 2011-10-17 주식회사 팬택 Apparatus and method of performing random access in multiple carrier system
US8929230B2 (en) 2010-04-15 2015-01-06 Qualcomm Incorporated Coordinated silent period with sounding reference signal (SRS) configuration
CN102238666B (en) 2010-04-30 2015-10-21 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Multi-carrier switch processing method and system
WO2011139053A2 (en) 2010-05-01 2011-11-10 Pantech Co., Ltd. Apparatus and method for transmitting sounding reference signal in wireless communication system supporting multiple component carriers
US9363769B2 (en) 2010-05-05 2016-06-07 Qualcomm Incorporated Methods and systems for SRS power scaling in carrier aggregation
US9055527B2 (en) 2010-05-06 2015-06-09 Telefonaktiebolaget L M Ericsson (Publ) Method and system for determining a time synchronization offset between radio base stations
CN102237963A (en) 2010-05-06 2011-11-09 宏达国际电子股份有限公司 Method for processing uplink control channel transmission and communication device
TWI502945B (en) 2010-05-10 2015-10-01 Innovative Sonic Corp Method to determine an indicator value and apparatus to determine an indicator
WO2011142608A2 (en) 2010-05-12 2011-11-17 엘지전자 주식회사 Method for transmitting an srs-triggering-based srs in a wireless communication system
EP2388946B1 (en) 2010-05-23 2019-04-03 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Apparatus and method for providing HARQ in a wireless communication system
US20110292917A1 (en) 2010-05-27 2011-12-01 Qualcomm Incorporated System and method for timing adjustment to protect cqi
KR101724371B1 (en) 2010-05-28 2017-04-10 삼성전자주식회사 Apparatus and method for supporting mobility in heterogeneous wireless communication system
US10536910B2 (en) 2010-05-28 2020-01-14 Qualcomm Incorporated Apparatus and method for random access channel power prioritization
CN102918907B (en) 2010-05-28 2015-06-17 日本电气株式会社 Wireless resource setting method, wireless communication system and wireless base state
US9351143B2 (en) 2010-06-01 2016-05-24 Qualcomm Incorporated Multi-homed peer-to-peer network
WO2011152685A2 (en) 2010-06-04 2011-12-08 엘지전자 주식회사 Method of terminal transmitting sounding reference signal on the basis of aperiodic sounding reference signal triggering and method for controlling uplink transmission power to transmit aperiodic sounding reference signal
US8855053B2 (en) 2010-06-18 2014-10-07 Mediatek Inc. Sounding mechanism and configuration under carrier aggregation
EP2584845B1 (en) 2010-06-21 2017-03-08 LG Electronics Inc. Uplink control channel transmission control method in a multi-carrier system and terminal using same
JP2012005015A (en) 2010-06-21 2012-01-05 Ntt Docomo Inc Wireless relay station apparatus and mobile terminal apparatus
US8908636B2 (en) 2010-06-21 2014-12-09 Qualcomm Incorporated Method and apparatus for QoS context transfer during inter radio access technology handover in a wireless communication system
US8526420B2 (en) 2010-07-16 2013-09-03 Blackberry Limited Method and apparatus for autonomous uplink timing advance maintenance
CN105376037B (en) 2010-07-27 2019-06-18 索尼公司 Support the device and method of switching cell in the communication system of carrier convergence
CN102348230B (en) 2010-07-27 2016-05-04 索尼公司 The method, apparatus and system of switching cell in the communication system of support carrier convergence
CN102348243B (en) 2010-07-27 2016-05-04 索尼公司 The method, apparatus and system of switching cell in the communication system of support carrier convergence
US10517098B2 (en) 2010-07-30 2019-12-24 Qualcomm Incorporated Interference coordination for peer-to-peer (P2P) communication and wide area network (WAN) communication
US20120026972A1 (en) 2010-08-02 2012-02-02 Guowang Miao Apparatus and method for supporting range expansion in a wireless network
CN102378287B (en) 2010-08-11 2014-12-10 电信科学技术研究院 Cell configuration method and device for changing primary cell
US9131457B2 (en) 2010-08-12 2015-09-08 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Apparatus and method for transmission of uplink sounding reference signals in a wireless network
CN103155472B (en) 2010-08-13 2015-11-25 黑莓有限公司 For resource allocation methods and the signaling of aperiodicity channel detection
US8861452B2 (en) 2010-08-16 2014-10-14 Qualcomm Incorporated Method and apparatus for use of licensed spectrum for control channels in cognitive radio communications
WO2012023839A2 (en) 2010-08-19 2012-02-23 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Methods and apparatus for activating and deactivating secondary cells in a carrier aggregation environment
US8341485B2 (en) 2010-09-14 2012-12-25 Intel Corporation Increasing hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) throughput
US9258092B2 (en) 2010-09-17 2016-02-09 Blackberry Limited Sounding reference signal transmission in carrier aggregation
EP2617154B1 (en) 2010-09-17 2021-01-06 BlackBerry Limited Sounding reference signal transmission in carrier aggregation
CN102421119A (en) 2010-09-28 2012-04-18 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Method and system for reporting additional measuring result
US8902770B2 (en) 2010-09-28 2014-12-02 Nokia Siemens Networks Oy Carrier indicator field usage and configuration in carrier aggregation
KR20120032648A (en) 2010-09-29 2012-04-06 주식회사 팬택 Device and method and for transmitting rach preamble
JP5789668B2 (en) * 2010-09-30 2015-10-07 パナソニック インテレクチュアル プロパティ コーポレーション オブアメリカPanasonic Intellectual Property Corporation of America Timing advance configuration for multiple uplink component carriers
US9408162B2 (en) * 2010-09-30 2016-08-02 Qualcomm Incorporated Power headroom for simultaneous voice and long term evolution
WO2012044227A1 (en) 2010-10-01 2012-04-05 Telefonaktiebolaget L M Ericsson (Publ) Methods providing aided signal synchronization and related network nodes and devices
US8472471B2 (en) 2010-10-28 2013-06-25 Lg Electronics Inc. Method and apparatus for transmitting control information
US9237489B2 (en) 2010-11-02 2016-01-12 Innovative Sonic Corporation Method and apparatus for secondary cell release during handover in a wireless communication system
US20120106511A1 (en) 2010-11-03 2012-05-03 Chih-Hsiang Wu Method of Handling Primary Serving Cell Change
DK2636159T3 (en) 2010-11-05 2018-08-13 Ericsson Telefon Ab L M COMP function in cellular communication networks
US20130208601A1 (en) 2010-11-08 2013-08-15 Tao Cui Measurement requesting and reporting
US20120120944A1 (en) 2010-11-15 2012-05-17 Xue Yang Methods and apparatuses for multi-radio coexistence
WO2012074878A2 (en) 2010-12-03 2012-06-07 Interdigital Patent Holdings, Inc. Methods, apparatus and systems for performing multi-radio access technology carrier aggregation
US9185700B2 (en) * 2010-12-07 2015-11-10 Lg Electronics Inc. Method and device for communication between terminals in wireless communication system
JP5307112B2 (en) 2010-12-17 2013-10-02 シャープ株式会社 Mobile station apparatus, base station apparatus, radio communication system, control method, and integrated circuit
CN102098086B (en) 2010-12-30 2016-03-02 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Data transmission method for uplink and device
US20120170497A1 (en) * 2011-01-04 2012-07-05 HT mMobile Inc. Method for reporting srs in discontinuous reception and wireless communication system thereof
KR101776873B1 (en) * 2011-01-11 2017-09-11 삼성전자 주식회사 Method and apparatus for setting uplink transmission power in mobile communication system
US20130315214A1 (en) 2011-02-01 2013-11-28 Wei Bai Timing Advance Without Random Access Channel Access
CN102638896B (en) 2011-02-15 2017-07-21 中兴通讯股份有限公司 A kind of method and system for determining priority level of component carrier
KR102073027B1 (en) 2011-04-05 2020-02-04 삼성전자 주식회사 Method and appratus of operating multiple time alignment timer in mobile communication system using carrier aggregation
JP5438046B2 (en) 2011-02-18 2014-03-12 株式会社Nttドコモ Mobile communication method and radio base station
US8503322B2 (en) 2011-02-21 2013-08-06 Motorola Mobility Llc IQ imbalance image compensation in multi-carrier wireless communication systems
JP5908504B2 (en) * 2011-03-08 2016-04-26 パナソニック インテレクチュアル プロパティ コーポレーション オブ アメリカPanasonic Intellectual Property Corporation of America Propagation delay difference report for multiple component carriers
JP5291135B2 (en) 2011-03-11 2013-09-18 シャープ株式会社 Wireless communication system, base station apparatus, mobile station apparatus, wireless communication method, and integrated circuit
WO2012128513A2 (en) 2011-03-18 2012-09-27 Lg Electronics Inc. Method of transmitting control information in a wireless communication system and apparatus thereof
US8923251B2 (en) 2011-03-24 2014-12-30 Htc Corporation Method of handling uplink time alignment
US9118452B2 (en) 2011-03-28 2015-08-25 Lg Electronics Inc. Method for transmitting an uplink signal, method for receiving an uplink signal, user equipment, and base station
US8571467B2 (en) 2011-03-30 2013-10-29 Nokia Corporation Method and apparatus for cognitive radio information sharing
TWI459847B (en) 2011-04-01 2014-11-01 Mediatek Inc Methods of managing and maintaining multiple timing advance
CN103493575B (en) 2011-04-01 2017-06-20 英特尔公司 For the radio access technology of fixing device in mobile broadband network
EP2695454B1 (en) 2011-04-01 2020-09-09 Intel Corporation Performing multiple timing advance adjustments in a carrier aggregation communication system
CN102740445B (en) 2011-04-02 2015-04-08 上海贝尔股份有限公司 Handover (HO) method used under carrier polymerization scene
CN106060919B (en) 2011-04-02 2019-11-29 华为技术有限公司 Acquisition methods, terminal, device and the medium of auxiliary timing lead
US8724492B2 (en) 2011-04-08 2014-05-13 Motorola Mobility Llc Method and apparatus for multi-radio coexistence on adjacent frequency bands
US8837304B2 (en) * 2011-04-08 2014-09-16 Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha Devices for multi-group communications
KR101527309B1 (en) * 2011-04-27 2015-06-09 엘지전자 주식회사 Method and apparatus for performing random access based on delay determined by network
KR101528091B1 (en) 2011-04-28 2015-06-10 엘지전자 주식회사 Method and apparatus for performing a random access process
US8705467B2 (en) 2011-04-29 2014-04-22 Nokia Corporation Cross-carrier preamble responses
ES2793274T3 (en) 2011-05-02 2020-11-13 Ericsson Telefon Ab L M Method and apparatus for prohibiting transmission of sounding reference signals in newly activated secondary cells in a wireless communication system
US9681405B2 (en) 2011-05-10 2017-06-13 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method and apparatus for applying a time alignment timer in a wireless communication system using a carrier aggregation technique
WO2012154955A1 (en) 2011-05-10 2012-11-15 Interdigital Patent Holdings Inc. Method and apparatus for obtaining uplink timing alignment on a secondary cell
US9642161B2 (en) 2011-05-11 2017-05-02 Nokia Solutions And Networks Oy Cross-scheduling for random access response
US20120294163A1 (en) 2011-05-19 2012-11-22 Renesas Mobile Corporation Apparatus and Method for Direct Device-to-Device Communication in a Mobile Communication System
KR101810121B1 (en) 2011-05-27 2017-12-18 애플 인크. Apparatus and method for performing random access in wireless communication system
EP2716132A2 (en) 2011-06-02 2014-04-09 Interdigital Patent Holdings, Inc. Methods, apparatus, and systems for managing converged gateway communications
KR20120136481A (en) 2011-06-09 2012-12-20 주식회사 팬택 Apparatus and method for performing uplink synchronization in multiple component carrier system
US20120314652A1 (en) * 2011-06-09 2012-12-13 Pantech Co., Ltd. Apparatus and method for performing random access in wireless communication system
KR20120136867A (en) 2011-06-10 2012-12-20 주식회사 팬택 Apparatus and method for performing uplink synchronization in multiple component carrier system
KR101876230B1 (en) 2011-06-16 2018-07-10 주식회사 팬택 Apparatus and method for receiving control channel in multiple component carrier system
US8611823B2 (en) 2011-06-16 2013-12-17 Blackberry Limited Mobile guided uplink interference management
US9282553B2 (en) 2011-07-04 2016-03-08 Lg Electronics Inc. Method for terminal to control uplink timing in a wireless communication system, and device for same
US20130010711A1 (en) * 2011-07-06 2013-01-10 Daniel Larsson Random Access with Primary and Secondary Component Carrier Communications
WO2013006104A1 (en) 2011-07-06 2013-01-10 Telefonaktiebolaget L M Ericsson (Publ) Controlling uplink and downlink transmission power during asynchronous switching of control states by user equipment
WO2013009068A2 (en) 2011-07-11 2013-01-17 엘지전자 주식회사 Method and apparatus for performing random access in wireless communication system
EP3122110B1 (en) 2011-07-13 2018-08-15 Sun Patent Trust Base station apparatus and transmission method
US10778400B2 (en) 2011-07-18 2020-09-15 Nokia Solutions And Networks Oy Determination of the timing advance group
US8395985B2 (en) 2011-07-25 2013-03-12 Ofinno Technologies, Llc Time alignment in multicarrier OFDM network
US9949221B2 (en) * 2011-07-27 2018-04-17 Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha Devices for multi-cell communications
EP2737768A1 (en) 2011-07-29 2014-06-04 Interdigital Patent Holdings, Inc. Method and apparatus for radio resources management in multi-radio access technology wireless systems
EP2814293B1 (en) 2011-07-29 2016-02-03 HTC Corporation Method of handling uplink timing and related communication device
US20130034085A1 (en) 2011-08-05 2013-02-07 Bostroem Lisa Medium Access Control Timing Advance Group Assignment
US8824408B2 (en) * 2011-08-11 2014-09-02 Industrial Technology Research Institute Method of handling random access procedure associated to cell deactivation
EP2742765A1 (en) 2011-08-11 2014-06-18 BlackBerry Limited Performing random access in carrier aggregation
CN102932837B (en) 2011-08-12 2016-01-13 上海贝尔股份有限公司 For the method and apparatus that the timing advance group of detected cells changes
EP2742748A4 (en) 2011-08-12 2015-08-26 Intel Corp System and method of uplink power control in a wireless communication system
US9265069B2 (en) * 2011-08-12 2016-02-16 Lg Electronics Inc. Method of performing a random access process and wireless device using same
US9521632B2 (en) 2011-08-15 2016-12-13 Google Technology Holdings LLC Power allocation for overlapping transmission when multiple timing advances are used
EP2560446A1 (en) 2011-08-18 2013-02-20 MStar Semiconductor, Inc Reducing interference in wireless time division duplex systems by monitoring and limiting timing advance
US20130044843A1 (en) 2011-08-19 2013-02-21 Nokia Corporation Method and apparatus for performing timing synchronization
JP2013051540A (en) 2011-08-31 2013-03-14 Sharp Corp Wireless relay communication system, wireless communication system, mobile station device database, base station device, wireless station device, integrated circuit, computer program, and recording medium
TW201320796A (en) 2011-09-06 2013-05-16 Innovative Sonic Corp Method and apparatus for performing timing advance (TA) group change in a wirless communication system
US20130064195A1 (en) 2011-09-08 2013-03-14 Po-Yu Chang Method of Handling Random Access Procedure on Secondary Cell when Primary Cell Time Alignment Timer Expires
US9204411B2 (en) 2011-09-12 2015-12-01 Qualcomm Incorporated Support of multiple timing advance groups for user equipment in carrier aggregation in LTE
KR102014792B1 (en) 2011-09-21 2019-08-27 엘지전자 주식회사 Terminal device for controlling uplink signal transmission power, and method therefor
CN103597886B (en) 2011-09-25 2018-01-02 Lg电子株式会社 Method and apparatus for controlling uplink transmission power
US9008035B2 (en) 2011-09-29 2015-04-14 Futurewei Technologies, Inc. Wireless communication control channel systems and methods
KR101306377B1 (en) 2011-09-29 2013-09-09 엘지전자 주식회사 Method and apparatus for uplink transmission
US9319909B2 (en) * 2011-09-29 2016-04-19 Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha Devices for radio link monitoring
EP3490320B1 (en) 2011-09-30 2023-08-23 InterDigital Patent Holdings, Inc. Device communication using a reduced channel bandwidth
JP5813444B2 (en) * 2011-09-30 2015-11-17 シャープ株式会社 Base station, terminal, communication system and communication method
WO2013048332A2 (en) 2011-09-30 2013-04-04 Telefonaktiebolaget L M Ericsson (Publ) Determining a point in time for transmissions
EP2763471B1 (en) * 2011-09-30 2018-07-04 Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha Terminal and communication method
US8891402B2 (en) 2011-09-30 2014-11-18 Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha Devices for reporting uplink information
EP3681050A1 (en) 2011-09-30 2020-07-15 InterDigital Patent Holdings, Inc. Multipoint transmission in wireless communication
US9060343B2 (en) 2011-10-03 2015-06-16 Mediatek, Inc. Support of network based positioning by sounding reference signal
US9319990B2 (en) 2011-10-03 2016-04-19 Qualcomm Incorporated Method and apparatus for uplink transmission power control and timing in coordinated multipoint transmission schemes
US9007960B2 (en) 2011-10-04 2015-04-14 Google Technology Holdings LLC Method for contention based random access on a secondary carrier
WO2013051991A1 (en) 2011-10-07 2013-04-11 Telefonaktiebolaget L M Ericsson (Publ) Uplink synchronization method and user equipment
KR20130045169A (en) 2011-10-24 2013-05-03 주식회사 팬택 Apparatus and method for performing uplink synchronization in multiple component carrier system
WO2013066075A1 (en) 2011-11-01 2013-05-10 엘지전자 주식회사 Method for determining the transmission of a sounding reference signal in a wireless communication system, and terminal therefor
CN114245444B (en) 2011-11-04 2024-08-30 交互数字专利控股公司 Method and apparatus for power control for wireless transmission on multiple component carriers associated with multiple timing advances
US9191166B2 (en) 2011-11-04 2015-11-17 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Apparatus and method for defining timing reference for secondary cells in a secondary timing advance group
US9686814B2 (en) 2011-11-07 2017-06-20 Industrial Technology Research Institute Method of reference cell maintenance
JP5990815B2 (en) * 2011-11-07 2016-09-14 シャープ株式会社 Base station, terminal, communication system and communication method
EP2779759A4 (en) * 2011-11-08 2015-04-22 Lg Electronics Inc Method and device for setting uplink transmission power in wireless communication system
JP2013102398A (en) 2011-11-09 2013-05-23 Ntt Docomo Inc Radio communication system, user terminal and radio communication method
GB2497734B (en) 2011-12-16 2014-11-26 Broadcom Corp Method and apparatus for mapping to an uplink resource
CN103167574B (en) 2011-12-19 2015-11-25 华为技术有限公司 Determine Timing Advance group technology and the equipment of Serving cell
CN104955144B (en) 2011-12-19 2021-05-18 华为技术有限公司 Uplink transmission power control method and user equipment
US9668187B2 (en) * 2011-12-19 2017-05-30 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Network node and method in a network node
WO2013109177A1 (en) 2012-01-17 2013-07-25 Telefonaktiebolaget L M Ericsson (Publ) Support of switching tti bundling on/off
US8681727B2 (en) 2012-01-20 2014-03-25 Nokia Corporation Flexible radio channel sounding
US8964780B2 (en) 2012-01-25 2015-02-24 Ofinno Technologies, Llc Sounding in multicarrier wireless communications
US8462688B1 (en) 2012-01-25 2013-06-11 Ofinno Technologies, Llc Base station and wireless device radio resource control configuration
EP3937551A3 (en) 2012-01-25 2022-02-09 Comcast Cable Communications, LLC Random access channel in multicarrier wireless communications with timing advance groups
US8964683B2 (en) 2012-04-20 2015-02-24 Ofinno Technologies, Llc Sounding signal in a multicarrier wireless device
US9237537B2 (en) 2012-01-25 2016-01-12 Ofinno Technologies, Llc Random access process in a multicarrier base station and wireless device
US9001780B2 (en) 2012-01-27 2015-04-07 Qualcomm Incorporated Physical layer issues related to multi-TA group support
WO2013112029A1 (en) 2012-01-29 2013-08-01 엘지전자 주식회사 Method for controlling uplink transmission power and wireless device using same
US20130196707A1 (en) 2012-01-29 2013-08-01 Telefonaktiebolaget L M Ericsson (Publ) User Equipment, Network Node and Methods Therein
US10206181B2 (en) 2012-01-30 2019-02-12 Texas Instruments Incorporated Simultaneous transmission in multiple timing advance groups
US20130195086A1 (en) 2012-02-01 2013-08-01 Qualcomm Incorporated Timing management in uplink (ul) coordinated multipoint (comp) transmission
US10499409B2 (en) 2012-02-02 2019-12-03 Genghiscomm Holdings, LLC Cooperative and parasitic radio access networks
US8879518B2 (en) 2012-02-08 2014-11-04 Acer Incorporated Method of timing reference management
US9100146B2 (en) 2012-03-08 2015-08-04 Alcatel Lucent Virtual sectorization using an active anntenna array
US20130242892A1 (en) 2012-03-16 2013-09-19 Acer Incorporated Apparatuses and methods for handling random access procedures
EP2640138A1 (en) 2012-03-16 2013-09-18 Panasonic Corporation Reconfiguration of timing advance groups
WO2013141647A1 (en) 2012-03-22 2013-09-26 엘지전자 주식회사 Method and device for controlling uplink transmit power in wireless access system
CN103369650B (en) 2012-03-26 2017-02-08 电信科学技术研究院 Uplink power control method and user equipment
US8767581B2 (en) 2012-03-28 2014-07-01 Sharp Laboratories Of America, Inc. Coordinated multipoint (CoMP) radio resource management (RRM) measurement
US20130258956A1 (en) 2012-04-01 2013-10-03 Esmael Hejazi Dinan Random Access Process in a Wireless Device
EP2835023B1 (en) 2012-04-01 2021-09-01 Comcast Cable Communications, LLC Cell group configuration in a wireless device and base station with timing advance groups
US20130258862A1 (en) 2012-04-01 2013-10-03 Esmael Hejazi Dinan Radio Access for a Wireless Device and Base Station
US9497797B2 (en) 2012-04-02 2016-11-15 Intel Deutschland Gmbh Radio communication devices and methods for operating radio communication devices
US8964593B2 (en) 2012-04-16 2015-02-24 Ofinno Technologies, Llc Wireless device transmission power
US9210664B2 (en) 2012-04-17 2015-12-08 Ofinno Technologies. LLC Preamble transmission in a wireless device
WO2013158511A1 (en) 2012-04-16 2013-10-24 Dinan Esmael Hejazi Cell group configuration for uplink transmission in a multicarrier wireless device and base station with timing advance groups
US9179425B2 (en) 2012-04-17 2015-11-03 Ofinno Technologies, Llc Transmit power control in multicarrier communications
DK2847917T3 (en) 2012-05-11 2019-02-18 Ericsson Telefon Ab L M FITTING AND PROCEDURE FOR DOWNLINK SCHEDULING
US8971298B2 (en) 2012-06-18 2015-03-03 Ofinno Technologies, Llc Wireless device connection to an application server
US9210619B2 (en) 2012-06-20 2015-12-08 Ofinno Technologies, Llc Signalling mechanisms for wireless device handover
US9113387B2 (en) 2012-06-20 2015-08-18 Ofinno Technologies, Llc Handover signalling in wireless networks
US9179457B2 (en) 2012-06-20 2015-11-03 Ofinno Technologies, Llc Carrier configuration in wireless networks
US9107206B2 (en) 2012-06-18 2015-08-11 Ofinne Technologies, LLC Carrier grouping in multicarrier wireless networks
US9084228B2 (en) 2012-06-20 2015-07-14 Ofinno Technologies, Llc Automobile communication device
US9629097B2 (en) 2012-08-01 2017-04-18 Lg Electronics Inc. Method and apparatus for configuring uplink transmission power based on time alignment groups
WO2014085967A1 (en) 2012-12-03 2014-06-12 华为技术有限公司 Method and user equipment for adjusting sending time
EP3509362A1 (en) 2014-01-29 2019-07-10 Interdigital Patent Holdings, Inc. Uplink transmissions in wireless communications
US10045332B2 (en) 2014-05-09 2018-08-07 Qualcomm Incorporated UE autonomous radio resource configuration extension
US10219257B2 (en) 2014-06-17 2019-02-26 Lg Electronics Inc. Method and device for transmitting uplink control information

Cited By (13)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US11088881B2 (en) * 2015-07-05 2021-08-10 Ofinno, Llc Starting time alignment timer in response to an RRC message
US10382238B2 (en) * 2015-07-05 2019-08-13 Ofinno, Llc Uplink signal transmission in a wireless device
US12101210B2 (en) 2015-07-05 2024-09-24 Ofinno, Llc Starting time alignment timer before receiving an initial timing advance command
US11695603B2 (en) 2015-07-05 2023-07-04 Ofinno, Llc Starting a time alignment timer before receiving an initial timing advance command
EP3866376A1 (en) 2018-01-09 2021-08-18 Ofinno, LLC Physical and mac layer processes in a wireless device
US11019518B2 (en) 2018-01-09 2021-05-25 Ofinno, Llc Random access and bandwidth part operation
WO2019139962A1 (en) * 2018-01-09 2019-07-18 Ofinno, Llc Physical and mac layer processes in a wireless device
US11006305B2 (en) 2018-01-09 2021-05-11 Ofinno, Llc Physical and MAC layer processes in a wireless device
US11711713B2 (en) 2018-01-09 2023-07-25 Beijing Xiaomi Mobile Software Co., Ltd. Starting a bandwidth part inactivity timer of an active bandwidth
US11765613B2 (en) 2018-01-09 2023-09-19 Beijing Xiaomi Mobile Software Co., Ltd. Activation of semi-persistent channel state information in a wireless device
US12108273B2 (en) 2018-01-09 2024-10-01 Beijing Xiaomi Mobile Software Co., Ltd. Activation of semi-persistent channel state information in a wireless device
US11751082B2 (en) * 2019-05-21 2023-09-05 Qualcomm Incorporated Reporting of information related to sounding reference signals (SRS) timing adjustments
WO2021026802A1 (en) * 2019-08-14 2021-02-18 Qualcomm Incorporated Timing advance adjustment for downlink carrier aggregation

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
US20190059090A1 (en) 2019-02-21
US20130188619A1 (en) 2013-07-25
EP2947933B1 (en) 2023-07-19
US20230124936A1 (en) 2023-04-20
US8553558B1 (en) 2013-10-08
US11903000B2 (en) 2024-02-13
US10154500B2 (en) 2018-12-11
US9237537B2 (en) 2016-01-12
US8531966B1 (en) 2013-09-10
WO2013112773A1 (en) 2013-08-01
EP2947933A1 (en) 2015-11-25
EP2807884A1 (en) 2014-12-03
US8526310B2 (en) 2013-09-03
US20240188112A1 (en) 2024-06-06
US20210337545A1 (en) 2021-10-28
US20130188612A1 (en) 2013-07-25
US11516812B2 (en) 2022-11-29
US20160100409A1 (en) 2016-04-07
US11013011B2 (en) 2021-05-18

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US12114369B2 (en) Multicarrier communications employing time alignment timers
US8553558B1 (en) Uplink sounding transmission with carrier aggregation

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
STCF Information on status: patent grant

Free format text: PATENTED CASE

FEPP Fee payment procedure

Free format text: PAT HOLDER NO LONGER CLAIMS SMALL ENTITY STATUS, ENTITY STATUS SET TO UNDISCOUNTED (ORIGINAL EVENT CODE: STOL); ENTITY STATUS OF PATENT OWNER: LARGE ENTITY

AS Assignment

Owner name: COMCAST CABLE COMMUNICATIONS, LLC, PENNSYLVANIA

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNOR:OFINNO TECHNOLOGIES, LLC;REEL/FRAME:039709/0922

Effective date: 20160816

FPAY Fee payment

Year of fee payment: 4

AS Assignment

Owner name: OFINNO TECHNOLOGIES, LLC, VIRGINIA

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNOR:DINAN, ESMAEL;REEL/FRAME:043508/0847

Effective date: 20130623

MAFP Maintenance fee payment

Free format text: PAYMENT OF MAINTENANCE FEE, 8TH YEAR, LARGE ENTITY (ORIGINAL EVENT CODE: M1552); ENTITY STATUS OF PATENT OWNER: LARGE ENTITY

Year of fee payment: 8